2010 GMC Acadia Owner Manual M

In Brief ...... 1-1 Storage ...... 4-1 Climate Controls ...... 8-1 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Storage Compartments ...... 4-1 Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Initial Drive Information ...... 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Air Vents ...... 8-12 Vehicle Features ...... 1-15 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Performance and Driving and Operating ...... 9-1 Maintenance ...... 1-20 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving Information ...... 9-2 Controls ...... 5-2 Starting and Operating ...... 9-17 Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Engine Exhaust ...... 9-23 Keys and Locks ...... 2-2 Indicators ...... 5-10 Automatic Transmission ...... 9-24 Doors ...... 2-9 Information Displays ...... 5-24 Drive Systems ...... 9-28 Vehicle Security...... 2-13 Vehicle Messages ...... 5-36 Brakes ...... 9-28 Exterior Mirrors ...... 2-16 Vehicle Personalization ...... 5-45 Ride Control Systems ...... 9-30 Interior Mirrors ...... 2-19 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-52 Cruise Control ...... 9-32 Windows ...... 2-20 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-35 Roof ...... 2-22 Lighting ...... 6-1 Fuel ...... 9-42 Exterior Lighting ...... 6-1 Towing...... 9-47 Seats and Restraints ...... 3-1 Interior Lighting ...... 6-5 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-59 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lighting Features ...... 6-6 Front Seats ...... 3-3 Vehicle Care ...... 10-1 Rear Seats ...... 3-10 Infotainment System ...... 7-1 General Information ...... 10-2 Safety Belts ...... 3-16 Introduction ...... 7-1 Vehicle Checks ...... 10-4 Airbag System ...... 3-32 Radio ...... 7-6 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-28 Child Restraints ...... 3-46 Audio Players ...... 7-12 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Rear Seat Infotainment ...... 7-36 Electrical System ...... 10-29 Phone ...... 7-46 2010 GMC Acadia Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires ...... 10-36 Jump Starting ...... 10-79 Towing...... 10-83 Appearance Care ...... 10-86 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 General Information ...... 11-1 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts ...... 11-8 Maintenance Records ...... 11-11 Technical Data ...... 12-1 Vehicle Identification ...... 12-1 Vehicle Data ...... 12-2 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Customer Information ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy...... 13-16 Index ...... i-1 Introduction iii

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your substitute the name “General dealer/retailer or from: GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Motors of Canada Limited” for GMC On peut obtenir un exemplaire de Emblem, GMC, the GMC Emblem, wherever it appears in this manual. ce guide en français auprès du and the name ACADIA, are Keep this manual in the vehicle for concessionnaire ou à l'adresse registered trademarks of General quick reference. suivante: Motors. Helm, Incorporated This manual describes features that P.O. Box 07130 may or may not be on your specific Detroit, MI 48207 vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or 1-800-551-4123 due to changes subsequent to the Numéro de poste 6438 de printing of this owner manual. langue française www.helminc.com

Using this Manual Symbols { WARNING To quickly locate information The vehicle has components and about the vehicle, use the Index in These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of the back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or manual and the page number where information relating to a specific it can be found. Notice: This means there is component, control, message, something that could result in gauge, or indicator. property or vehicle damage. Danger, Warnings, and M : This symbol is shown when This would not be covered by you need to see your owner manual Cautions the vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or Warning messages found on vehicle information. labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when reduce them. you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or Danger indicates a hazard with a information. high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. A circle with a slash through it Warning or Caution indicates a is a safety symbol which means hazard that could result in injury or “Do Not,”“Do not do this” or death. “Do not let this happen.” Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control } : Power Here are some additional symbols B : Engine Coolant Temperature / : Remote Vehicle Start that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more O : Exterior Lamps > : Safety Belt Reminders information on the symbol, refer to # : Fog Lamps 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor the index. . : Fuel Gauge F : Traction Control : Airbag Readiness Light 9 + : Fuses M : Windshield Washer Fluid : Air Conditioning # i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls j : LATCH System Child or OnStar® Restraints $ : Brake System Warning Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp " : Charging System : : Oil Pressure vi Introduction

2 NOTES In Brief 1-1

Safety Belt ...... 1-9 Performance and Maintenance In Brief Sensing System for Passenger StabiliTrak® ...... 1-20 Airbag ...... 1-9 Tire Pressure Monitor ...... 1-20 Instrument Panel Mirror Adjustment ...... 1-10 Tire Sealant and Steering Wheel Compressor Kit ...... 1-20 Instrument Panel ...... 1-2 Adjustment ...... 1-11 Engine Oil Life System ...... 1-21 Initial Drive Information Interior Lighting ...... 1-11 Driving for Better Fuel Initial Drive Information ...... 1-4 Exterior Lighting ...... 1-12 Economy ...... 1-21 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12 Roadside Assistance System ...... 1-4 Climate Controls ...... 1-13 Program ...... 1-22 OnStar® ...... 1-22 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 1-5 Vehicle Features Door Locks ...... 1-5 Radio(s) ...... 1-15 Liftgate ...... 1-6 Satellite Radio ...... 1-16 Windows ...... 1-6 Portable Audio Devices ...... 1-16 Seat Adjustment ...... 1-7 Bluetooth® ...... 1-17 Second Row Seats ...... 1-7 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17 Third Row Seats ...... 1-8 Navigation System ...... 1-18 Heated Seats ...... 1-8 Cruise Control ...... 1-18 Heated and Ventilated Storage Compartments ...... 1-18 Seats ...... 1-8 Power Outlets ...... 1-19 Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8 Sunroof ...... 1-19 1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑12. I. Instrument Panel Illumination P. Center Console Shift Lever B. Windshield Wiper/Washer on Control on page 6‑5. (If Equipped). See “Console Shift Lever under Shifting Into Park page 5‑4. J. Cruise Control on page 9‑32. ” on page 9‑21. C. Instrument Cluster on K. Steering Wheel Adjustment on Q. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 5‑11. page 5‑2. page 6‑3. D. Head-Up Display (HUD) on L. Horn on page 5‑4. R. Cupholders on page 4‑1. page 5‑32 (If Equipped). M. Steering Wheel Controls on S. Power Outlets on page 5 8. E. Solar Sensor. See Dual page 5‑2. ‑ Automatic Climate Control N. Driver Information Center (DIC) T. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on System on page 8‑4. Buttons. See Driver Information page 5‑5. F. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) U. Heated Front Seats on Navigation/Radio System on page 5‑24 or Driver page 3‑9 (If Equipped). (If Equipped). See Navigation Information Center (DIC) V. Passenger Airbag Status System manual. (Without DIC Buttons) on Indicator on page 5‑15 G. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 5‑29. (If Equipped). page 6 1. O. Dual Automatic Climate Control ‑ W. Glove Box on page 4‑1. H. Hood Release. See Hood on System on page 8‑4. page 10‑5. 1-4 In Brief

Initial Drive Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized. Information To open or close the liftgate, press This section provides a brief and hold & until the liftgate overview about some of the begins to move. important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle. Press L and release to locate the vehicle. For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can be Press L and hold for more than found later in this owner manual. two seconds to sound the panic alarm. Remote Keyless Entry Press K to unlock the driver door. (RKE) System Press L again to cancel the panic Press K again within five seconds alarm. The RKE transmitter is used to to unlock all remaining doors. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) remotely lock and unlock the doors System Operation on page 2 3. from up to 60 m (195 feet) away Press Q to lock all doors. ‑ from the vehicle. In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle Start The engine will continue to run for Door Locks 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a Starting the Vehicle 10-minute time extension. Remote To lock or unlock a door manually: With this feature the engine can be start can be extended only once. . From the inside use the door started from outside of the vehicle. Canceling a Remote Start lock knob on the window sill. . From the outside turn the key 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the To cancel a remote start: vehicle. toward the front or rear of . Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle, or press the Q or 2. Press Q. the vehicle and press and " button on the Remote Keyless 3. Immediately after completing hold / until the parking lamps Entry (RKE) transmitter. turn off. Step 2, press and hold / until Power Door Locks the parking lamps flash. . Turn on the hazard warning flashers. On vehicles with power door locks, When the vehicle starts, the parking the controls are located on the front lamps will turn on and remain on as . Turn the ignition switch on and doors. long as the engine is running. The then off. " (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors will be locked and the climate See Remote Vehicle Start on control system may come on. doors. page 2‑5. Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. See Power Door Locks on page 2‑8. 1-6 In Brief

Liftgate Windows To open the liftgate the vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the touchpad under the liftgate handle. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid. Power Liftgate On vehicles with a power liftgate, the vehicle must be in P (Park) to operate it. . Press and hold the liftgate . Press the liftgate button on the button & on the Remote center console. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. . Press the touchpad switch on On vehicles with power windows, the outside liftgate handle. the switches are on the driver door armrest. Each passenger door has For more information see Liftgate a switch that controls only that on page 2 9. ‑ window. Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up to raise it. For more information, see Power Windows on page 2‑20. In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward Second Row Seats by moving the control (A) forward or Manual Seats rearward. 1. Pull the handle under the seat to Raise or lower the entire seat by unlock the seat. moving the control (A) up or down. 2. Slide the seat to the desired See Power Seat Adjustment on position and release the handle. page 3‑4. Try to move the seat to be sure it is To raise or recline the seatback, tilt locked in place. the top of the control (B) forward or rearward. Power Seats See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑7. Press the front or rear of the To access the third row, pull the control (C) to increase or decrease sliding seat lever forward so that the lumbar support. seat cushion folds and the entire See Lumbar Adjustment on seat slides forward. page 3‑6. See Rear Seats on page 3‑10.

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control B. Reclining Seatbacks C. Lumbar Adjustment 1-8 In Brief

Third Row Seats Heated Seats Heated and Ventilated The third row seats can be folded Heated Front Seats Seats forward or removed. The heated seat controls are On vehicles with this feature, the located on the center console. controls are on the front doors near The engine must be running to the handle. operate them. H : Press to ventilate the seat. I: Press to turn on the heated z : Press to heat the seat. seatback. For more information see Heated J: Press to turn on or off the and Ventilated Front Seats on heated seat and seatback. page 3‑10. For more information see Heated Front Seats on page 3‑9. Head Restraint Adjustment Do not drive until the head restraints Pull up on the release lever located for all occupants are installed and on the back of the seat and push adjusted properly. the seatback forward. For more information see Head For detailed procedures see Restraints on page 3‑2. Third Row Seats on page 3‑13. In Brief 1-9

Safety Belt Sensing System for The driver airbag, seat‐mounted side impact airbags, and roof‐rail Passenger Airbag airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑39 for more United States information.

Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly. Canada . Safety Belts on page 3 16. ‑ The passenger sensing system . How to Wear Safety Belts will turn off the right front Properly on page 3‑19. passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑25. . Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑55. 1-10 In Brief

Mirror Adjustment Folding Mirrors Interior Mirror Exterior Mirrors For vehicles with outside power If equipped, a manual inside foldaway mirrors: rearview mirror can be adjusted so 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out that the driver can see behind the to the driving position. vehicle more clearly. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or down 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to and side to side. Use the day/night the folded position. adjustment to help prevent glare If equipped, manually fold the from the headlamps behind you. mirrors inward to prevent damage Move the lever located at the base when going through an automatic of the mirror, to the right for car wash. To fold, push the mirror nighttime use and to the left for toward the vehicle. Push the mirror daytime use. outward to return it to the original For vehicles with an automatic position. dimming rearview mirror, the mirror Controls for the outside power will move automatically to reduce mirrors are located on the driver the glare from the headlamps of the door armrest. vehicle behind. The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the illuminates each time the ignition is driver or passenger side mirror. turned to start. 2. Press one of the four arrows See Automatic Dimming Rearview located on the control pad to Mirror on page 2‑19. adjust the mirror. 3. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. In Brief 1-11

Steering Wheel Interior Lighting Dome Lamp Override Adjustment Dome Lamps The dome lamp override button is next to the exterior lamps control. The dome lamps are located in the E overhead console and above the : Press the button in and the rear seat passengers. dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to The dome lamps automatically return it to the extended position so come on when a door is opened, that the dome lamps come on when unless the dome lamp override a door is opened. button is pressed in. Reading Lamps To manually turn them on, turn the instrument panel brightness control Press the button near each lamp to clockwise to the farthest position. turn them on or off. For more information, see: 1. Pull the lever down to adjust the . Dome Lamps on page 6‑5. steering wheel. . Instrument Panel Illumination 2. Move the steering wheel up or Control on page 6‑5. down or backward or forward into a comfortable position. 3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. See Steering Wheel Adjustment on page 5‑2. 1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting ;: Manual operation of the parking Windshield Wiper/Washer lamps and other exterior lamps. The windshield wiper/washer lever 2: Manual operation of the is located on the left side of the headlamps and other exterior steering column. lamps. # (If Equipped): Push the fog lamp button in to turn on the fog lamps. For more information, see: . Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6‑1. . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ Automatic Headlamp System on page 6 3. The exterior lamps control is located ‑ on the instrument panel, to the left . Fog Lamps on page 6‑4. of the steering wheel. 9 : Turns the automatic light Turn the band with the wiper symbol control on or off. to control the windshield wipers. AUTO: Automatic operation of the 8 : Use for a single wiping cycle. headlamps at normal brightness and 9 : Turns the wipers off. other exterior lamps. In Brief 1-13

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn the Climate Controls band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. 1: Slow wipes. 2: Fast wipes. Windshield Washer J : Press the button at the end of the turn signal/lane change lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 5‑4. A. Fan Control E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) B. Temperature Control F. Air Recirculation C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger D. Air Conditioning 1-14 In Brief

See Climate Control Systems on page 8‑1 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8‑4 (If Equipped). For more information about the rear climate control, see Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) on page 8‑10 or Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.

A. Fan Control H. Display B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Air Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control In Brief 1-15

Vehicle Features 4 : Change the display between the radio station frequency and the Radio(s) time, if equipped. While the ignition is off, press 4 to display the time. For more information about these and other radio features, see Operation on page 7‑2. Storing a Favorite Station A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites using the six softkeys located below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button. Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑6. O : Press to turn the system f : Select radio stations. on and off. Turn to increase or © ¨ : Seek or scan stations. decrease the volume. BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped. 1-16 In Brief

Setting the Clock Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices To set the time and date for the Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite This vehicle may have an auxiliary radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite input located on the radio faceplate 1. Turn the ignition key to Radio subscription can receive XM and a USB port located in the center ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, programming. console. External devices such as ® then press O , to turn the iPod , laptop computers, MP3 XM Satellite Radio Service players, CD changers, USB storage radio on. XM is a satellite radio service device, etc. can be connected to the 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, that is based in the 48 contiguous auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, United States and 10 Canadian input jack or the USB port month, day, and year). provinces. XM Satellite Radio depending on the audio system. has a wide variety of programming 3. Press the pushbutton located See Auxiliary Devices on and commercial-free music, page 7‑34. under any one of the labels to be coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality changed. sound. A fee is required to receive 4. To increase or decrease the time the XM service. or date, turn f clockwise or For more information refer to: counter‐clockwise. . www.xmradio.com or call For detailed instructions on setting 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). the clock for the vehicles specific . audio system, see Clock on www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada). page 5‑8. See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8. In Brief 1-17

® Bluetooth Steering Wheel Controls + e − e : Increases or decreases The in-vehicle Bluetooth volume. system allows users with a c : Press to reject an incoming Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to call, or to end a call. make and receive hands-free calls SRCE: Press to switch between using the vehicle’s audio system, the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, microphone and controls. DVD, front auxiliary, and rear The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone auxiliary. must be paired with the in-vehicle ¨ : Press to seek the next radio Bluetooth system before it can be station, the next track or chapter used in the vehicle. Not all phones while sourced to the CD or DVD will support all functions. slot, or to select tracks and folders See Bluetooth on page 7‑46. on an iPod® or USB device. w / x : Press to change favorite radio stations, select tracks on a For more information, see Steering CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or Wheel Controls on page 5‑2. folders on an iPod® or USB device. b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than two seconds to interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems. 1-18 In Brief

Navigation System Cruise Control Storage Compartments The vehicle's navigation system provides detailed maps of most major freeways and roads throughout the United States and Canada. After a destination has been set, the system provides turn-by-turn instructions for reaching the destination. In addition, the system can help locate a variety of points of interest (POI), such as banks, airports, restaurants, and more. See the vehicle's Navigation System T : On/Off. For vehicles with a second row manual for more information. + RES: Press to accelerate or center console, open each area to resume speed. access the storage compartment inside. SET– : Press to set speed or decrease speed. [ : Press to cancel cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 9‑32. In Brief 1-19

Power Outlets The vehicle has three 12‐volt accessory power outlets which can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone. The power outlets are located: . On the instrument panel below the climate controls. . At the rear of the center floor Press the buttons (B, C) on the front console. The switch to operate the front of the consoles to access the upper . In the rear cargo area. sunroof is on the headliner above and lower storage areas. the rearview mirror. To use the outlets, remove the Increase the storage area by folding cover. Vent: Press the front or rear of the the top of the console forward. Lift switch to vent or close the sunroof. See Power Outlets on page 5‑8. up on rear console handle (A) and Express-open/Express-close: pull forward. Sunroof From the closed position, press See Floor Console Storage on and release the rear or front of page 4‑2. The ignition must be in ON/RUN the switch to express-open or or ACC/ACCESSORY to operate express-close the sunroof. the sunroof and power sunshade. See Retained Accessory Power For more information see Sunroof (RAP) on page 9‑19. on page 2‑22. 1-20 In Brief

Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire pressure Maintenance This vehicle may have a Tire warning light will appear when the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). vehicle is first started and then StabiliTrak® turn off as you drive. This may be an early indicator that your tire The traction control system limits pressures are getting low and the wheel spin and the StabiliTrak tires need to be inflated to the system assists with directional proper pressure. control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. Both systems Note: The Tire Pressure Monitor turn on automatically every time the The Tire Pressure Monitor System System can alert you about low tire vehicle is started. alerts you when a significant pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance. . reduction in pressure occurs in To turn off the traction control It is the driver’s responsibility to part of StabiliTrak, press and one or more of your vehicle’s tires by illuminating the low tire pressure maintain correct tire pressures. release 5 located on the warning light on the instrument See Tire Pressure Monitor System instrument panel below the cluster. If the warning light comes on page 10‑44 and Tire Pressure climate controls. F illuminates on, stop as soon as possible and Monitor Operation on page 10‑46. and the appropriate DIC inflate the tires to the recommended message is displayed. pressure shown on the tire loading Tire Sealant and See Vehicle Messages on information label located on the page 5‑36. driver side center pillar (B pillar). Compressor Kit . The StabiliTrak system See Vehicle Load Limits on This vehicle may come with a jack remains on. page 9‑12. The warning light will and spare tire or a tire sealant and remain on until the tire pressure is compressor kit. The kit can be used For more information, see corrected. to seal small punctures in the tread StabiliTrak System on page 9‑30. area of the tire. In Brief 1-21

See Tire Sealant and Compressor Press the trip odometer reset Driving for Better Fuel Kit on page 10‑59 for complete stem until “Oil Life Remaining” operating information. displays. Economy 3. If the vehicle has Driver Driving habits can affect fuel Engine Oil Life System Information Center (DIC) mileage. Here are some driving buttons: Press and hold the tips to get the best fuel economy The engine oil life system calculates possible. engine oil life based on vehicle use set/reset button until “100%” is and displays the “Change Engine displayed. Three chimes sound . Avoid fast starts and accelerate Oil Soon” message when it is time and the “Change Engine Oil smoothly. Soon message goes off. to change the engine oil and filter. ” . Brake gradually and avoid The oil life system should be reset If the vehicle does not have abrupt stops. to 100% only following an oil Driver Information Center (DIC) . Avoid idling the engine for long change. buttons: Press and hold the trip periods of time. Resetting the Oil Life System odometer reset stem until “Oil Life Remaining” shows “100%.” . When road and weather 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Three chimes sound and the conditions are appropriate, use with the engine off. “Change Engine Oil Soon” cruise control, if equipped. 2. If the vehicle has Driver message goes off. . Always follow posted speed Information Center (DIC) 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. limits or drive more slowly when buttons: Press the vehicle conditions require. information button until See Engine Oil Life System on . Keep vehicle tires properly “Oil Life Remaining” displays. page 10‑9. inflated. If the vehicle does not have . Driver Information Center (DIC) Combine several trips into a buttons: The vehicle must be in single trip. P (Park) to access this display. 1-22 In Brief

. Replace the vehicle's tires with Roadside Assistance and OnStar OnStar® the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall If you have a current OnStar near the size. subscription, press the OnStar button and the current GPS location . Follow recommended scheduled will be sent to an OnStar Advisor maintenance. who will assess your problem, contact Roadside Assistance, and Roadside Assistance relay exact location to get you the Program help you need. OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to U.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782) Online Owner Center provide a wide range of safety, TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 The Online Owner Center is a security, navigation, diagnostics, complimentary service that includes and calling services. Canada: 1-800-268-6800 online service reminders, vehicle As the owner of a new GMC, you maintenance tips, online owner Automatic Crash Response are automatically enrolled in the manual, special privileges In a crash, built in sensors can Roadside Assistance program. This and more. automatically alert an OnStar program provides technically trained Sign up today at: advisor who is immediately advisors who are available 24 hours www.gmownercenter.com/gmc connected to the vehicle to a day, 365 days a year, minor repair (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada). see if you need help. information or towing arrangements. In Brief 1-23

How OnStar Service Works 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information. This Q : This blue button connects you speak with an OnStar advisor information is automatically sent to to a specially trained OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. an OnStar call center when Q is to verify your account information For a full description of OnStar and to answer questions. services and system limitations, see pressed, ] is pressed, or if the ] : Push this red emergency the OnStar Owner's Guide in the airbags or ACR system deploy. button to get priority help from glove box. This information usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in specially trained OnStar emergency OnStar service is subject to the advisors. the event of a crash, additional OnStar terms and conditions information regarding the crash that X : Push this button for hands‐free, included in the OnStar Subscriber the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the voice‐activated calling and to give Information. direction from which the vehicle was voice commands for turn‐by‐turn OnStar service cannot work unless hit). When the virtual advisor feature navigation. the vehicle is in a place where of OnStar hands-free calling is Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle OnStar has an agreement with a used, the vehicle also sends OnStar Assistance, Vehicle Diagnostics, wireless service provider for service the vehicle's GPS location so they Remote Door Unlock, Roadside in that area. OnStar service also can provide services where it is Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn cannot work unless the vehicle is in located. Navigation and Hands‐Free a place where the wireless service Location information about the Calling are available on most provider OnStar has hired for that vehicle is only available if the GPS vehicles. Not all OnStar services area has coverage, network satellite signals are unobstructed are available on all vehicles. capacity and reception when the and available. For more information see the service is needed, and technology OnStar Owner's Guide or visit that is compatible with the OnStar www.onstar.com (U.S.) or service. Not all services are www.onstar.ca (Canada), contact available everywhere, particularly in OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR remote or enclosed areas, or at all (1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY times. 1-24 In Brief

The vehicle must have a working OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility electrical system, including Controls Increase the volume of the radio if adequate battery power, for the the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. OnStar equipment to operate. There This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute are other problems OnStar cannot button that can be used to interact If the light next to the OnStar control that may prevent OnStar with OnStar hands-free calling. buttons is red, the system may from providing OnStar service at See Steering Wheel Controls on not be functioning properly. page 5 2 for more information. any particular time or place. Some ‑ Press Q and request a vehicle examples are damage to important On some vehicles, the mute button diagnostic. If the light appears clear parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, can be used to dial numbers into (no light is appearing), your OnStar tall buildings, tunnels, weather or voice mail systems, or to dial phone subscription has expired and all wireless phone network congestion. extensions. See the OnStar Owner's services have been deactivated. Guide for more information. Press Q to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Doors Windows Keys, Doors and Liftgate ...... 2-9 Windows ...... 2-20 Windows Power Windows ...... 2-20 Vehicle Security Sun Visors ...... 2-22 Vehicle Security ...... 2-13 Roof Keys and Locks Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Sunroof ...... 2-22 Keys ...... 2-2 Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-14 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ...... 2-2 Exterior Mirrors Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Convex Mirrors ...... 2-16 System Operation ...... 2-3 Power Mirrors ...... 2-17 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Folding Mirrors ...... 2-17 Door Locks ...... 2-7 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-18 Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-18 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Automatic Door Locks ...... 2-8 Interior Mirrors Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 2-19 Safety Locks ...... 2-8 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ...... 2-19 2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Keys Be sure you have spare keys. If you are locked out of the vehicle, { WARNING call the Roadside Assistance Leaving children in a vehicle with Center. See Roadside Assistance the ignition key is dangerous for Program on page 13‑6. many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even Remote Keyless Entry killed. They could operate the (RKE) System power windows or other controls The key is used for the ignition and See Radio Frequency Statement on or even make the vehicle move. all door locks. page 13‑17 for information The windows will function with the The key has a bar-coded key tag regarding Part 15 of the Federal keys in the ignition and children that the dealer/retailer or qualified Communications Commission (FCC) could be seriously injured or killed locksmith can use to make new Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry if caught in the path of a closing keys. Store this information in a Canada. window. Do not leave the keys in safe place, not in the vehicle. Changes or modifications to a vehicle with children. See your dealer/retailer if a this system by other than an replacement key or additional key authorized service facility could void is needed. authorization to use this equipment. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

If there is a decrease in the RKE There are other conditions which If enabled through the Driver operating range: can affect the performance of the Information Center (DIC), the transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to indicate . Check the distance. The transmitter may be Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. locking has occurred. If enabled too far from the vehicle. through the DIC, the horn sounds when Q is pressed again within . Check the location. Other five seconds. See Vehicle vehicles or objects may be Personalization (With DIC Buttons) blocking the signal. on page 5‑45 for additional . Check the transmitter's battery. information. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. Pressing Q may arm the content theft‐deterrent system. . If the transmitter is still not See Anti-Theft Alarm System on working correctly, see your page 2‑13. dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for service. K (Unlock): Press once to unlock With Remote Start and Power only the driver door. If K is pressed Remote Keyless Entry Liftgate Shown, Without Similar again within five seconds, all remaining doors unlock. The interior (RKE) System Operation / (Remote Vehicle Start): lamps come on and stay on for For vehicles with this feature, see The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 20 seconds or until the ignition is Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 5 transmitter functions work up to ‑ turned on. 60 m (195 feet) away from the for additional information. vehicle. Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. 2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

If enabled through the DIC, the Press and hold L for more than Programming Transmitters to parking lamps flash twice to indicate two seconds to activate the panic the Vehicle unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle alarm. The parking lamps flash and Personalization (With DIC Buttons) Only RKE transmitters programmed the horn sounds repeatedly for to this vehicle will work. If a on page 5‑45. 30 seconds. The alarm turns off transmitter is lost or stolen, a Pressing K on the RKE transmitter when the ignition is moved to replacement can be purchased disarms the content theft‐deterrent ON/RUN or L is pressed again. and programmed through your system. See Anti-Theft Alarm The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF dealer/retailer. When the System on page 2‑13. for the panic alarm to work. replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle using & (Power Liftgate): Press The vehicle comes with two the DIC, all remaining transmitters and hold until the liftgate begins to transmitters. Each transmitter will must also be reprogrammed. move to open or close the liftgate. have a number on it, "1" or "2". Any lost or stolen transmitters The taillamps flash and a chime These numbers correspond to will no longer work once the sounds to indicate when the liftgate the driver of the vehicle. For new transmitter is programmed. is opening or closing. example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will be recalled when Each vehicle can have up to L (Vehicle Locator/Panic using the transmitter labeled "1", eight transmitters programmed to it. Alarm): Press and release to if enabled through the vehicle See “Relearn Remote Key” under locate the vehicle. The parking Driver Information Center (DIC) personalization. See “Memory Seat lamps flash and the horn sounds (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 24 and Mirrors” under Power Seat ‑ three times. or Driver Information Center (DIC) Adjustment on page 3‑4 and (Without DIC Buttons) on “Memory Seat Recall” under Vehicle Personalization (With DIC Buttons) page 5‑29 for instructions on how to program transmitters to this on page 5‑45 for more information. vehicle. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

Battery Replacement 3. Insert the new battery, positive If the vehicle has the remote start side facing down. Replace with a feature, the RKE transmitter Replace the battery if the REPLACE CR2032 or equivalent battery. functions have an increased range BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY of operation. However, the range message displays in the DIC. 4. Snap the transmitter back together. may be less while the vehicle is Notice: When replacing the running. battery, do not touch any of the There are other conditions which circuitry on the transmitter. Static Remote Vehicle Start can affect the performance of the from your body could damage the This vehicle may have a remote transmitter, see Remote Keyless transmitter. starting feature that starts the Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 engine from outside of the vehicle. for additional information. / (Remote Start): This button is located on the RKE transmitter if the Starting the Engine Using vehicle has remote start. Remote Start Laws in some communities may To start the vehicle: restrict the use of remote starters. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the For example, some laws may vehicle. require a person using the remote start to have the vehicle in view 2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. when doing so. Check local 3. Immediately after completing regulations for any requirements Step 2, press and hold / until on remote starting of vehicles. the parking lamps flash. If the 1. Separate the transmitter with a Do not use the remote start vehicle's lights can not be seen, flat, thin object inserted into the feature if the vehicle is low on fuel. press and hold / for at least notch on the side. The vehicle could run out of fuel. four seconds. 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. 2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

When the vehicle starts the parking If the vehicle is left running it A maximum of two remote starts or lamps will turn on and remain on automatically shuts off after remote start attempts are allowed as long as the engine is running. 10 minutes unless a time extension between ignition cycles. The doors will be locked and the has been done. After the vehicle's engine has been climate control system will operate Extending Engine Run Time started two times using the remote automatically if the vehicle has the start button, the ignition must be automatic system, or at the same To extend the engine run time by turned on and then back off before setting as when the vehicle was last 10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3 the remote start procedure can be turned off. while the engine is still running. used again. If the vehicle has an automatic The engine run time can only be climate control system and heated extended if it is the first remote start Shutting the Engine Off After a seats, the heated seats turn on since the vehicle has been driven. Remote Start Remote start can be extended during colder outside temperatures To manually shut off a remote start: and shut off when the key is turned one time. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the to ON/RUN. See Heated Front If the remote start procedure is used Seats on page 3‑9 or Heated again before the first 10 minute vehicle and press / until the and Ventilated Front Seats on time frame has ended, the parking lamps turn off. page 3‑10 for more information. first 10 minutes will immediately . Turn on the hazard warning The rear window defogger and expire and the second 10 minute flashers. time frame will start. heated mirrors, if the vehicle has . Turn the ignition switch on and them, turn on during colder outside For example, if the lock button and then off. temperatures and turn off when the then the remote start buttons are key is turned to ON/RUN. pressed again after the vehicle After entering the vehicle during a has been running for five minutes, remote start, insert and turn the key 10 minutes are added, allowing to the ON/RUN position to drive the the engine to run for a total of vehicle. 15 minutes. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

Conditions in Which the Door Locks Remote Start Will Not Work WARNING (Continued)

The vehicle cannot be started using { WARNING . Young children who get into the remote start feature if the key is unlocked vehicles may be in the ignition, the hood is open, or if Unlocked doors can be dangerous. unable to get out. A child can there is an emission control system be overcome by extreme heat malfunction. . Passengers, especially and can suffer permanent The engine turns off during a remote children, can easily open the injuries or even death from start if the coolant temperature gets doors and fall out of a moving heat stroke. Always lock the too high or if the oil pressure vehicle. When a door is vehicle whenever leaving it. gets low. locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being . Outsiders can easily enter Vehicles that have the remote thrown out of the vehicle in through an unlocked door vehicle start feature are shipped a crash is increased if the when you slow down or stop from the factory with the remote doors are not locked. So, all your vehicle. Locking your vehicle start system enabled. passengers should wear doors can help prevent this The system may be enabled or safety belts properly and from happening. disabled through the DIC if the the doors should be locked vehicle has DIC buttons. See whenever the vehicle is To lock or unlock a door, use the “REMOTE START” under Vehicle driven. key from the outside or the door Personalization (With DIC Buttons) lock from the inside. on page 5‑45 for additional (Continued) information. If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to enable or disable the remote start system. 2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Power Door Locks This feature will not operate if the Lockout Protection key is in the ignition. The power door lock switches are This feature protects you from located on the front doors. This feature can be programmed locking the key in the vehicle when by using the Driver Information " (Unlock): Press to unlock the the key is in the ignition and a front Center (DIC). See “DELAY door is open. doors. DOOR LOCK” under Vehicle Q (Lock): Remove the key from Personalization (With DIC Buttons) If the driver side power door lock the ignition and press to lock the on page 5‑45. switch is pressed when the driver's doors. door is open and the key is in the Automatic Door Locks ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock. Delayed Locking Vehicles with an automatic If the passenger side power door lock/unlock feature enable you When locking the doors with the lock switch is pressed when the to program the vehicle's power power lock switch and a door or the front passenger door is open and door locks. This feature can be liftgate is open, the doors will lock the key is in the ignition, all of the programmed through the Driver five seconds after the last door is doors will lock and then the front Information Center (DIC). See closed. You will hear three chimes passenger door will unlock. to signal that the delayed locking Vehicle Personalization (With DIC feature is in use. Buttons) on page 5‑45 for more information. Safety Locks Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE The vehicle has rear door security transmitter twice will override the locks to prevent passengers from delayed locking feature and opening the rear doors from the immediately lock all the doors. inside. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

Doors WARNING (Continued) Liftgate . Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that Manual Liftgate Operation brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the { WARNING highest setting. See Climate Control System in the Index. Exhaust gases can enter the . If the vehicle is equipped with vehicle if it is driven with the a power liftgate, disable the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or power liftgate function. with any objects that pass Open the rear doors to access the through the seal between the For more information about security locks on the inside edge of body and the trunk/hatch or carbon monoxide, see Engine each door. liftgate. Engine exhaust contains Exhaust on page 9‑23. To set the locks, insert a key into Carbon Monoxide (CO) which the slot and turn it to the horizontal cannot be seen or smelled. It can To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock switch or press the door position. The door can only be cause unconsciousness and even unlock button on the Remote opened from the outside with the death. door unlocked. To return the door to Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter normal operation, turn the slot to the If the vehicle must be driven with twice. See Remote Keyless vertical position. the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. . Close all of the windows. ‑ . Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. (Continued) 2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

To open the liftgate, press the Power Liftgate Operation touchpad on the underside of the WARNING (Continued) liftgate handle. The vehicle must { WARNING be in P (Park) to open the liftgate. . Adjust the Climate Control To close the liftgate, use the pull Exhaust gases can enter the system to a setting that cup or strap. vehicle if it is driven with the brings in only outside air and The liftgate has an electric latch. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or set the fan speed to the If the battery is disconnected or with any objects that pass highest setting. See Climate has low voltage, the liftgate will through the seal between the Control System in the Index. not open. The liftgate will resume body and the trunk/hatch or . If the vehicle is equipped with operation when the battery is liftgate. Engine exhaust contains a power liftgate, disable the reconnected and charged. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which power liftgate function. cannot be seen or smelled. It can If the battery is properly connected For more information about cause unconsciousness and even and has adequate voltage, and the carbon monoxide, see Engine death. liftgate still will not function, the Exhaust on page 9‑23. vehicle should be taken to a If the vehicle must be driven with dealer/retailer for service. the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: The vehicle may have a power liftgate. The vehicle must be in . Close all of the windows. P (Park) to use this feature. . Fully open the air outlets on The taillamps will flash and a chime or under the instrument will sound when the power liftgate panel. is used. (Continued) Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Power Liftgate Button on Center Power Liftgate Button near Always check to make sure the Console Liftgate Latch area above and behind the liftgate . Press the liftgate button on the The liftgate can also be closed by is clear before opening it. center console. pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the The power liftgate can be power . Press the touchpad switch on opened and closed in the the outside liftgate handle. button a second time during liftgate following ways: operation to reverse the operation. Pressing the buttons or touchpad . Press and hold the power liftgate switch a second time while the The power liftgate may be button on the RKE transmitter liftgate is moving reverses the temporarily disabled under extreme until the liftgate starts moving. direction. temperatures or under low battery conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. 2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

If the vehicle is shifted out of close cycle. After removing the again or closed manually. Do not P (Park) while the power function obstruction, the power liftgate force the liftgate open or closed is in progress, the liftgate power operation can be used again. during a power cycle. function will continue to completion. If the liftgate comes across more If the vehicle is shifted out of Manual Operation of Power obstacles on the same power cycle, Liftgate P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates the power function deactivates, and before the power liftgate latches you must manually open or close closed, the liftgate may reverse to the liftgate. A message displays, the open position. Cargo could fall LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate that out of the vehicle. The power liftgate the liftgate is open. See Driver must be closed and latched before Information Center (DIC) (With DIC driving. Buttons) on page 5‑24 or Driver If the liftgate is power opened Information Center (DIC) (Without and the support struts have lost DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 for pressure, the lights will flash and a more information. After removing chime will sound. The liftgate will the obstructions, manually open the stay open temporarily, then slowly liftgate to the full open position or close. See your dealer/retailer for close the liftgate to the fully closed service before using the liftgate if and latched position. The liftgate this occurs. resumes normal power operation. To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the switch on the Obstacle Detection Features Pinch sensors are located on the center console to OFF. side edges of the liftgate. If an A warning chime will sound and the object is caught between the liftgate With the power liftgate disabled and liftgate will automatically reverse and the vehicle and presses against all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate direction to the full closed or open this sensor, the liftgate will reverse can be manually opened and position if the liftgate encounters an direction and open fully. The liftgate closed. obstacle during a power open or will remain open until it is activated Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

To open the liftgate, press the Vehicle Security 30 seconds. The content theft touchpad on the handle on the deterrent alarm is not armed outside of the liftgate and lift the Vehicle theft is big business, until the security light goes off. especially in some cities. This gate open. To close the liftgate, use If the delayed locking feature is vehicle has theft-deterrent features, the pull cup to lower the liftgate and active, the alarm is not activated however, they do not make it close. The liftgate latch will power until all doors are closed and the impossible to steal. close. Always close the liftgate security light goes off. before driving. If the RKE button or the power close Anti-Theft Alarm System . Press Q when the driver door is button on the liftgate is pressed On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm closed. The security light comes while power operation is disabled, system, to activate the system: on solid for approximately the lights will flash three times, but 30 seconds and then goes off. the liftgate will not move. . Press Q on the Remote Keyless The content theft deterrent alarm Entry (RKE) transmitter or the is not armed until the security It is not recommended that you power door lock switch when light goes off. drive with the liftgate open. any door is open. However, if you must drive with the The theft-deterrent system will not liftgate open, the liftgate should be activate if the doors are locked with set to manual operation by pressing the vehicle's key or the manual the OFF switch on the center door lock. console. If a locked door is opened without using the RKE transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm occurs. The security light flashes. The horn chirps and the lights flash. When the door is closed, the security light stops flashing and stays on solid for approximately 2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

If the key is not placed in the Testing the Alarm Immobilizer ignition and turned to START To test the alarm: or the door is not unlocked by See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 17 for information pressing during the ten second 1. From inside the vehicle, lower ‑ Q regarding Part 15 of the Federal pre-alarm, the alarm goes off. the driver side window and open the driver door. Communications Commission (FCC) The headlamps flash and the horn Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry sounds for about 30 seconds, then 2. Press Q. Canada. turns off to save the battery power. 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the The vehicle can be started with the door and wait for the security Immobilizer Operation correct ignition key if the alarm has light to go out. ® been set off. This vehicle has PASS-Key III+ 4. Then reach in through the (Personalized Automotive Security To avoid setting off the alarm by window, unlock the door with the System) theft-deterrent system. ® accident: manual door lock and open the PASS-Key III+ is a passive . Lock the vehicle with the door door. This should set off the theft-deterrent system. key after the doors are closed. alarm. The system is automatically armed . Unlock the door with the RKE If the alarm does not sound when it when the key is removed from the transmitter. Unlocking a door any should, but the vehicle's headlamps ignition. other way sets off the alarm if flash, check to see if the horn The system is automatically the system has been armed. works. The horn fuse may be blown. disarmed when the key is turned To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Press K or place the key in the to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY Circuit Breakers on page 10‑30. or START from the LOCK/OFF ignition and turn it to START to turn position. off the alarm. If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle's headlamps do not flash, You do not have to manually arm or see your dealer/retailer for service. disarm the system. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

The security light comes on if If the engine still does not start, and It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ there is a problem with arming or the key appears to be undamaged, decoder to learn the transponder disarming the theft-deterrent try another ignition key and check value of a new or replacement key. system. the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit Up to 10 keys may be programmed When the PASS-Key® III+ system Breakers on page 10‑30 for to the vehicle. The following senses an incorrect key, the vehicle additional information. If the engine procedure is for programming does not start. Anyone using a still does not start with the other additional keys only. If all the trial-and-error method to start the key, the vehicle needs service. currently programmed keys are lost vehicle will be discouraged because If the vehicle does start, the first or do not operate, you must see key may be faulty. See your your dealer/retailer or a locksmith of the high number of electrical key ® codes. dealer/retailer who can service the who can service PASS-Key III+ to PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key have keys made and programmed If the engine does not start and the made. In an emergency, contact to the system. security light on the instrument Roadside Assistance. See Roadside panel comes on when trying to start See your dealer/retailer or a Assistance Program on page 13‑6. locksmith who can service the vehicle, there may be a problem ® with your theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key III+ to get a new key Turn the ignition off and try again. blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. 2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

To program the new additional key: If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or Exterior Mirrors 1. Verify that the new key has damaged, see your dealer/retailer 1 or a locksmith to have a new a stamped on it. key made. Convex Mirrors 2. Insert the already programmed The SERVICE THEFT key in the ignition and start the DETERRENT SYSTEM message { WARNING engine. If the engine does not displays on the Driver Information start, see your dealer/retailer for A convex mirror can make things, Center (DIC) when there is a like other vehicles, look farther service. problem with the theft-deterrent away than they really are. If you system. See Anti-Theft Alarm 3. After the engine has started, cut too sharply into the right lane, System Messages on page 5‑41 turn the key to LOCK/OFF, you could hit a vehicle on the and remove the key. for additional information. right. Check the inside mirror or 4. Insert the key to be programmed Do not leave the key or device that glance over your shoulder before and turn it to the ON/RUN disarms or deactivates the theft changing lanes. position within five seconds of deterrent system in the vehicle. the original key being turned to The passenger side mirror is convex the LOCK/OFF position. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is The security light turns off once curved so more can be seen from the key has been programmed. the driver seat. 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so For vehicles with outside power that a little of the vehicle and the foldaway mirrors: area behind it can be seen. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. Folding Mirrors For vehicles with manual folding mirrors, fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position. Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the driver The controls for power foldaway door armrest. mirrors are located on the driver door armrest. To adjust each mirror: 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the to the driving position. driver or passenger side mirror. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to 2. Press one of the four arrows the folded position. located on the control pad to adjust the mirror. 2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Resetting the Power Foldaway Automatic Dimming Feature Park Tilt Mirrors Mirrors The driver outside mirror adjusts for If the vehicle has the memory Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: the glare of the headlamps behind package, the outside mirrors have you. See Automatic Dimming . The mirrors are accidentally a park tilt feature. This feature tilts Rearview Mirror on page 2 19 for obstructed while folding. ‑ the outside mirrors to a preselected information on how to turn this position when the vehicle is in . They are accidentally manually feature on. R (Reverse). This allows the driver folded/unfolded. Turn Signal Indicator to view the curb for parallel parking. . The mirrors vibrate at normal The passenger and/or driver mirror The vehicle may have a turn signal driving speeds. returns to its original position indicator lamp that is built into the when the vehicle is shifted out of Fold and unfold the mirrors one time mirror housing. The turn signal lamp R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned using the mirror controls to reset flashes with the use of the vehicle's off or to OFF/LOCK. them to their normal position. turn signal and hazard flashers. A popping noise may be heard This feature can be turned on or during the resetting of the power Heated Mirrors off through the Driver Information foldaway mirrors. This sound is Center (DIC). See Vehicle normal after a manual folding For vehicles with heated mirrors: Personalization (With DIC Buttons) operation. < (Rear Window Defogger): on page 5‑45 for more information. Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 8‑4 for more information. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming O (On/Off): Press to turn the Rearview Mirror dimming feature on or off. Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear Adjust the inside rearview mirror to dimming inside rearview mirror. Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9 36 see clearly behind your vehicle. ‑ Automatic dimming reduces the for more information. Hold the mirror in the center to glare from the headlamps of the move it up or down and side to If the vehicle has RVC, the vehicle behind you. The dimming O side. Use the day/night adjustment feature comes on and the indicator button for turning the dimming to help prevent glare from the light illuminates each time the feature on or off will not be headlamps behind you. Move the ignition is turned to start. available. lever to the right for nighttime use ® and to the left for daytime use. Vehicles with OnStar have Cleaning the Mirror ® three additional control buttons Do not spray glass cleaner directly Vehicles with OnStar have for the OnStar® system. See your three additional control buttons on the mirror. Use a soft towel dealer/retailer for more information dampened with water. located at the bottom of the mirror. about OnStar® and how to See your dealer/retailer for more subscribe to it. See the OnStar® information about OnStar and how ® owner guide for more information to subscribe to it. See the OnStar about the services OnStar® owner guide for more information on provides. the services OnStar provides. 2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Windows Power Windows

{ WARNING { WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many windows closed is dangerous. reasons, children or others could They can be overcome by be badly injured or even killed. the extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or from heat stroke. Never leave a even make the vehicle move. child, a helpless adult, or a pet The windows will function and alone in a vehicle, especially with they could be seriously injured or the windows closed in warm or killed if caught in the path of a hot weather. closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-21

Express-Up/Express-Down 2. Press and continue to hold the Windows window switch until the window is fully open. A window with the express‐up/down feature allows it to be raised or 3. Pull up and hold the window lowered without holding the switch. switch to close the window. Press or pull the window switch Continue to hold it briefly after fully and release it to activate the the window is fully closed. express feature. The express mode 4. Repeat for each window that has can be canceled by pressing or the express-up feature. pulling the switch. Anti-Pinch Feature Programming the Power Uplevel shown, base similar Windows The anti-pinch feature is on windows with the express-up The power window controls are If the battery on the vehicle has feature. If an object is in the way of located on each of the side doors. been recharged, disconnected, the window as it is express-closing, The driver door also has switches or replaced, windows with the or in certain weather conditions like that control the passenger and express-up feature need to be severe icing, the window will stop rear windows. The power reprogrammed for this feature to and open to a factory preset windows work with the ignition in work. To program the window: position. The window functions ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or 1. Close all doors with the ignition normally once the obstruction is when Retained Accessory Power in the ACC/ACCESSORY, removed. (RAP) is active. See Retained ON/RUN position, or when Accessory Power (RAP) on Retained Accessory page 9‑19. Power (RAP) is active. Press the switch to lower the See Retained Accessory window. Pull up on the front edge Power (RAP) on page 9‑19. of the switch to raise the window. 2-22 Keys, Doors and Windows

Window Lockout Sun Visors Roof o (Window Lockout): The window Pull the sun visor down to block lockout switch is located with the glare. Detach the sun visor from the Sunroof power window switches on the center mount and slide it along the driver door armrest. This feature The ignition must be in ON/RUN or rod from side-to-side to cover the ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the prevents the rear windows from driver or passenger side of the front being operated, except from the sunroof and power sunshade. See window. Swing the sun visor to the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) driver position. Press the switch to side to cover the side window. It can on page 9‑19 turn the lockout feature on or off. be moved along the rod from An indicator light will come on to side-to-side in this position also. The vehicle may have a sunroof show the lockout feature is on. over the front seats and a rear Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror sunroof over the second row seats. The vehicle has lighted visor vanity The rear sunroof does not open. mirrors on both the driver and The switch to operate the front passenger sun visors. Pull the sun sunroof is on the headliner above visor down and lift the mirror cover the rearview mirror. to turn the lamps on. Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the water draining system. Keys, Doors and Windows 2-23

Express-open/Express-close: From the closed position, press and release the rear of the switch to express-open the sunroof. Press and release the front of the switch to express-close the sunroof. The front sunshade must be opened and closed manually. Push up on the sunshade handle to open the sunshade. Manual Sunshades Vent: From the closed position, Notice: The rear sunshade could On a vehicle with only manual press and hold the front of the be damaged if you attempt to sunshades, press the button on the switch to vent the sunroof. Press open or close it manually. Do not sunshade handle to release it and and hold the rear of the switch to manually open or close the rear guide it back. Pull the sunshade close the sunroof. sunshade. forward until it latches to close it. To open the rear sunshade, located Rear Power Sunshade over the second row seats, press On vehicles with a rear power and release the rear of the switch. sunshade, the switch is on the Press and release the front of the headliner above the rearview mirror. switch to close the sunshade. 2-24 Keys, Doors and Windows

2 NOTES Seats and Restraints 3-1

Safety Belt Extender ...... 3-30 Child Restraints Seats and Safety System Check ...... 3-31 Older Children ...... 3-46 Restraints Safety Belt Care ...... 3-31 Infants and Young Replacing Safety Belt System Children ...... 3-49 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-31 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-51 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-53 Head Restraints Airbag System Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers Airbag System ...... 3-32 for Children (LATCH Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-34 System) ...... 3-55 Seat Adjustment ...... 3-3 When Should an Airbag Replacing LATCH System Power Seat Adjustment ...... 3-4 Inflate? ...... 3-35 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-61 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-6 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-7 Inflate? ...... 3-37 (Rear Seat) ...... 3-62 Heated Front Seats ...... 3-9 How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints Heated and Ventilated Front Restrain? ...... 3-37 (Right Front Seats ...... 3-10 What Will You See After an Passenger Seat) ...... 3-64 Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-38 Rear Seats Passenger Sensing Rear Seats ...... 3-10 System ...... 3-39 Third Row Seats ...... 3-13 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 3-44 Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the Safety Belts ...... 3-16 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-44 How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag System Check ...... 3-45 Properly ...... 3-19 Replacing Airbag System Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-25 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-46 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-30 3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to Do not drive until the head top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head restraints for all occupants are height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release installed and adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the seatback, while you push the head restraint down. 2. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Seats and Restraints 3-3

Front Seats To adjust a manual seat: 1. Lift the handle (A) under the seat Seat Adjustment to unlock it. 2. Slide the seat and release the { WARNING handle. Try to move the seat to be sure it is You can lose control of the locked in place. vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the To manually raise or lower the seat, vehicle is moving. The sudden move the lever (B) repeatedly movement could startle and upward or downward. confuse you, or make you push a A. Manual Seat Adjustment Handle pedal when you do not want to. B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving. C. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑7. 3-4 Seats and Restraints

Power Seat Adjustment On vehicles with power seats, the Memory Seat and Mirrors controls are located on the outboard side of the seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the power seat adjustment control (A) forward or rearward. The vehicle may have additional features to adjust the power seat: . Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the power seat adjustment control (A) up or down. Driver Seat with Power Seat . On vehicles with the memory Control, Power Recline, Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the package, the controls for this and Power Lumbar shown front of the control up or down. feature are located on the driver A. Power Seat Adjustment Control door panel. The controls are used . Raise or lower the rear part of to program and recall memory B. Reclining Seatbacks on the seat cushion by moving the settings for the driver seat and page 3‑7. rear of the control up or down. outside mirrors. C. Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑6. Seats and Restraints 3-5

To save positions in memory: Using the Remote Keyless Then try recalling the memory 1. Adjust the driver seat, including Entry (RKE) transmitter to enter position again by pressing the the seatback recliner and both the vehicle, with the remote appropriate memory button. If the outside mirrors to a comfortable recall memory feature on, causes memory position is still not being position. automatic seat and mirror recalled, see your dealer/retailer for adjustment. There is no adjustment service. See Power Mirrors on when the position has not been page 2‑17 for more information. changed by another seating position Easy Exit Seat Not all mirrors will have the or the easy exit feature. See The control for this feature is ability to save and recall the “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under located on the driver door panel mirror positions. Vehicle Personalization (With DIC between buttons 1 and 2. Buttons) on page 5 45 for more ‑ With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit 2. Press and hold button 1 until information. two beeps let you know that the position can be recalled by pressing position has been stored. To stop recall movement of the the exit button. You will hear a memory feature at any time, press single beep. The driver seat will A second seating and mirror one of the power seat controls, move back. position can be programmed by memory buttons, or power mirror If the easy exit seat feature is on in repeating the above steps and buttons. pressing button 2. the Driver Information Center (DIC), If something has blocked the driver automatic seat movement will occur To recall the memory positions, seat while recalling a memory when the key is removed from the the vehicle must be in P (Park). position, the driver seat recall may ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” Press and release either button 1 stop working. If this happens, press under Vehicle Personalization (With or button 2 corresponding to the the appropriate control for the area DIC Buttons) on page 5‑45 for desired driving position. The seat that is not recalling for two seconds, more information. and outside mirrors will move to the after the obstruction is removed. position previously stored. You will hear a single beep. 3-6 Seats and Restraints

Further programming for the Lumbar Adjustment Power Lumbar memory seat feature can be done On vehicles with power lumbar, using the DIC. You can select or Manual Lumbar the control is located on the cancel the following: outboard side of the seat. See . The automatic easy exit seat “Power Lumbar” under Power Seat feature. Adjustment on page 3‑4 for more . The remote memory seat recall information. feature. To increase or decrease lumbar For programming information, see support, press and hold the front or Vehicle Personalization (With DIC rear of the control (C). Buttons) on page 5‑45. Release the control when the seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support.

On vehicles with this feature, the handle is located on the inboard side of the seatback. Move the handle forward or rearward to increase or decrease lumbar support. Seats and Restraints 3-7

Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback: { WARNING Manual Reclining Seatbacks 1. Lift the recline lever (C). If either seatback is not locked, it 2. Move the seatback to the could move forward in a sudden { WARNING desired position, then release stop or crash. That could cause the lever to lock the seatback in You can lose control of the injury to the person sitting there. place. Always push and pull on the vehicle if you try to adjust a 3. Push and pull on the seatback to manual driver's seat while the seatbacks to be sure they are make sure it is locked. vehicle is moving. The sudden locked. To return the seatback to an upright movement could startle and In vehicles with seats that have position, do the following: confuse you, or make you push a manual reclining seatbacks, the pedal when you do not want to. 1. Lift the lever fully without lever used to operate them is applying pressure to the Adjust the driver's seat only when located on the outboard side of the the vehicle is not moving. seatback and the seatback will seat. See Seat Adjustment on return to the upright position. page 3‑3. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 3-8 Seats and Restraints

Power Reclining Seatbacks WARNING (Continued) In vehicles with seats that have power reclining seatbacks, the The shoulder belt cannot do its control used to recline them is job because it will not be against located on the outboard side of the your body. Instead, it will be in seat. See Power Seat Adjustment front of you. In a crash, you could on page 3‑4 for more information. go into it, receiving neck or other To recline the seatback: injuries. . Tilt the top of the control (B) The lap belt cannot do its job rearward. either. In a crash, the belt could . To bring the seatback forward, go up over your abdomen. The Do not have a seatback reclined if tilt the top of the control forward. belt forces would be there, not at your vehicle is moving. your pelvic bones. This could { WARNING cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the Sitting in a reclined position when vehicle is in motion, have the the vehicle is in motion can be seatback upright. Then sit well dangerous. Even when buckled back in the seat and wear the up, the safety belts cannot do safety belt properly. their job when reclined like this. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-9

Heated Front Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, The passenger seat may take the controls are located on the longer to heat up. center console. To operate the { WARNING If the vehicle has remote vehicle heated seats the engine must be start and is started using the RKE If you cannot feel temperature running. transmitter, the front heated seats change or pain to the skin, the I (Heated Seatback): Press to will be turned on to the high setting seat heater may cause burns turn on the heated seatback. if it is cold outside. See “Remote even at low temperatures. To J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Vehicle Start” under Remote reduce the risk of burns, people Press to turn on or off the heated Keyless Entry (RKE) System with such a condition should use seat and seatback. Operation on page 2‑3. When care when using the seat heater, the ignition is turned on, the heated The light on the button will come on especially for long periods of seat feature will turn off. To turn the to indicate that the feature is on. time. Do not place anything on heated seat feature back on, press Each time the button is pressed, the desired button. the seat that insulates against the temperature settings change heat, such as a blanket, cushion, from high, to medium, to low, to off. cover or similar item. This may Indicator lights above the button will cause the seat heater to show the level of heat selected: overheat. An overheated seat three for high, two for medium, and heater may cause a burn or may one for low. damage the seat. 3-10 Seats and Restraints

Heated and Ventilated H (Ventilated Seat): Press to Rear Seats Front Seats ventilate the entire seat. This symbol appears on the climate { WARNING control display to indicate that the feature is on. If you cannot feel temperature z (Heated Seat and Seatback): change or pain to the skin, the Press to heat the entire seat. seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures. To This symbol appears on the climate reduce the risk of burns, people control display to indicate that the feature is on. with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater, For either feature press the button especially for long periods of once for the highest setting. With each press of the switch, the seat time. Do not place anything on A. Seat Adjustment Handle the seat that insulates against changes to the next lower setting, heat, such as a blanket, cushion, and then the off setting. The lights B. Reclining Seatback Strap indicate three for the highest setting cover or similar item. This may C. Sliding Seat Lever cause the seat heater to and one for the lowest. overheat. An overheated seat The heated and ventilated seats are heater may cause a burn or may canceled after the ignition is turned damage the seat. off. To use the heated and ventilated seat feature after the vehicle is On vehicles with the heated and started, you will need to press the ventilated seat feature, the controls appropriate seat button again. are located on the front doors near the door handle. Seats and Restraints 3-11

Entering and Exiting the 3. Place folding armrests in the Third Row upright position. 4. Ensure that the safety belt is { WARNING unfastened and in the stowed position. Using the third row seating 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) position while the second row is forward and move the seatback folded, or folded and tumbled, forward. The seat cushion will could cause injury in a sudden fold, and the entire seat will slide stop or crash. Be sure to return forward. the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the Returning the Seat to the seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row: Seating Position place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in To return the second row seat to its front of or on the second row normal seating position: Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on the the safety belts still fastened may floor. 1. Remove objects on the floor cause damage to the seat or the behind the second row seat or in 2. Move the front center console safety belts. Always unbuckle the the seat tracks on the floor. armrest completely forward. safety belts and return them to See Center Console Storage 2. Pull the seatback rearward until their normal stowed position on page 4 1. it is locked in place. before folding a rear seat. ‑ 3-12 Seats and Restraints

3. Slide the seat rearward by Folding the Rear Seat To return the seatback to the pushing on the seatback until it seating position, lift the upper To fold the second row seats: is locked into place. corner of the seatback and push it 1. Remove anything on or under 4. Push down on the rear of the rearward until it locks into place. the seat. seat cushion until it is locked in Push and pull on the seatback to place. 2. Place the armrest in the upright make sure it is locked. position, and unfasten the 5. Push and pull on the seatback Adjusting the Seats safety belt. and seat cushion to make sure To adjust the second row seats, pull they are locked in place. 3. Pull forward on the reclining outward on the seat adjustment seatback strap (B) and push 6. Check that the safety belt is not handle (A). Slide the seat forward or down on the seatback. under the seat cushion. rearward to the desired position. If the headrest touches the front Release the handle and push and Reclining the Seatbacks seat, slide the second row seat pull on the seat to make sure it is To recline the seatback: rearward. locked. 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull the reclining seatback strap (B). 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the strap to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Seats and Restraints 3-13

Third Row Seats To fold the seatback: 1. Remove anything on or under { WARNING the seat.

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or pushed forward in the entry position, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure 3. Pull up on the release lever it is locked into place. located on the back of the seat. The third row seats can be folded The headrest moves forward forward or removed. automatically. 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt Notice: Folding a rear seat with 4. Push the seatback forward to mini-latch, using a key in the slot lay flat. the safety belts still fastened may on the mini-buckle, let the belt cause damage to the seat or the retract into the headliner. Stow safety belts. Always unbuckle the the mini-latch in the holder safety belts and return them to located in the headliner. their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 3-14 Seats and Restraints

To return the seatback to the Removing the Third Row Seats seating position: { WARNING 1. Remove the cargo management 1. Raise the seatback into place by A safety belt that is improperly system, if it is in the vehicle. using the pullstrap from the rear routed, not properly attached, See Cargo Management System of the vehicle, or by pushing it or twisted will not provide the on page 4‑3. into place from inside the protection needed in a crash. 2. Remove anything on or under vehicle. The person wearing the belt could the seat. 2. The headrest must be locked be seriously injured. After raising Notice: Folding a rear seat with into place before sitting in the rear seatback, always check the safety belts still fastened may the seat. to be sure that the safety belts cause damage to the seat or the are properly routed and attached, safety belts. Always unbuckle the { WARNING and are not twisted. safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position If either seatback is not locked, it 4. Reconnect the center safety belt before folding a rear seat. could move forward in a sudden mini-latch to the mini-buckle. stop or crash. That could cause Do not let it twist. 3. Fold the seatback down. See injury to the person sitting there. “Folding the Seatback” earlier in 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure this section. Always push and pull on the the mini-latch is secure. seatbacks to be sure they are locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place. Seats and Restraints 3-15

4. Remove the rear bolts located Installing the Third Row Seats 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to on the floor on each side of 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the 1. Before installing the seat the the seat. seat to make sure it is locked in seatback must be folded place. 5. Remove the seat by tilting it forward. See “Folding the slightly upward, and then pulling Seatback” earlier in this section. 4. Raise the seatback to its upright it out of the rear of the vehicle in position. Push and pull on the The seats must be placed in the one motion. seatback to make sure it is proper locations to attach locked into place. 6. Replace the bolts in the floor correctly. The wider seat must holes for storage. be installed on the driver side 5. Push the headrest up into and the narrower seat on the position. Push and pull on the passenger side. Remove the headrest to make sure it is bolts from the holes in the floor locked into place. before installing the seats. 6. Reconnect the center safety 2. Place the seat on the vehicle belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. floor so that the front seat hooks Do not let it twist. are on the vehicle bars. 3-16 Seats and Restraints

Safety Belts In most states and in all Canadian { WARNING provinces, the law requires wearing This section of the manual safety belts. Here is why: describes how to use safety belts It is extremely dangerous to ride You never know if you will be in a properly. It also describes some in a cargo area, inside or outside crash. If you do have a crash, things not to do with safety belts. of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more you do not know if it will be a serious one. { WARNING likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some Do not let anyone ride where a in any area of your vehicle that crashes can be so serious that even safety belt cannot be worn is not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not properly. In a crash, if you or your safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in passenger(s) are not wearing your vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people safety belts, the injuries can be a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and much worse. You can hit things sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been inside the vehicle harder or be This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed. ejected from the vehicle. You reminder to buckle the safety belts. and your passenger(s) can be See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety seriously injured or killed. In the page 5‑14 for additional belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. information. same crash, you might not be, In most crashes buckling up does if you are buckled up. Always matter ... a lot! fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. Seats and Restraints 3-17

Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. 3-18 Seats and Restraints

The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! stopped by something. In a real With safety belts, you slow down as vehicle, it could be the windshield... the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. Seats and Restraints 3-19

Questions and Answers About Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts Safety Belts never drive far from home, why should I wear safety Properly Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle belts? This section is only for people of after a crash if I am wearing a adult size. safety belt? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even Be aware that there are special A: You could be whether you — one that is not your fault — you things to know about safety belts are wearing a safety belt or not. and your passenger(s) can be and children. And there are different But your chance of being hurt. Being a good driver does rules for smaller children and conscious during and after an not protect you from things infants. If a child will be riding in accident, so you can unbuckle beyond your control, such as the vehicle, see Older Children on and get out, is much greater if bad drivers. page 3‑46 or Infants and Young you are belted. And you can Most accidents occur within Children on page 3‑49. Follow unbuckle a safety belt, even if those rules for everyone's you are upside down. 40 km (25 miles) of home. And the greatest number of protection. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why serious injuries and deaths It is very important for all occupants should I have to wear safety occur at speeds of less than to buckle up. Statistics show that belts? 65 km/h (40 mph). unbelted people are hurt more often A: Airbags are supplemental Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are systems only; so they work with wearing safety belts. safety belts — not instead of Occupants who are not buckled up them. Whether or not an airbag can be thrown out of the vehicle in a is provided, all occupants still crash. And they can strike others in have to buckle up to get the the vehicle who are wearing safety most protection. That is true not belts. only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 3-20 Seats and Restraints

First, before you or your touching the thighs. In a crash, Q: What is wrong with this? passenger(s) wear a safety belt, this applies force to the strong there is important information you pelvic bones and you would be less should know. likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just Seats and Restraints 3-21

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a lap belt is too loose. In a crash, crash, you would move forward you could slide under the lap too much, which could increase belt and apply force on your injury. The shoulder belt should fit abdomen. This could cause snugly against your body. serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. 3-22 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest. buckle. Seats and Restraints 3-23

Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING { WARNING

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest you wear the shoulder belt under like this. The belt would be much your arm. In a crash, your body too high. In a crash, you can slide would move too far forward, under the belt. The belt force which would increase the chance would then be applied on the of head and neck injury. Also, the abdomen, not on the pelvic belt would apply too much force bones, and that could cause to the ribs, which are not as serious or fatal injuries. Be sure strong as shoulder bones. You the belt goes under the armrests. could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the the shoulder at all times. chest. 3-24 Seats and Restraints

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { WARNING

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. Seats and Restraints 3-25

Lap-Shoulder Belt { WARNING All seating positions in the vehicle You can be seriously injured by a have a lap-shoulder belt. twisted belt. In a crash, you would If you are using a rear seating not have the full width of the belt position with a detachable safety to spread impact forces. If a belt belt and the safety belt is not is twisted, make it straight so it attached, see Third Row Seats on can work properly, or ask your page 3‑13 for instruction on dealer/retailer to fix it. reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull properly. the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up The lap-shoulder belt may lock if straight. To see how, see “Seats” you pull the belt across you very in the Index. quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. 3-26 Seats and Restraints

5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.

3. Push the latch plate into the To unlatch the belt, push the button buckle until it clicks. on the buckle. The belt should 4. Pull up on the latch plate to return to its stowed position. Slide make sure it is secure. If the belt the latch plate up the safety belt is not long enough, see Safety webbing when the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest Belt Extender on page 3‑30. on the stitching on the safety belt, Position the release button on near the guide loop on the side wall. the buckle so that the safety belt 6. To make the lap part tight, pull Before a door is closed, be sure the could be quickly unbuckled if up on the shoulder belt. necessary. safety belt is out of the way. If a It may be necessary to pull the door is slammed against a safety stitching on the safety belt belt, damage can occur to both the through the latch plate to fully safety belt and the vehicle. tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants. Seats and Restraints 3-27

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster Safety Belt Pretensioners The vehicle has a shoulder belt This vehicle has safety belt height adjuster for the driver and pretensioners for the front outboard right front passenger seating occupants. Although the safety belt positions. pretensioners cannot be seen, they Adjust the height so that the are part of the safety belt assembly. shoulder portion of the belt is They can help tighten the safety centered on the shoulder. The belt belts during the early stages of a should be away from the face and moderate to severe frontal, near neck, but not falling off of the frontal, or rear crash if the threshold shoulder. Improper shoulder belt conditions for pretensioner height adjustment could reduce the activation are met. And, for vehicles To move it down, push down on with side impact airbags, safety belt effectiveness of the safety belt in a the button (A) and move the height crash. pretensioners can help tighten the adjuster to the desired position. safety belts in a side crash or a You can move the height adjuster rollover event. up by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, After the adjuster is set to the they will need to be replaced, and desired position, try to move it down probably other new parts for the without pushing the button to make vehicle's safety belt system. See sure it has locked into position. Replacing Safety Belt System Parts After a Crash on page 3‑31. 3-28 Seats and Restraints

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Here is how to install a comfort the vehicle. To access the Guides guide to the safety belt: comfort guide, you will first need to move the headrest forward by This vehicle may have rear shoulder pulling on the handle behind the belt comfort guides. If not, they are seatback. The comfort guide will available through your dealer/ now be accessible. retailer. The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.

Outboard Positions 1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body. Third Row Center Position For the third row center position, locate the comfort guide which is Pull the comfort guide out of its located in a storage pocket, at storage location and then return the top of the seat, under the the headrest to its upright headrest on the driver's side of position. Seats and Restraints 3-29

WARNING (Continued)

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is not and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. 4. Buckle, position, and release The person wearing the belt the safety belt as described could be seriously injured. previously in this section. Make (Continued) sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. 3-30 Seats and Restraints

To remove and store the comfort Safety Belt Extender guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten be removed from the guide. Slide around you, you should use it. the guide into its storage location or But if a safety belt is not long on its storage clip. enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you Safety Belt Use During go in to order it, take the heaviest Pregnancy coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help Safety belts work for everyone, avoid personal injury, do not let including pregnant women. Like all someone else use it, and use it only occupants, they are more likely to A pregnant woman should wear a for the seat it is made to fit. The be seriously injured if they do not lap-shoulder belt, and the lap extender has been designed for wear safety belts. portion should be worn as low as adults. Never use it for securing possible, below the rounding, child seats. To wear it, attach it to throughout the pregnancy. the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction The best way to protect the fetus is sheet that comes with the extender. to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Seats and Restraints 3-31

Safety System Check Safety Belt Care WARNING (Continued) Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry. belt reminder light, safety belts, safety belt systems are working buckles, latch plates, retractors and { WARNING properly after a crash, have them anchorages are working properly. inspected and any necessary Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts. replacements made as soon as damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. possible. that might keep a safety belt system In a crash, they might not be able from doing its job. See your dealer/ to provide adequate protection. After a minor crash, replacement of retailer to have it repaired. Torn or Clean safety belts only with mild safety belts may not be necessary. frayed safety belts may not protect soap and lukewarm water. But the safety belt assemblies that you in a crash. They can rip apart were used during any crash may under impact forces. If a belt is torn have been stressed or damaged. or frayed, get a new one right away. Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer/retailer to have the System Parts After a Make sure the safety belt reminder safety belt assemblies inspected or light is working. See Safety Belt Crash replaced. Reminders on page 5‑14 for more New parts and repairs may be information. { WARNING necessary even if the safety belt Keep safety belts clean and dry. system was not being used at the A crash can damage the safety See Safety Belt Care on time of the crash. belt system in the vehicle. page 3‑31. Have the safety belt pretensioners A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag crash. To help make sure the Readiness Light on page 5‑15. (Continued) 3-32 Seats and Restraints

Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label airbags: near the deployment opening. { WARNING . A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or . A frontal airbag for the right front killed in a crash if you are not passenger. part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel wearing your safety belt — even if . A seat-mounted side impact for the right front passenger. you have airbags. Airbags are airbag for the driver. designed to work with safety With seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them. . A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will Also, airbags are not designed to airbag for the right front appear on the side of the seatback passenger. closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only . A roof-rail airbag for the driver, With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an passenger seated directly AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑35. behind the driver, and the headliner or trim. third row outboard passenger Wearing your safety belt during a position. Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance the protection provided by safety of hitting things inside the vehicle . A roof-rail airbag for the right belts. Even though today's airbags or being ejected from it. Airbags front passenger, passenger are also designed to help reduce seated directly behind the right the risk of injury from the force of an are “supplemental restraints” to front passenger, and the third inflating bag, all airbags must inflate the safety belts. Everyone in your row outboard passenger very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt position. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraints 3-33

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Airbags inflate with great force, Occupants should not lean on or Always secure children properly faster than the blink of an eye. sleep against the door or side in your vehicle. To read how, see Anyone who is up against, or windows in seating positions with Older Children on page 3‑46 or very close to, any airbag when it seat-mounted side impact airbags Infants and Young Children on inflates can be seriously injured and/or roof-rail airbags. page 3‑49. or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on the edge { WARNING of your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in Children who are up against, position before and during a or very close to, any airbag crash. Always wear your safety when it inflates can be seriously belt, even with airbags. The driver injured or killed. Airbags plus There is an airbag readiness light should sit as far back as possible lap-shoulder belts offer protection on the instrument panel cluster, while still maintaining control of for adults and older children, which shows the airbag symbol. the vehicle. but not for young children and The system checks the airbag (Continued) infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an system is designed for them. electrical problem. See Airbag Young children and infants Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for need the protection that a child more information. restraint system can provide. (Continued) 3-34 Seats and Restraints

Where Are the Airbags?

The right front passenger frontal Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag is in the instrument panel on Side similar the passenger side. The driver frontal airbag is in the The seat-mounted side impact middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door. Seats and Restraints 3-35

When Should an Airbag { WARNING Inflate? If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to occupant and an airbag, the inflate in moderate to severe frontal airbag might not inflate properly or near-frontal crashes to help or it might force the object into reduce the potential for severe that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or right or even death. The path of an front passenger's head and chest. inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed clear. Do not put anything to inflate if the impact exceeds between an occupant and an a predetermined deployment Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds Side similar anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain right front passenger, passengers the occupants. behind the driver and right front Do not use seat accessories passenger, and the third row that block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or outboard passengers are in the seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on ceiling above the side windows. how fast your vehicle is traveling. Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you hit, of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how by routing a rope or tie down quickly your vehicle slows down. through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked. 3-36 Seats and Restraints

Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate if the crash severity is above different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear the system's designed threshold example: impacts, or in many side impacts. level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. . If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. Seat-mounted side impact airbags at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the are not intended to inflate in frontal the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. impacts, near-frontal impacts, The vehicle has electronic frontal rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail . If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing airbags are not intended to inflate in inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a rear impacts. A seat-mounted side than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more impact airbag is intended to deploy that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate on the side of the vehicle that is frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags struck. Both roof-rail airbags will . If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full deploy when either side of the (like a pole), the airbags could deployment. For more severe frontal vehicle is struck, or if the sensing inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs. system predicts that the vehicle is than if the vehicle hits a wide about to roll over, or in a severe object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags. frontal impact. . If the vehicle goes into an object See Airbag System on page 3‑32. In any particular crash, no one at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and can say whether an airbag should inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to have inflated simply because of than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side the damage to a vehicle or because into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail of what the repair costs were. Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate For frontal airbags, inflation is specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe determined by what the vehicle hits, frontal impact. Seat-mounted side the angle of the impact, and how impact and roof-rail airbags will quickly the vehicle slows down. Seats and Restraints 3-37

For seat-mounted side impact and airbags, there are airbag modules in Rollover capable roof-rail airbags roof-rail airbags, deployment is the ceiling of the vehicle, near the are designed to help contain the determined by the location and side windows that have occupant head and chest of occupants in the severity of the side impact. In a seating positions. outboard seating positions in the rollover event, roof-rail airbag first and second rows. The rollover deployment is determined by the How Does an Airbag capable roof-rail airbags are direction of the roll. Restrain? designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover What Makes an Airbag In moderate to severe frontal or events, although no system can near frontal collisions, even belted prevent all such ejections. Inflate? occupants can contact the steering But airbags would not help in In a deployment event, the sensing wheel or the instrument panel. In many types of collisions, primarily system sends an electrical signal moderate to severe side collisions, because the occupant's motion is triggering a release of gas from the even belted occupants can contact not toward those airbags. See When inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the the inside of the vehicle. Should an Airbag Inflate? on airbag causing the bag to break out Airbags supplement the protection page 3‑35 for more information. of the cover and deploy. The inflator, provided by safety belts. Frontal Airbags should never be regarded the airbag, and related hardware are airbags distribute the force of the as anything more than a supplement all part of the airbag module. impact more evenly over the to safety belts. Frontal airbag modules are located occupant's upper body, stopping inside the steering wheel and the occupant more gradually. instrument panel. For vehicles with Seat‐mounted side impact and seat-mounted side impact airbags, roof-rail airbags distribute the force there are airbag modules in the side of the impact more evenly over the of the front seatbacks closest to occupant's upper body. the door. For vehicles with roof-rail 3-38 Seats and Restraints

What Will You See After You can lock the doors, turn off the { WARNING interior lamps and hazard warning an Airbag Inflates? flashers by using the controls for After the frontal airbags and When an airbag inflates, there those features. seat-mounted side impact airbags may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems inflate, they quickly deflate, so { WARNING quickly that some people may not for people with a history of even realize an airbag inflated. asthma or other breathing trouble. A crash severe enough to inflate Roof-rail airbags may still be at least To avoid this, everyone in the the airbags may have also partially inflated for some time after vehicle should get out as soon damaged important functions in they deploy. Some components of as it is safe to do so. If you have the vehicle, such as the fuel the airbag module may be hot for breathing problems but cannot system, brake and steering several minutes. For location of the get out of the vehicle after an systems, etc. Even if the vehicle airbag modules, see What Makes airbag inflates, then get fresh air appears to be drivable after a an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑37. by opening a window or a door. moderate crash, there may be The parts of the airbag that come If you experience breathing concealed damage that could into contact with you may be warm, problems following an airbag make it difficult to safely operate but not too hot to touch. There may deployment, you should seek the vehicle. be some smoke and dust coming medical attention. from the vents in the deflated Use caution if you should attempt airbags. Airbag inflation does not The vehicle has a feature that may to restart the engine after a crash prevent the driver from seeing out of automatically unlock the doors, turn has occurred. the windshield or being able to steer on the interior lamps and hazard the vehicle, nor does it prevent warning flashers, and shut off the people from leaving the vehicle. fuel system after the airbags inflate. Seats and Restraints 3-39

In many crashes severe enough to . The vehicle has a crash sensing inflate the airbag, windshields are and diagnostic module which broken by vehicle deformation. records information after a Additional windshield breakage crash. See Vehicle Data may also occur from the right front Recording and Privacy on passenger airbag. page 13‑16 and Event Data Recorders on page 13‑16. . Airbags are designed to inflate United States only once. After an airbag . Let only qualified technicians inflates, you will need some work on the airbag systems. new parts for the airbag system. Improper service can mean that If you do not get them, the an airbag system will not work airbag system will not be there properly. See your dealer/retailer to help protect you in another for service. crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly Passenger Sensing Canada other parts. The service manual System The words ON and OFF, or the for your vehicle covers the need symbol for on and off, are visible to replace other parts. The vehicle has a passenger during the system check. If you are sensing system for the right front using remote start, if equipped, to passenger position. The passenger start the vehicle from a distance, airbag status indicator will be visible you may not see the system on the instrument panel when the check. When the system check is vehicle is started. complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5‑15. 3-40 Seats and Restraints

The passenger sensing system We recommend that children be turns off the right front passenger secured in a rear seat, including: WARNING (Continued) frontal airbag under certain an infant or a child riding in a conditions. The driver airbag, rear-facing child restraint; a child injured or killed if the right front seat‐mounted side impact airbags riding in a forward-facing child seat; passenger airbag inflates and the and the roof-rail airbags are not an older child riding in a booster passenger seat is in a forward affected by the passenger sensing seat; and children, who are large position. system. enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing The passenger sensing system A label on the sun visor says, system has turned off the right works with sensors that are part “Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no of the right front passenger seat. the front.” This is because the risk system is fail-safe. No one can The sensors are designed to detect to the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not the presence of a properly-seated if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual occupant and determine if the right circumstance, even though the front passenger frontal airbag { WARNING airbag is turned off. should be enabled (may inflate) or not. A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child According to accident statistics, restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if children are safer when properly injured or killed if the right the airbag is off. If you secure a secured in a rear seat in the correct front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in child restraint for their weight This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move and size. rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a child restraint can be seriously rear seat. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-41

The passenger sensing system is The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING passenger frontal airbag if: right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever . The right front passenger seat is comes on and stays on, it means unoccupied. person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front that something may be wrong . The system determines that an passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help infant is present in a child avoid injury to yourself or others, restraint. When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right system has allowed the airbag to be away. See Airbag Readiness . A right front passenger takes enabled, the on indicator will light Light on page 5 15 for more his/her weight off of the seat for and stay lit to remind you that the ‑ a period of time. airbag is active. information, including important safety information. . Or, if there is a critical problem For some children, including with the airbag system or the children in child restraints, and for If the On Indicator is Lit for a passenger sensing system. very small adults, the passenger Child Restraint When the passenger sensing sensing system may or may not If a child restraint has been installed system has turned off the right front turn off the right front passenger and the on indicator is lit: passenger frontal airbag, the off frontal airbag, depending upon indicator will light and stay lit to the person’s seating posture 1. Turn the vehicle off. remind you that the airbag is off. and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child 2. Remove the child restraint from See Passenger Airbag Status the vehicle. Indicator on page 5‑15. restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is 3. Remove any additional items an airbag for that person. from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 3-42 Seats and Restraints

4. Reinstall the child restraint 6. Restart the vehicle. because that person is not sitting following the directions The passenger sensing system properly in the seat. If this happens, provided by the child restraint may or may not turn off the use the following steps to allow the manufacturer and refer to airbag for a child in a child system to detect that person and Securing Child Restraints restraint depending upon the enable the right front passenger (Rear Seat) on page 3 62 frontal airbag: ‑ child’s seating posture and body or Securing Child Restraints build. It is better to secure the 1. Turn the vehicle off. (Right Front Passenger Seat) on child restraint in a rear seat. page 3‑64. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, 5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Adult-Size Occupant cushions, seat covers, seat restraint and restarting the heaters, or seat massagers. vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly 3. Place the seatback in the fully recline the vehicle seatback upright position. and adjust the seat cushion, 4. Have the person sit upright in if adjustable, to make sure that the seat, centered on the seat the vehicle seatback is not cushion, with legs comfortably pushing the child restraint into extended. the seat cushion. 5. Restart the vehicle and have the Also make sure the child person remain in this position for restraint is not trapped under two to three minutes after the on the vehicle head restraint. If this indicator is lit. happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 3‑2. If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be Seats and Restraints 3-43

Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the If the passenger seat gets wet, dry System Operation performance of the passenger the seat immediately. If the airbag sensing system. Here is how: readiness light is lit, do not install Safety belts help keep the a child restraint or allow anyone . The passenger sensing system passenger in position on the to occupy the seat. See Airbag seat during vehicle maneuvers may turn off the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for and braking, which helps the important safety information. passenger sensing system maintain into the seat. If this happens, the the passenger airbag status. off indicator will be lit, and the The on indicator may be lit if an See “Safety Belts” and “Child airbag readiness light on the object, such as a briefcase, Restraints” in the Index for instrument panel will also be lit. handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other electronic device, is put on additional information about the . Liquid pooled on the seat that importance of proper restraint use. has not soaked in may make it an unoccupied seat. If this is not more likely that the passenger desired remove the object from A thick layer of additional material, the seat. such as a blanket or cushion, sensing system will enable (turn or aftermarket equipment such on) the passenger airbag while a as seat covers, seat heaters, and child restraint or child occupant { WARNING seat massagers can affect how is on the seat. If the passenger Stowing of articles under the well the passenger sensing system airbag is turned on, the on passenger seat or between the operates. We recommend that indicator will be lit. you not use seat covers or other passenger seat cushion and aftermarket equipment except when seatback may interfere with the approved by GM for your specific proper operation of the passenger vehicle. See Adding Equipment to sensing system. the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑44 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates. 3-44 Seats and Restraints

Servicing the steering wheel, instrument WARNING (Continued) panel, roof-rail airbag modules, Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ceiling headliner or pillar garnish Airbags affect how the vehicle They are probably part of the trim, overhead console, front should be serviced. There are airbag system. Be sure to follow sensors, side impact sensors, parts of the airbag system in proper service procedures, and rollover sensor module, or airbag several places around the vehicle. make sure the person performing wiring can affect the operation of Your dealer/retailer and the service work for you is qualified to do so. the airbag system. manual have information about In addition, the vehicle has a servicing the vehicle and the airbag Adding Equipment to the passenger sensing system system. To purchase a service Airbag-Equipped Vehicle for the right front passenger manual, see Service Publications position, which includes sensors Ordering Information on page 13‑13. Q: Is there anything I might add that are part of the passenger to or change about the vehicle seat. The passenger sensing { WARNING that could keep the airbags system may not operate properly from working properly? if the original seat trim is For up to 10 seconds after the A: Yes. If you add things that replaced with non-GM covers, ignition is turned off and the change the vehicle's frame, upholstery or trim, or with GM battery is disconnected, an airbag bumper system, height, front covers, upholstery or trim can still inflate during improper end or side sheet metal, they designed for a different vehicle. service. You can be injured if you may keep the airbag system Any object, such as an are close to an airbag when it from working properly. Changing aftermarket seat heater or a inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. or moving any parts of the front comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top (Continued) seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. Seats and Restraints 3-45

This could either prevent Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check proper deployment of the I have to get my vehicle passenger airbag(s) or modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need prevent the passenger sensing whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance system from properly turning airbag system? or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. off the passenger airbag(s). A: If you have questions, call See Passenger Sensing System See Airbag Readiness Light on Customer Assistance. The page 5‑15 for more information. on page 3‑39. phone numbers and addresses If you have questions, for Customer Assistance are Notice: If an airbag covering is call Customer Assistance. The in Step Two of the Customer damaged, opened, or broken, the phone numbers and addresses Satisfaction Procedure in this airbag may not work properly. for Customer Assistance are manual. Do not open or break the airbag in Step Two of the Customer coverings. If there are any Satisfaction Procedure in this In addition, your dealer/retailer and opened or broken airbag covers, manual. the service manual have information have the airbag covering and/or about the location of the airbag If the vehicle has rollover airbag module replaced. For the sensors, sensing and diagnostic location of the airbag modules, roof-rail airbags, see Different module and airbag wiring. Size Tires and Wheels on see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 3 37. See your page 10‑53 for additional ‑ important information. dealer/retailer for service. 3-46 Seats and Restraints

Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints Parts After a Crash replace airbag system parts. See your dealer/retailer for service. Older Children { WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes A crash can damage the on when you are driving, the airbag airbag systems in your vehicle. system may not work properly. Have A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light may not work properly and on page 5 15 for more information. may not protect you and your ‑ passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure your airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown possible. booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts. Seats and Restraints 3-47

The manufacturer's instructions that . Does the lap belt fit low and This applies belt force to the come with the booster seat, state snug on the hips, touching the child's pelvic bones in a crash. the weight and height limitations for thighs? If yes, continue. If no, It should never be worn over the that booster. Use a booster seat return to the booster seat. abdomen, which could cause with a lap-shoulder belt until the . Can proper safety belt fit be severe or even fatal internal child passes the below fit test: maintained for the length of the injuries in a crash. . Sit all the way back on the seat. trip? If yes, continue. If no, Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Do the knees bend at the seat return to the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on edge? If yes, continue. If no, Q: What is the proper way to page 3‑25. return to the booster seat. wear safety belts? According to accident statistics, . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. A: An older child should wear a children and infants are safer when Does the shoulder belt rest on lap-shoulder belt and get the properly restrained in a child the shoulder? If yes, continue. additional restraint a shoulder restraint system or infant restraint If no, try using the rear safety belt can provide. The shoulder system secured in a rear seating belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt should not cross the face or position. Safety Belt Comfort Guides” neck. The lap belt should fit under Lap-Shoulder Belt on snugly below the hips, just page 3‑25 for more information. touching the top of the thighs. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat. 3-48 Seats and Restraints

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued) who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older The child could move too far children need to use safety belts forward increasing the chance of properly. head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap { WARNING belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. Never do this. That could cause serious or fatal Never allow two children to wear injuries. The shoulder belt should the same safety belt. The safety go over the shoulder and across belt can not properly spread the { WARNING the chest. impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together Never do this. and seriously injured. A safety Never allow a child to wear the belt must be used by only one safety belt with the shoulder belt person at a time. behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-49

Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older WARNING (Continued) Children children, but not for young children Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only protection! This includes infants safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) and all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint. state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained every Canadian province says properly can strike other people, children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle. restrained while in a vehicle. { WARNING { WARNING Never do this. Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash. allow children to play with the (Continued) safety belts. 3-50 Seats and Restraints

Q: What are the different types of { WARNING add-on child restraints? Never do this. A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle's Children who are up against, owner, are available in four basic or very close to, any airbag when types. Selection of a particular it inflates can be seriously injured restraint should take into or killed. Never put a rear-facing consideration not only the child's child restraint in the right front weight, height, and age but also seat. Secure a rear-facing child whether or not the restraint will restraint in a rear seat. It is also be compatible with the motor better to secure a forward-facing vehicle in which it will be used. child restraint in a rear seat. If you For most basic types of child must secure a forward-facing restraints, there are many child restraint in the right front different models available. When seat, always move the front purchasing a child restraint, be passenger seat as far back as it sure it is designed to be used will go. in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Seats and Restraints 3-51

The restraint manufacturer's Child Restraint Systems instructions that come with the { WARNING restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still child restraint. In addition, there so small that the vehicle's regular are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low available for children with on the hip bones, as it should. special needs. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, { WARNING the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal need complete support. This is injuries. To reduce the risk of because an infant's neck is not serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat fully developed and its head crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A) weighs so much compared with always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating the rest of its body. In a crash, child restraints. surface against the back of the an infant in a rear-facing child infant. restraint settles into the restraint, The harness system holds the infant so the crash forces can be in place and, in a crash, acts to distributed across the strongest keep the infant positioned in the part of an infant's body, the back restraint. and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints. 3-52 Seats and Restraints

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH system, following the (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of in this manual. body with the harness. the vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. Seats and Restraints 3-53

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Keep in mind that an unsecured Where to Put the Children (LATCH System) on child restraint can move around in a Restraint page 3‑55 for more information. collision or sudden stop and injure Children can be endangered in a people in the vehicle. Be sure to According to accident statistics, crash if the child restraint is not properly secure any child restraint in children and infants are safer properly secured in the vehicle. the vehicle — even when no child is when properly restrained in a child When securing an add-on child in it. restraint system or infant restraint restraint, refer to the instructions system secured in a rear seating Securing the Child Within the position. that come with the restraint which Child Restraint may be on the restraint itself or in a We recommend that children and booklet, or both, and to this manual. child restraints be secured in a rear The child restraint instructions are { WARNING seat, including: an infant or a child important, so if they are not A child can be seriously injured riding in a rear-facing child restraint; available, obtain a replacement or killed in a crash if the child a child riding in a forward-facing copy from the manufacturer. child seat; an older child riding in a is not properly secured in the booster seat; and children, who are child restraint. Secure the child large enough, using safety belts. properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint. 3-54 Seats and Restraints

A label on the sun visor says, When securing a child restraint in “Never put a rear-facing child WARNING (Continued) a rear seating position, study the restraint in the front.” This is instructions that came with the because the risk to the rear-facing Even if the passenger sensing child restraint to make sure it is child is so great, if the airbag system has turned off the right compatible with this vehicle. deploys. front passenger frontal airbag, Wherever a child restraint is no system is fail-safe. No one installed, be sure to secure the { WARNING can guarantee that an airbag will child restraint properly. not deploy under some unusual A child in a rear-facing child circumstance, even though it is Keep in mind that an unsecured restraint can be seriously turned off. child restraint can move around in a injured or killed if the right collision or sudden stop and injure Secure rear-facing child front passenger airbag inflates. people in the vehicle. Be sure to restraints in a rear seat, even if This is because the back of the properly secure any child restraint in the airbag is off. If you secure a the vehicle even when no child is rear-facing child restraint would — forward-facing child restraint in in it. be very close to the inflating the right front seat, always move airbag. A child in a forward-facing the front passenger seat as far child restraint can be seriously back as it will go. It is better to injured or killed if the right front secure the child restraint in a passenger airbag inflates and the rear seat. passenger seat is in a forward position. See Passenger Sensing System (Continued) on page 3‑39 for additional information. Seats and Restraints 3-55

Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint with Lower Anchors a top tether, you must also use Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must restraint during driving or in a crash. never be attached using only the top This system is designed to make tether and anchor. installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a Lower anchors (A) are metal bars the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that has LATCH built into the vehicle. There are child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint two lower anchors for each with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with LATCH seating position that will Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the accommodate a child restraint child restraint is properly installed child restraint and its attachments. with lower attachments (B). using the anchors, or use the The following explains how to vehicle's safety belts to secure the attach a child restraint with these restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle. that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments. 3-56 Seats and Restraints

Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have Lower Anchor and Top Tether a single tether (A) or a dual Anchor Locations tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow A top tether (A, C) anchors the the instructions for your child Second Row Bucket top of the child restraint to the restraint. — i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating vehicle. A top tether anchor is built If the child restraint does not have a positions with top tether anchors. into the vehicle. The top tether top tether, one can be obtained, in attachment (B) on the child restraint kit form, for many child restraints. j (Lower Anchor): Seating connects to the top tether anchor in Ask the child restraint manufacturer positions with two lower anchors. the vehicle in order to reduce the whether or not a kit is available. forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Seats and Restraints 3-57

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.

Second Row — 60/40 Bench Third Row i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located on the cover or near the anchor. 3-58 Seats and Restraints

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 3‑53 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System

{ WARNING Second Row — Bucket Shown, Third Row Seat If a LATCH-type child restraint is Bench Similar The third row has one top tether not attached to anchors, the child The top tether anchors are located anchor located at the bottom rear of restraint will not be able to protect at the bottom rear of the seatback the center seatback. This anchor the child correctly. In a crash, the for each seating position in the should be used for the center child could be seriously injured second row. Open the cover to seating position only. Never install or killed. Install a LATCH-type two top tethers using the same top access the anchors. Be sure to child restraint properly using the tether anchor. use an anchor located on the same anchors, or use the vehicle's side of the vehicle as the seating Do not secure a child restraint in a safety belts to secure the position where the child restraint will position without a top tether anchor restraint, following the instructions be placed. if a national or local law requires that came with the child restraint that the top tether be attached, or if and the instructions in this the instructions that come with the manual. child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. Seats and Restraints 3-59

the safety belts. Refer to your { WARNING WARNING (Continued) child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions Do not attach more than one of the retractor to set the lock, in this manual. child restraint to a single anchor. if your vehicle has one, after the Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed. 1.1. Find the lower anchors restraint to a single anchor could for the desired seating cause the anchor or attachment Notice: Do not let the LATCH position. to come loose or even break attachments rub against the 1.2. Recline the seatback to the during a crash. A child or others vehicle’s safety belts. This may full reclined position. could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to Make sure the second row risk of serious or fatal injuries bench seatbacks are during a crash, attach only one avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments. aligned at the same angle child restraint per anchor. before placing the child Do not fold the empty rear seat restraint on the seat. Make with a safety belt buckled. This sure the third row bench { WARNING could damage the safety belt or seatbacks are both upright the seat. Unbuckle and return the before placing the child Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position, restraint on the seat. or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat. 1.3. Put the child restraint on wrapped around their neck and 1. Attach and tighten the lower the seat. the safety belt continues to attachments to the lower tighten. Buckle any unused safety anchors. If the child restraint 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower belts behind the child restraint so does not have lower attachments on the child children cannot reach them. Pull attachments or the desired restraint to the lower the shoulder belt all the way out seating position does not have anchors. (Continued) lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and 3-60 Seats and Restraints

2. If the child restraint manufacturer 2.3. Route, attach and tighten recommends that the top tether the top tether according to be attached, attach and tighten your child restraint the top tether to the top tether instructions and the anchor, if the vehicle has one. following instructions: Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. 2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip open the cover to expose the anchor. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. Seats and Restraints 3-61

Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make If the position you are using If the position you are using sure the LATCH system is has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or working properly after a crash, head restraint and you are head restraint and you are see your dealer/retailer to have using a dual tether, route using a single tether, route the system inspected and any the tether around the the tether over the headrest necessary replacements made headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. as soon as possible. 3. Push and pull the child restraint If the vehicle has the LATCH system in different directions to be sure and it was being used during a it is secure. crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash. 3-62 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have (Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be When securing a child restraint in attached. a rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have instructions that came with the the LATCH system, you will be child restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure compatible with this vehicle. the child restraint in this position. If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint. Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint System) on page 3‑55 for how and when and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint buckle until it clicks. using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑53. the buckle so that the safety belt see Lower Anchors and Tethers for could be quickly unbuckled if 1. Put the child restraint on Children (LATCH System) on necessary. page 3‑55 for top tether anchor the seat. locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show the instructions that come with the you how. child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. Seats and Restraints 3-63

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑55 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to If the top tether is attached to a top tighten the lap portion of the belt tether anchor, disconnect it. and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 3-64 Seats and Restraints

Securing Child Restraints { WARNING WARNING (Continued) (Right Front Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the The vehicle has airbags. A rear injured or killed if the right airbag is off. If you secure a seat is a safer place to secure front passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in a forward-facing child restraint. This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move See Where to Put the Restraint on rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far page 3 53. ‑ be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to In addition, the vehicle has a airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously rear seat. designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System passenger frontal airbag under passenger airbag inflates and the certain conditions. See Passenger on page 3‑39 for additional passenger seat is in a forward information. Sensing System on page 3‑39 and position. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 5‑15 for more information, Even if the passenger sensing If the child restraint has the LATCH including important safety system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and information. front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3‑55 for how and A label on the sun visor says, system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not where to install the child restraint “Never put a rear-facing child seat deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is in the front.” This is because the risk secured using a safety belt and it circumstance, even though it is to the rear-facing child is so great, uses a top tether, see Lower turned off. if the airbag deploys. Anchors and Tethers for Children (Continued) (LATCH System) on page 3‑55 for top tether anchor locations. Seats and Restraints 3-65

Do not secure a child seat in a When the passenger sensing position without a top tether anchor system has turned off the if a national or local law requires right front passenger frontal that the top tether be anchored, or if airbag, the off indicator on the instructions that come with the the passenger airbag status child restraint say that the top strap indicator should light and stay must be anchored. lit when the vehicle is started. In Canada, the law requires that See Passenger Airbag Status forward-facing child restraints have Indicator on page 5‑15. a top tether, and that the tether be 2. Put the child restraint on attached. the seat. You will be using the lap-shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run 4. Push the latch plate into the belt to secure the child restraint in the lap and shoulder portions of buckle until it clicks. this position. Follow the instructions the vehicle's safety belt through that came with the child restraint. or around the restraint. The child Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt 1. Move the seat as far back as it restraint instructions will show could be quickly unbuckled if will go before securing the you how. necessary. forward-facing child restraint. 3-66 Seats and Restraints

If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 3‑39 for more information. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 6. To tighten the belt, push down let it return to the stowed position. all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Storage 4-1

Storage be cupholders located at the rear of Storage the center console. To access, pull Compartments the handle down. Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage Armrest Storage Glove Box ...... 4-1 This vehicle has an instrument Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, Cupholders ...... 4-1 panel storage area located above have two cupholders. Pull the Armrest Storage ...... 4-1 the radio. To open the cover, press armrest down from the rear Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 the button. seatback to access the cupholders. Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Additional Storage Features Glove Box Center Console Storage Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Lift the glove box handle to open it. Cargo Tie Downs ...... 4-3 Use the key to lock and unlock the Cargo Management glove box. System ...... 4-3 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Cupholders Roof Rack System There are two cupholders, Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 with removable liners, located in front of the center console. There may be cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There are additional cupholders located on each side of the third row Pull up on the lever, located on the seat and in each door. There may front of the center console armrest, to slide it forward and backward. 4-2 Storage

To open the armrest storage area, press the button located on the front { WARNING of the armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move Never open more than one of the the armrest all the way to the rear three latches at a time to help position, slide the cover back and avoid personal injury and damage remove the tray. to the console. Floor Console Storage Notice: Slide the front console as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console forward to help prevent damage to the consoles. To access the upper storage area, press the upper button (B) and lift up. To access the lower storage area, press the lower button (C) and lift up. The top of the console can be folded forward for increased storage area. Lift up on handle on the rear of the console (A) and pull forward.

For vehicles with a second row center console, open each area to access the storage compartment inside. Storage 4-3

Cargo Management Additional Storage { WARNING Features System This vehicle has a cargo An improperly latched and closed Cargo Cover management center located in cargo cover, or cargo cover left the rear. in the open position, could be For vehicles with a cargo cover, it thrown about the vehicle during can be used to cover items in the a collision or sudden maneuver. rear of the vehicle. To install the Someone could be injured. cover, place the loops on each Be sure to return the cover to the corner of the cover on the four closed position and latch before hooks in the rear of the vehicle. driving. If the cover is removed, The cover should be stored securely always store it outside of the when not in use. vehicle. When it is replaced, always be sure that it is securely Cargo Tie Downs reattached. Four cargo tie‐downs are located in the rear compartment of the vehicle. 3. Remove the cover from the The tie-downs can be used to vehicle and store outside of the secure small loads. To remove the cargo management vehicle. cover: Convenience Net 1. Open the cover. It remains open when lifted. For vehicles with a convenience net in the rear, use it to store small 2. Pull the cover up making sure to loads as far forward as possible. unhook the hinges at the rear of The net should not be used to store the cover. heavy loads. 4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System For vehicles with a roof rack, the To prevent damage or loss of cargo rack can be used to load items. when driving, check to make sure For roof racks that do not have crossrails and cargo are securely { WARNING crossrails included, GM Certified fastened. Loading cargo on the roof crossrails can be purchased as an rack will make the vehicle’s center If something is carried on top of accessory. See your dealer/retailer of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, the vehicle that is longer or wider for additional information. sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden than the roof rack— like paneling, braking or abrupt maneuvers, plywood, or a mattress— the wind Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than otherwise it may result in loss of can catch it while the vehicle is control. If driving for a long distance, being driven. The item being 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may on rough roads, or at high speeds, carried could be violently torn off, damage the vehicle. Load cargo occasionally stop the vehicle to and this could cause a collision, so that it rests evenly between make sure the cargo remains in its and damage the vehicle. Never the crossrails, making sure to place. Do not exceed the maximum carry something longer or wider fasten cargo securely. vehicle capacity when loading the than the roof rack on top of the vehicle. vehicle unless using a GM For more information on vehicle Certified accessory carrier. capacity and loading, see Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12. Instruments and Controls 5-1

Airbag Readiness Light ...... 5-15 Vehicle Messages Instruments and Passenger Airbag Status Vehicle Messages ...... 5-36 Controls Indicator ...... 5-15 Battery Voltage and Charging Charging System Light ...... 5-16 Messages ...... 5-36 Malfunction Brake System Messages . . . . 5-36 Controls Indicator Lamp ...... 5-17 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-37 Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Brake System Warning Door Ajar Messages ...... 5-37 Steering Wheel Controls ...... 5-2 Light ...... 5-19 Engine Cooling System Horn ...... 5-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Messages ...... 5-38 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Warning Light ...... 5-20 Engine Oil Messages ...... 5-39 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-20 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-39 Rear Window Wiper/ ® Washer ...... 5-5 StabiliTrak Indicator Light . . . 5-21 Fuel System Messages ...... 5-39 Compass ...... 5-6 Engine Coolant Temperature Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-40 Clock ...... 5-8 Warning Light ...... 5-21 Lamp Messages ...... 5-40 Power Outlets ...... 5-8 Tire Pressure Light ...... 5-21 Object Detection System Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22 Messages ...... 5-40 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Security Light ...... 5-23 Ride Control System Indicators High-Beam on Light ...... 5-23 Messages ...... 5-41 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Fog Lamp Light ...... 5-23 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-41 Indicators ...... 5-10 Cruise Control Light ...... 5-23 Anti-Theft Alarm System Messages ...... 5-41 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-11 Information Displays Speedometer ...... 5-12 Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-42 Odometer ...... 5-12 Driver Information Center Tire Messages ...... 5-42 Tachometer ...... 5-12 (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-24 Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-43 Fuel Gauge ...... 5-12 Driver Information Center Vehicle Reminder Engine Coolant Temperature (DIC) (Without DIC Messages ...... 5-44 Gauge ...... 5-13 Buttons) ...... 5-29 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-44 Voltmeter Gauge ...... 5-13 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-32 Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-44 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-14 5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Personalization Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel Vehicle Personalization (With while driving. DIC Buttons) ...... 5-45 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls Universal Remote System Adjustment Universal Remote System . . . 5-52 Universal Remote System The steering wheel can be adjusted. Programming ...... 5-52 The adjustment lever is on the Universal Remote System outboard side of the steering Operation ...... 5-56 column.

Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle's options. Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. Pull the lever down to move the w / x (Next / Previous): Press steering wheel up or down and in to select preset or favorite radio or out. Pull the lever up to lock the stations, select tracks on a steering wheel in place. CD/DVD, or to select tracks and navigate folders on an iPod® or USB device. Instruments and Controls 5-3

To select preset or favorite radio To select tracks on an iPod or USB 2. Press and hold x to go back to stations: device for vehicles with a navigation the previous folder list. system: . Press and release w or x to go 3. Press and release w or x to to the next or previous radio 1. Press and hold w or x while scroll up or down the list. station stored as a preset or listening to a song listed in the favorite. main audio page, to quickly . To select a folder, press and hold , or press To select tracks on a CD/DVD: move forward or in reverse w ¨ through the tracks. See the when the folder is Press and release w or x to go to separate Navigation System highlighted. manual for more information. the next or previous track. . To go back further in the To select tracks on an iPod or USB Track information is displayed folder list, press and device for vehicles without a on the screen. Release w or hold x. navigation system: when the desired track is x To navigate folders on an iPod or reached. 1. Press and hold w or x while USB device for vehicles with a listening to a song until the 2. Press and release x to begin navigation system: contents of the current folder playing the track shown in the 1. Go to the Music Navigator by display on the radio display. display. first touching the center touch 2. Press and release w or x to To navigate folders on an iPod or screen folder button in the main scroll up or down the list, USB device for vehicles without a audio page. then press and hold w, or navigation system: 2. While in Music Navigator, select the folder/artist/genre/category, press to play the highlighted 1. Press and hold or while ¨ w x etc. using the touch screen. track. listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display. 5-4 Instruments and Controls

3. Press and release x to scroll For vehicles with the navigation 2. To stop the SCAN function, through the selected music list. system, press and hold this press ¨ again. button for longer than one second Touch the track label on the 3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB, touch screen to highlight and to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the press and hold to quickly move begin playing the track from forward through the tracks. that list. Navigation System manual for more information. Release to stop on the desired 4. Press and hold to quickly track. x ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the scroll through the selected next radio station while in AM, + e − e (Volume): Press to music list FM, or XM™. increase or to decrease the volume. b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to For vehicles with or without a silence the vehicle speakers only. navigation system: Horn Press again to turn the sound on. Press ¨ to go to the next track or Press near the horn symbols or For vehicles with Bluetooth or press on the steering wheel pad to ® chapter while sourced to the CD or OnStar systems, press and sound the horn. hold for longer than two seconds DVD slot. to interact with those systems. Press ¨ to select a track or a Windshield Wiper/Washer See Bluetooth on page 7‑46 folder when navigating folders on The windshield wiper/washer lever and the OnStar Owner's Guide an iPod or USB device. for more information. is located on the left side of the For vehicles with a navigation steering column. c (End): Press to reject an system: incoming call, or end a current call. Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers. SRCE (Source/Voice 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep Recognition): Press to switch is heard, to place the radio into between the radio, CD, and for SCAN mode, a station will play vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, for five seconds before moving and rear auxiliary. to the next station. Instruments and Controls 5-5

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen { WARNING to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades In freezing weather, do not use should be replaced. See Wiper your washer until the windshield Blade Replacement on page 10‑27. is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the Heavy snow or ice can overload the windshield, blocking your vision. wipers. A circuit breaker stops them until the motor cools. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD Windshield Washer FLUID is displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the J (Washer Fluid): Press the 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn the washer fluid is low. See Washer button at the end of the turn Fluid Messages on page 5‑44. band to 8 and then release. signal/lane change lever, to spray Several wipes, hold the band washer fluid on the windshield. Rear Window on 8 longer. The wipers clear the windshield and either stop or return to the preset Wiper/Washer 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. speed. The ignition key must be in The rear wiper and rear wash button 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for is located on the instrument panel Turn the band up for more frequent this to work. See Washer Fluid on below the climate control system. wipes or down for less frequent page 10 21 Windshield Washer ‑ Z wipes. Fluid. (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the rear wiper on and off. The wiper 1: Slow wipes. speed cannot be changed. 2: Fast wipes. Y (Wash): Press to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The window wiper will also come on. 5-6 Instruments and Controls

Release the button when enough Under certain circumstances, Press the vehicle information fluid has been sprayed on the such as during a long distance button until PRESS V TO window. The rear wiper will run a cross-country trip or moving to a CHANGE COMPASS ZONE few more cycles after it is released. new state or province, it will be displays. If the rear wiper function was necessary to compensate for already on, prior to pressing the compass variance by resetting the wash button, it stays on until the zone through the DIC if the zone is wiper button is pressed again. not set correctly. The rear window washer uses the Compass variance is the difference same fluid that is in the windshield between the earth's magnetic north washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid and true geographic north. If the on page 10‑21. compass is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may Compass give false readings. The compass must be set to the variance zone in Your vehicle may have a compass which the vehicle is traveling. in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information To adjust for compass variance, use Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on the following procedure: 2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance zone page 5‑24 or Driver Information Compass Variance (Zone) number on the map. Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) Procedure on page 5‑29 for more information Zones 1 through 15 are about the DIC. 1. Do not set the compass zone available. when the vehicle is moving. Compass Zone Only set it when the vehicle is 3. Press the set/reset button to in P (Park). scroll through and select the The zone is set to zone eight appropriate variance zone. upon leaving the factory. Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your location. Instruments and Controls 5-7

4. Press the trip/fuel button until If the DIC display does not show a Do not operate any switches the vehicle heading, for heading, for example, N for North, such as window, sunroof, example, N for North, is or the heading does not change climate controls, seats, etc. displayed in the DIC. after making turns, there may be a during the calibration procedure. 5. If calibration is necessary, strong magnetic field interfering with 2. Press the vehicle information calibrate the compass. the compass. Such interference V may be caused by a magnetic CB button until PRESS TO See “Compass Calibration or cell phone antenna mount, a CALIBRATE COMPASS Procedure” following. magnetic emergency light, magnetic displays. Compass Calibration note pad holder, or any other 3. Press the set/reset button to The compass can be manually magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, start the compass calibration. move the magnetic item, then turn calibrated. Only calibrate the 4. The DIC will display compass in a magnetically clean on the vehicle and calibrate the compass. CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN and safe location, such as an open CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle parking lot, where driving the To calibrate the compass, use the in tight circles at less than vehicle in circles is not a danger. following procedure: 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the It is suggested to calibrate away Compass Calibration Procedure calibration. The DIC will display from tall buildings, utility wires, CALIBRATION COMPLETE manhole covers, or other industrial 1. Before calibrating the compass, for a few seconds when the structures, if possible. make sure the compass zone is calibration is complete. The DIC If CAL should ever appear in the set to the variance zone in which display will then return to the DIC display, the compass should be the vehicle is located. See previous menu. calibrated. “Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section. 5-8 Instruments and Controls

Clock 5. To decrease the time or date, do Power Outlets one of the following: To adjust the time and date: The vehicle has three 12‐volt outlets . Press SEEK. 1. Turn the ignition key to © which can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, . s Press REV. cellular telephone, a compact disc then press O, to turn the . f player, etc. radio on. Turn counter‐clockwise. To change the time default setting The power outlets are located on 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, the instrument panel below the from 12 hour to 24 hour or to climate controls, at the rear of the MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, change the date default setting from center console, and in the rear month, day, and year). month/day/year to day/month/year: 3. Press the pushbutton located cargo area. Lift the cover to access G the outlet. Close the cover when not under any one of the labels to 1. Press and then the using the outlet. be changed. pushbutton located under the forward arrow that displays on Notice: Leaving electrical 4. To increase the time or date, do the radio screen until the time equipment plugged in for an one of the following: 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and extended period of time while . Press the pushbutton below the date MM/DD (month and the vehicle is off will drain the the selected label. day) and DD/MM (day and battery. Power is always supplied month) displays. to the outlets. Always unplug . Press ¨ SEEK. 2. Press the pushbutton located electrical equipment when not in . Press \ FWD. under the desired option. use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum . Turn f clockwise. 3. Press G again to apply the 20 ampere rating. selected default, or let the screen time out. Instruments and Controls 5-9

Certain accessory plugs may When adding electrical equipment, not be compatible to the accessory be sure to follow the proper power outlet and could result in installation instructions included blown vehicle and adapter fuses. with the equipment. If a problem is experienced, see Notice: Improper use of the your dealer/retailer for additional power outlet can cause damage information on the power accessory not covered by the vehicle outlets. warranty. Do not hang any type Notice: Adding any electrical of accessory or accessory equipment to the vehicle can bracket from the plug because damage it or keep other the power outlets are designed components from working as for accessory power plugs only. they should. The repairs would The power outlet is located on the not be covered by the vehicle Power Outlet 120 Volt rear of the center console. Alternative Current warranty. Do not use equipment An indicator light on the outlet turns exceeding maximum amperage The vehicle may have a power on to show it is in use. The light rating of 20 amperes. Check with outlet that can be used to plug in comes on when the ignition is in your dealer/retailer before adding electrical equipment that uses a ON/RUN and equipment requiring electrical equipment. maximum limit of 150 watts. less than 150 watts is plugged into the outlet, and no system fault is detected. 5-10 Instruments and Controls

The indicator light does not come on The power outlet is not designed for Warning Lights, when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or the following electrical equipment if no equipment is plugged into the and may not work properly if these Gauges, and outlet. items are plugged into the power Indicators If equipment is connected using outlet: Warning lights come on when there more than 150 watts or a system . Equipment with high initial fault is detected, a protection circuit peak wattage such as: could be a problem with a vehicle shuts off the power supply and the compressor-driven refrigerators function. Some warning lights come indicator light turns off. To reset the and electric power tools. on briefly when the engine is started circuit, unplug the item and plug to indicate they are working. . Other equipment requiring it back in or turn the Remote an extremely stable Gauges can indicate when there Accessory Power (RAP) off and power supply such as: could be a problem with a vehicle then back on. See Retained microcomputer-controlled function. Often gauges and warning Accessory Power (RAP) on electric blankets, touch sensor lights work together to indicate a page 9‑19. The power restarts lamps, etc. problem with the vehicle. when equipment using 150 watts or See High Voltage Devices and When one of the warning lights less is plugged into the outlet and a comes on and stays on while Wiring on page 10‑29. system fault is not detected. driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. Instruments and Controls 5-11

Instrument Cluster

United States version shown, Canada similar 5-12 Instruments and Controls

Speedometer Notice: If the engine is operated When the fuel tank is low on fuel, with the tachometer in the shaded the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will The speedometer shows the warning area, the vehicle could appear on the Driver Information vehicle's speed in both kilometers be damaged, and the damages Center (DIC). For more information per hour (km/h) and miles per would not be covered by the see Fuel System Messages on hour (mph). vehicle warranty. Do not operate page 5‑39. the engine with the tachometer in Odometer Here are some situations that may the shaded warning area. occur with the fuel gauge. None of The odometer shows how far the these indicate a problem with the vehicle has been driven, in either Fuel Gauge fuel gauge. kilometers or miles. . At the gas station, the fuel pump This vehicle has a tamper-resistant shuts off before the gauge odometer. If the vehicle needs a reads full. new odometer installed, the new . It takes a little more or less fuel one is set to the mileage of the old to fill up than the fuel gauge odometer. If this is not possible, it United States Canada indicated. For example, the is set at zero and a label is put on gauge may have indicated the the driver's door to show the old When the ignition is on, the fuel tank was half full, but it actually mileage reading. gauge shows how much fuel is left took a little more or less than in the tank. Tachometer half the tank's capacity to fill An arrow in the fuel gauge indicates the tank. The tachometer displays the the side of the vehicle the fuel door . The gauge goes back to empty engine speed in revolutions per is on. when the ignition is turned off. minute (rpm). The gauge will first indicate empty before the vehicle is out of fuel, the vehicle's fuel tank should be filled soon. Instruments and Controls 5-13

Engine Coolant Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of Temperature Gauge electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended period. If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM United States Canada When the engine is not running, but message will appear in the Driver the ignition is turned on, this gauge Information Center (DIC) and/or the This gauge shows the engine shows the battery's state of charge charging system light comes on. coolant temperature. Under normal in DC volts. See Battery Voltage and Charging driving conditions the gauge will When the engine is running, this Messages on page 5‑36 for more read approximately 100 °C (210°F) gauge shows the condition of the information. or less. If the gauge pointer is near charging system. The vehicle's However, readings in either warning 125 °C (260°F), the engine is charging system regulates voltage zone may indicate a possible too hot. based on the state of charge of the problem in the electrical system. It means that the engine coolant has battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate. Have the vehicle serviced as soon overheated. If the vehicle has been This is normal. Readings between as possible. operating under normal driving the low and high warning zones conditions, pull off the road, stop the indicate the normal operating range. vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 for more information. 5-14 Instruments and Controls

Safety Belt Reminders This cycle repeats if the driver This only occurs if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle airbag is enabled. See Passenger Driver Safety Belt Reminder is moving. Sensing System on page 3‑39 for Light If the driver safety belt is already more information. The driver safety belt reminder light buckled, neither the light nor chime This cycle repeats if the passenger on the instrument panel cluster. comes on. remains unbuckled and the vehicle is moving. Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on When the engine is started this light if an object is put on the seat such and the chime come on and stay on as a briefcase, handbag, grocery for several seconds to remind the bag, laptop or other electronic driver to fasten the safety belt. When the engine is started this light device. To turn off the warning light The light also begins to flash. and the chime come on and stay on and or chime, remove the object for several seconds to remind the from the seat or buckle the passenger to fasten their safety belt. safety belt. The light also begins to flash. Instruments and Controls 5-15

Airbag Readiness Light { WARNING This light shows if there is an electrical problem. The system If the airbag readiness light stays check includes the airbag sensor, on after the vehicle is started or the pretensioners, the airbag comes on while driving, it means modules, the wiring and the crash the airbag system might not be sensing and diagnostic module. working properly. The airbags in United States For more information on the airbag the vehicle might not inflate in a system, see Airbag System on crash, or they could even inflate page 3‑32. without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.

Passenger Airbag Status Canada Indicator When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator The vehicle has a passenger will light ON and OFF, or the symbol This light will come on and stay sensing system. See Passenger for on and off, for several seconds on for several seconds when the Sensing System on page 3 39 ‑ as a system check. If you are using vehicle is started. Then the light for important safety information. remote start to start the vehicle should go out. The instrument panel has a from a distance, if equipped, you passenger airbag status indicator. If the airbag readiness light stays may not see the system check. on after the vehicle has been started or comes on when while driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. 5-16 Instruments and Controls

Then, after several more seconds, If the light stays on, or comes on the status indicator will light either { WARNING while driving, there may be a ON or OFF, or either the on or off problem with the electrical charging symbol to let you know the status If the airbag readiness light ever system. Have it checked by your of the right front passenger frontal comes on and stays on, it means dealer/retailer. Driving while this airbag. that something may be wrong light is on could drain the battery. with the airbag system. To help If the word ON or the on symbol is avoid injury to yourself or others, When this light comes on, the Driver lit on the passenger airbag status have the vehicle serviced right Information Center (DIC) also indicator, it means that the right displays the SERVICE BATTERY away. See Airbag Readiness front passenger frontal airbag is CHARGING SYSTEM message. Light on page 5 15 for more enabled (may inflate). ‑ information, including important See Vehicle Messages on If the word OFF or the off symbol safety information. page 5‑36 for more information. is lit on the passenger airbag If a short distance must be driven status indicator, it means that the Charging System Light with the light on, be sure to turn off passenger sensing system has all accessories, such as the radio turned off the right front passenger and air conditioner. frontal airbag. If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See The charging system light comes on your dealer/retailer for service. briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. It should go out when the engine is started. Instruments and Controls 5-17

Malfunction If the check engine light comes on Notice: Modifications made to the and stays on, while the engine is engine, transmission, exhaust, Indicator Lamp running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the A computer system called OBD II an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of (On-Board Diagnostics-Second required. the original tires with other Generation) monitors operation of Malfunctions often are indicated by than those of the same Tire the fuel, ignition, and emission the system before any problem is Performance Criteria (TPC) can control systems. It ensures that apparent. Being aware of the light affect the vehicle's emission emissions are at acceptable levels can prevent more serious damage controls and can cause this for the life of the vehicle, helping to to the vehicle. This system assists light to come on. Modifications produce a cleaner environment. the service technician in correctly to these systems could lead to diagnosing any malfunction. costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could Notice: If the vehicle is also result in a failure to continually driven with this light pass a required Emission on, after a while, the emission Inspection/Maintenance test. controls might not work as well, See Accessories and the vehicle's fuel economy might Modifications on page 10‑3. This light comes on when the not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This This light comes on during a ignition is on, but the engine is not malfunction in one of two ways: running, as a check to show it is could lead to costly repairs that working. If it does not, have the might not be covered by the Light Flashing: A misfire condition vehicle serviced by your dealer/ vehicle warranty. has been detected. A misfire retailer. increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. 5-18 Instruments and Controls

The following can prevent more An emission system malfunction . Make sure to fuel the vehicle serious damage to the vehicle: might be corrected. with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as . Reduce vehicle speed. . Make sure the fuel cap is fully efficiently as designed and may installed. See Filling the Tank on . Avoid hard accelerations. cause: stalling after start-up, page 9‑45. The diagnostic stalling when the vehicle is . Avoid steep uphill grades. system can determine if the changed into gear, misfiring, . If towing a trailer, reduce the fuel cap has been left off or hesitation on acceleration, amount of cargo being hauled as improperly installed. A loose or or stumbling on acceleration. soon as it is possible. missing fuel cap allows fuel to These conditions might go away evaporate into the atmosphere. once the engine is warmed up. If the light continues to flash, when A few driving trips with the cap it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. properly installed should turn the If one or more of these Find a safe place to park the light off. conditions occurs, change the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at fuel brand used. It will require at least 10 seconds, and restart the . If the vehicle has been driven least one full tank of the proper engine. If the light is still flashing, through a deep puddle of water, fuel to turn the light off. follow the previous steps and see the vehicle's electrical system See Recommended Fuel on your dealer/retailer for service as might be wet. The condition is page 9 43. soon as possible. usually corrected when the ‑ electrical system dries out. If none of the above have made Light On Steady: An emission A few driving trips should turn the light turn off, your dealer/ control system malfunction has the light off. retailer can check the vehicle. been detected on the vehicle. The dealer/retailer has the proper Diagnosis and service might be test equipment and diagnostic required. tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. Instruments and Controls 5-19

Emissions Inspection and considered not ready for If the warning light comes on, there Maintenance Programs inspection. This can happen if is a brake problem. Have the brake the battery has recently been system inspected right away. Some state/provincial and local replaced or if the battery has run governments have or might begin down. The diagnostic system is programs to inspect the emission designed to evaluate critical control equipment on the vehicle. emission control systems during Failure to pass this inspection normal driving. This can take could prevent getting a vehicle several days of routine driving. registration. If this has been done and the United States Canada Here are some things to know to vehicle still does not pass the help the vehicle pass an inspection: inspection for lack of OBD II This light should come on briefly system readiness, your when the ignition key is turned to . The vehicle will not pass this dealer/retailer can prepare ON/RUN. If it does not come on inspection if the check engine the vehicle for inspection. then, have it fixed so it will be ready light is on with the engine to warn if there is a problem. running, or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on. Brake System Warning This light may also come on due to low brake fluid. See Brakes on . The vehicle will not pass Light page 10‑22 for more information. this inspection if the OBD II This vehicle's hydraulic brake (on-board diagnostic) system system is divided into two parts. When the ignition is on, the brake determines that critical emission If one part is not working, the other system warning light will also come control systems have not been part can still work and stop the on when the parking brake is set. completely diagnosed by the vehicle. For good braking both parts The light will stay on if the parking system. The vehicle would be need to be working. brake does not release fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is fully released, it means there is a brake problem. 5-20 Instruments and Controls

If the light comes on while driving, Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning pull off the road and stop carefully. light is not on, there are still brakes, Make sure the parking brake is fully (ABS) Warning Light but no antilock brakes. If the regular released. The pedal may be harder brake system warning light is also to push or, the pedal may go closer on, there are no antilock brakes and to the floor. It may take longer to there is a problem with the regular stop. If the light is still on, have brakes. See Brake System Warning the vehicle towed for service. See Light on page 5‑19. Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑83. United States Canada Tow/Haul Mode Light { WARNING The ABS warning light comes on briefly when the ignition key is The brake system might not be turned to ON/RUN. This is normal. working properly if the brake If the light does not come on then, system warning light is on. have it fixed so it will be ready to Driving with the brake system warn you if there is a problem. warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after If the light stays on, turn the ignition This light comes on when the to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes the vehicle has been pulled off Tow/Haul mode has been activated. on while driving, stop as soon as the road and carefully stopped, possible and turn the ignition off. For more information, see Tow/Haul have the vehicle towed for Then start the engine again to Mode on page 9‑27. service. reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. Instruments and Controls 5-21

StabiliTrak® Indicator Engine Coolant Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine to avoid damage to the Light Temperature Warning engine. A warning chime sounds Light when this light is on. See Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 for more information. Tire Pressure Light

This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, The engine coolant temperature have the vehicle serviced by your warning light comes on briefly when dealer/retailer. If the system is the engine is started. working normally the indicator light goes off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If it stays on, or comes on while For vehicles with a tire pressure If the system is working normally monitoring system, this light comes driving, there could be a problem the indicator light then goes off. with the StabiliTrak system and the on briefly when the engine is vehicle might need service. When If the light comes on and stays on started. It provides information this warning light is on, the system while driving, the vehicle may have about tire pressures and the Tire is off and will not limit wheel spin. a problem with the cooling system. Pressure Monitoring System. This light flashes when the StabiliTrak system is active. See StabiliTrak System on page 9‑30 for more information. 5-22 Instruments and Controls

When the Light is On Steady Engine Oil Pressure Light This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly { WARNING underinflated. A tire pressure message in the Do not keep driving if the oil Driver Information Center (DIC), pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. The oil pressure light should come can accompany the light. See Tire on briefly as the engine is started. Someone could be burned. Check Messages on page 5‑42 for more If it does not come on have the information. Stop as soon as the oil as soon as possible and vehicle serviced by your dealer/ possible, and inflate the tires to the have the vehicle serviced. retailer. pressure value shown on the tire loading information label. See Tire Notice: Lack of proper engine oil If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through Pressure on page 10‑43 for more maintenance can damage the information. engine. The repairs would not be the engine properly. The vehicle covered by the vehicle warranty. could be low on oil and might have When the Light Flashes First and Always follow the maintenance some other system problem. Then is On Steady schedule in this manual for This indicates that there changing engine oil. may be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 10‑46 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-23

Security Light Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light

This light flashes when the security The fog lamp light comes on when This light comes on whenever the system is activated. the fog lamps are in use. cruise control is set. For more information, see Anti-Theft The light goes out when the fog The light goes out when the cruise Alarm System on page 2‑13. lamps are turned off. See Fog control is turned off. See Cruise Lamps on page 6‑4 for more Control on page 9‑32 for more High-Beam on Light information. information.

The high-beam on light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 6‑2 for more information. 5-24 Instruments and Controls

Information Displays The outside air temperature and DIC Buttons compass, if equipped, also display on the DIC when viewing the trip Driver Information Center and fuel information. The outside air (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) temperature automatically appears in the top right corner of the DIC If your vehicle has DIC buttons, display. If there is a problem with the information below explains the the system that controls the operation of this system. temperature display, the numbers The buttons are the set/reset, The DIC displays information will be replaced with dashes. If this customization, vehicle information, about your vehicle. It also displays occurs, have the vehicle serviced. and trip/fuel buttons. The button warning messages if a system The compass will be shown in the functions are detailed in the problem is detected. bottom right corner of the DIC following pages. display. See Compass on All messages will appear in the DIC V (Set/Reset): Press this button to page 5 6 for more information. display located at the top of the ‑ set or reset certain functions and to instrument panel cluster. The DIC has different displays turn off or acknowledge messages The DIC comes on when the ignition which can be accessed by pressing on the DIC. the DIC buttons located on the is on. After a short delay, the DIC U (Customization): Press this instrument panel. will display the information that was button to customize the feature last displayed before the engine The DIC also allows some features settings on your vehicle. See was turned off. to be customized. See Vehicle Vehicle Personalization (With DIC The DIC also displays a shift lever Personalization (With DIC Buttons) Buttons) on page 5‑45 for more position indicator on the bottom on page 5‑45 for more information. information. line of the display. See Automatic If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you Transmission on page 9‑24 for can also use the trip odometer reset more information. stem to view the odometer and trip odometers. Instruments and Controls 5-25

T (Vehicle Information): Press means 99% of the current oil life To reset the engine oil life system, this button to display the oil life, remains. The engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on park assist on vehicles with this will alert you to change the oil on a page 10‑9. schedule consistent with your feature, units, tire pressure readings PARK ASSIST on vehicles with this feature, driving conditions. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) When the remaining oil life is low, If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic transmitter programming, and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, compass calibration and zone message will appear on the display. press the vehicle information button until PARK ASSIST displays. setting on vehicles with this feature. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” 3 under Engine Oil Messages on This display allows the system (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to be turned on or off. Once in this to display the odometer, trip page 5‑39. You should change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine display, press the set/reset button odometers, fuel range, average to select between ON or OFF. If you Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the economy, timer, fuel used, and choose ON, the system will be average speed. engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is turned on. If you choose OFF, the Vehicle Information Menu recommended in the Maintenance system will be turned off. The URPA Items Schedule in this manual. See system automatically turns back on Scheduled Maintenance on after each vehicle start. When the T (Vehicle Information): Press URPA system is turned off and the page 11‑2 for more information. this button to scroll through the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the following menu items: Remember, you must reset the DIC will display the PARK ASSIST OIL LIFE display yourself after each OIL LIFE OFF message as a reminder that oil change. It will not reset itself. the system has been turned off. Press the vehicle information Also, be careful not to reset the See Object Detection System button until OIL LIFE REMAINING OIL LIFE display accidentally at any Messages on page 5‑40 and displays. This display shows an time other than when the oil has just Ultrasonic Parking Assist on estimate of the oil's remaining been changed. It cannot be reset page 9‑35 for more information. useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE accurately until the next oil change. REMAINING on the display, that 5-26 Instruments and Controls

UNITS If a low tire pressure condition is 2. Press the set/reset button until Press the vehicle information detected by the system while REMOTE KEY LEARNING button until UNITS displays. driving, a message advising you ACTIVE is displayed. This display allows you to select add air to a specific tire will appear 3. Press and hold the lock between English or Metric units of in the display. See Tire Pressure on and unlock buttons on the measurement. Once in this display, page 10‑43 and Tire Messages on first transmitter at the same press the set/reset button to select page 5‑42 for more information. time for about 15 seconds. between ENGLISH or METRIC If the tire pressure display shows On vehicles with memory recall units. All of the vehicle information dashes instead of a value, there seats, the first transmitter will then be displayed in the unit of may be a problem with your vehicle. learned will match driver 1 and measurement selected. If this consistently occurs, see your the second will match driver 2. dealer/retailer for service. FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES A chime will sound indicating On vehicles with the Tire Pressure RELEARN REMOTE KEY that the transmitter is matched. Monitor System (TPMS), the This display allows you to match 4. To match additional transmitters pressure for each tire can be viewed Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) at this time, repeat Step 3. in the DIC. The tire pressure will be transmitters to your vehicle. shown in either pounds per square This procedure will erase all Each vehicle can have a inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). previously learned transmitters. maximum of eight transmitters Press the vehicle information Therefore, they must be relearned matched to it. button until the DIC displays as additional transmitters. 5. To exit the programming mode, FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) To match an RKE transmitter to your you must cycle the key to LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle: LOCK/OFF. vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES 1. Press the vehicle information PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. button until PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays. Instruments and Controls 5-27

COMPASS ZONE SETTING To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature, This display will be available metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the set/reset button if the vehicle has a compass. earlier in this section. for at least four seconds. The trip odometer will display the number of See Compass on page 5‑6 for TRIPA and TRIP B more information. miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven Press the trip/fuel button until since the ignition was last turned on COMPASS RECALIBRATION TRIPA or TRIP B displays. This and the vehicle was moving. Once This display will be available display shows the current distance the vehicle begins moving, the trip if the vehicle has a compass. traveled in either miles (mi) or odometer will accumulate mileage. kilometers (km) since the last reset For example, if the vehicle was See Compass on page 5‑6 for more information. for each trip odometer. Both trip driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is odometers can be used at the same started again, and then the Blank Display time. Pressing the trip odometer retroactive reset feature is activated, This display shows no information. reset stem will also display the trip the display will show 5 miles (8 km). odometers. As the vehicle begins moving, Trip/Fuel Menu Items Each trip odometer can be reset to the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button zero separately by pressing the (8.4 km), etc. to scroll through the following menu set/reset button or the trip odometer items: reset stem while the desired trip If the retroactive reset feature is odometer is displayed. activated after the vehicle is started, ODOMETER The trip odometer has a feature but before it begins moving, the Press the trip/fuel button until called retroactive reset. This can display will show the number of ODOMETER displays. This display be used to set the trip odometer to miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that shows the distance the vehicle has the number of miles (kilometers) were driven during the last ignition been driven in either miles (mi) or driven since the ignition was last cycle. kilometers (km). Pressing the trip turned on. This can be used if the odometer reset stem will also trip odometer is not reset at the display the odometer. beginning of the trip. 5-28 Instruments and Controls

RANGE AVG (Average) ECONOMY Time will continue to be counted as Press the trip/fuel button until Press the trip/fuel button until long as the ignition is on, even if RANGE displays. This display AVG ECONOMY displays. This another display is being shown shows the approximate number display shows the approximate on the DIC. The timer will record of remaining miles (mi) or average miles per gallon (mpg) or up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and kilometers (km) the vehicle liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which can be driven without refueling. This number is calculated based the display will return to zero. The display will show LOW if on the number of mpg (L/100 km) To stop the timer, press the set/reset the fuel level is low. recorded since the last time this button briefly while TIMER is The fuel range estimate is based menu item was reset. To reset displayed. on an average of the vehicle's fuel AVG ECONOMY, press and hold To reset the timer to zero, press economy over recent driving history the set/reset button. and hold the set/reset button while and the amount of fuel remaining in TIMER TIMER is displayed. the fuel tank. This estimate will change if driving conditions change. Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED For example, if driving in traffic and TIMER displays. This display can Press the trip/fuel button until making frequent stops, this display be used as a timer. FUEL USED displays. This display may read one number, but if the To start the timer, press the shows the number of gallons (gal) or vehicle is driven on a freeway, the set/reset button while TIMER is liters (L) of fuel used since the last number may change even though displayed. The display will show the reset of this menu item. To reset the the same amount of fuel is in the amount of time that has passed fuel used information, press and fuel tank. This is because different since the timer was last reset, not hold the set/reset button while driving conditions produce different including time the ignition is off. FUEL USED is displayed. fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset. Instruments and Controls 5-29

AVG (Average) SPEED Pressing the trip odometer Trip Odometer Reset Stem Press the trip/fuel button until reset stem will also turn off, Menu Items or acknowledge, DIC messages. AVG SPEED displays. This display ODOMETER shows the average speed of the The DIC displays trip and vehicle vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or system information, and warning Press the trip odometer reset kilometers per hour (km/h). This messages if a system problem is stem until ODOMETER displays. average is calculated based on the detected. This display shows the distance the various vehicle speeds recorded vehicle has been driven in either If your vehicle does not have DIC miles (mi) or kilometers (km). since the last reset of this value. buttons, you can use the trip To reset the value to zero, press odometer reset stem to view the To switch between English and and hold the set/reset button. following displays: odometer, trip metric measurements, see “UNITS” Blank Display odometers, oil life, park assist menu later in this section. for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear TRIPA or TRIP B This display shows no information. Parking Assist (URPA) system, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Press the trip odometer reset stem Driver Information Center transmitter programming, units, until TRIPA or TRIP B displays. (DIC) (Without DIC and display language. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) Buttons) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you or kilometers (km) since the last If your vehicle does not have DIC can use the trip odometer reset reset for each trip odometer. Both buttons, the information below stem to view the following displays: trip odometers can be used at the explains the operation of this odometer and trip odometers. same time. system. Each trip odometer can be reset to The DIC has different displays zero separately by pressing and which can be accessed by pressing holding the trip odometer reset stem the trip odometer reset stem located while the desired trip odometer is on the instrument panel cluster. displayed. 5-30 Instruments and Controls

The trip odometer has a feature If the retro-active reset feature is When the remaining oil life is low, called the retro-active reset. This activated after the vehicle is started, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON can be used to set the trip odometer but before it begins moving, the message will appear on the display. to the number of miles (kilometers) display will show the number of See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” driven since the ignition was last miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that under Engine Oil Messages on turned on. This can be used if the were driven during the last ignition page 5‑39. You should change the trip odometer is not reset at the cycle. oil as soon as you can. See Engine beginning of the trip. Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the OIL LIFE To use the retro-active reset feature, engine oil life system monitoring the press and hold the trip odometer To access this display, the vehicle oil life, additional maintenance is reset stem for at least four seconds. must be in P (Park). Press the trip recommended in the Maintenance The trip odometer will display odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE Schedule in this manual. See the number of miles (mi) or REMAINING displays. This display Scheduled Maintenance on kilometers (km) driven since the shows an estimate of the oil's page 11‑2 for more information. ignition was last turned on and the remaining useful life. If you see Remember, you must reset the vehicle was moving. Once the 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the OIL LIFE display yourself after each vehicle begins moving, the trip display, that means 99% of the oil change. It will not reset itself. odometer will accumulate mileage. current oil life remains. The engine Also, be careful not to reset the For example, if the vehicle was oil life system will alert you to OIL LIFE display accidentally at any driven 5 miles (8 km) before it change the oil on a schedule time other than when the oil has just is started again, and then the consistent with your driving been changed. It cannot be reset retro-active reset feature is conditions. accurately until the next oil change. activated, the display will show To reset the engine oil life system, 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle see Engine Oil Life System on begins moving, the display will page 10‑9. then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. Instruments and Controls 5-31

PARK ASSIST RELEARN REMOTE KEY 3. Press and hold the lock and To access this display, the vehicle To access this display, the vehicle unlock buttons on the first must be in P (Park). If your vehicle must be in P (Park). This display transmitter at the same time for has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking allows you to match Remote about 15 seconds. Assist (URPA) system, press the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters On vehicles with memory recall trip odometer reset stem until to your vehicle. This procedure seats, the first transmitter PARK ASSIST displays. This will erase all previously learned learned will match driver 1 and display allows the system to be transmitters. Therefore, they the second will match driver 2. turned on or off. Once in this must be relearned as additional A chime will sound indicating display, press and hold the trip transmitters. that the transmitter is matched. odometer reset stem to select To match an RKE transmitter to your 4. To match additional transmitters between ON or OFF. If you choose vehicle: ON, the system will be turned on. at this time, repeat Step 3. If you choose OFF, the system will 1. Press the trip odometer reset Each vehicle can have a be turned off. The URPA system stem until RELEARN REMOTE maximum of eight transmitters automatically turns back on after KEY displays. matched to it. each vehicle start. When the URPA 2. Press and hold the trip odometer 5. To exit the programming mode, system is turned off and the vehicle reset stem until REMOTE KEY is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC you must cycle the key to LEARNING ACTIVE is LOCK/OFF. will display the PARK ASSIST OFF displayed. message as a reminder that the system has been turned off. See Object Detection System Messages on page 5‑40 and Ultrasonic Parking Assist on page 9‑35 for more information. 5-32 Instruments and Controls

UNITS The available languages are transmission position, outside air To access this display, the vehicle ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS temperature, the tap shift gear, and must be in P (Park). Press the trip (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), a brief display of the current radio odometer reset stem until UNITS and NO CHANGE. station, including XM information displays. This display allows you to 3. Once the desired language is or CD track. It will also display select between English or Metric displayed, release the trip turn-by-turn navigation information if units of measurement. Once in this odometer reset stem to set the vehicle has a navigation radio. display, press and hold the trip your choice. The images are projected by the odometer reset stem to select HUD lens located on the driver's between ENGLISH or METRIC Head-Up Display (HUD) side of the instrument panel. units. All of the vehicle information The tap shift gear will also appear will then be displayed in the unit of { WARNING on the HUD if the vehicle has tap measurement selected. shift and it is active. DISPLAY LANGUAGE If the HUD image is too bright or The HUD information can be too high in your field of view, it displayed in one of three languages, To access this display, the vehicle may take you more time to see English, French, or Spanish. The must be in P (Park). This display things you need to see when it is speedometer reading and other allows you to select the language dark outside. Be sure to keep the numerical values can be displayed in which the DIC messages will in either English or metric units. appear. To select a language: HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view. The language selection and the 1. Press the trip odometer reset units of measurement are changed stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE For vehicles with the Head-Up through the trip computer in the displays. Display (HUD), some information Driver Information Center (DIC). 2. Continue to press and hold the concerning the operation of the See Vehicle Personalization (With trip odometer reset stem to scroll vehicle is projected onto the DIC Buttons) on page 5‑45. through all of the available windshield. This includes the languages. speedometer reading, RPM reading, Instruments and Controls 5-33

The following indicator lights come When the HUD is on, the on the instrument panel when speedometer reading is continually activated and also appear on displayed. The current radio station the HUD: or CD track number will display for a short period of time after the radio . Turn Signal Indicators or CD track status changes. . High-Beam Indicator Symbol This happens whenever radio The HUD temporarily displays information is changed. The CHECK GAGES and ICE speedometer size is reduced POSSIBLE when these messages when radio, CD information, are on the DIC trip computer. warnings, or turn-by-turn navigation information are displayed on The HUD also displays the following the HUD. HUD Display on the Vehicle messages on vehicles with these Windshield systems, when they are active: The HUD information appears as an . TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE image focused out toward the front of the vehicle. . STABILITRAK ACTIVE When the ignition key is turned to Notice: If you try to use the ON/RUN, the HUD will display an HUD image as a parking aid, you introductory message for a short may misjudge the distance and time, until the HUD is ready. damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as a parking aid.

The HUD control is located to the right of the steering wheel. 5-34 Instruments and Controls

To adjust the HUD image so that ? (Page): Press this button to items are properly displayed, do the select the display formats. Release following: the page button when the format 1. Adjust the driver's seat to a number with the desired display is comfortable position. shown on the HUD. 2. Start the engine. The three formats are as follows: 3. Adjust the HUD controls. Use the following settings to adjust the HUD. 9 (Off): To turn HUD off, rotate the dimming knob fully counterclockwise Format Two: This display includes until the HUD display turns off. the information in Format One without the transmission information Brightness: Turn the knob on and the outside air temperature. the HUD control clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the display. w (Up): x (Down): Press the up or Format One: This display gives the down arrows to center the HUD speedometer reading (in English or image in your view. The HUD image metric units), turn signal indication, can only be adjusted up and down, high beam indication, transmission not side to side. positions, and the outside air temperature. Instruments and Controls 5-35

The HUD image displayed on the If You Cannot See the HUD windshield will automatically dim Image When the Ignition Is On and brighten to compensate for outside lighting. . Is anything covering the HUD lens? The HUD image can temporarily light up depending on the angle and . Is the HUD dimmer setting bright position of the sunlight on the HUD enough? display. This is normal and will . Is the HUD image adjusted to change when the angle of the the proper height? sunlight on the HUD display . Are you wearing polarized changes. sunglasses? Polarized sunglasses could make Format Three: This display . Still no HUD image? Check the the HUD image harder to see. includes all the information in fuse in the instrument panel fuse Format One along with a circular Care of the HUD block. See Instrument Panel tachometer, but without outside air Fuse Block on page 10‑34. temperature. Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film If the HUD Image Is Not Clear All formats will show the turn-by-turn that could reduce the sharpness or navigation information and provide . Is the HUD image too bright? clarity of the HUD image. details about the next driving . Are the windshield and HUD To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, maneuver to be made. When you lens clean? near your destination, the HUD will clean cloth that has household glass display a distance bar that will cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the If the HUD image is not correct, fill in the closer you get to your HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not contact your dealer/retailer. destination. All navigation spray cleaner directly on the lens Keep in mind that the windshield is information is provided to the because the cleaner could leak into part of the HUD system. HUD by the navigation radio, the unit. if the vehicle has one. 5-36 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle Messages The following are the possible SERVICE BATTERY messages that can be displayed CHARGING SYSTEM Messages are displayed on the DIC and some information about them. to notify the driver that the status of On some vehicles, this message the vehicle has changed and that Battery Voltage and displays if there is a problem with some action may be needed by the battery charging system. Under the driver to correct the condition. Charging Messages certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in Multiple messages may appear one BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE after another. the instrument panel cluster. This message displays when the See Charging System Light on Some messages may not require system detects that the battery page 5‑16. Driving with this immediate action, but you can voltage is dropping below expected problem could drain the battery. press any of the DIC buttons levels. The battery saver system Turn off all unnecessary on the instrument panel or the starts reducing certain features of accessories. Have the electrical trip odometer reset stem on the the vehicle that you may be able to system checked as soon as instrument panel cluster to notice. At the point that the features possible. See your dealer/retailer. acknowledge that you received are disabled, this message is the messages and to clear them displayed. It means that the vehicle Brake System Messages from the display. is trying to save the charge in the Some messages cannot be cleared battery. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM from the DIC display because they Turn off all unnecessary This message displays along are more urgent. These messages accessories to allow the battery with the brake system warning require action before they can to recharge. light if there is a problem with the be cleared. You should take any brake system. See Brake System The normal battery voltage range is messages that appear on the Warning Light on page 5 19. If this 11.5 to 15.5 volts. ‑ display seriously and remember message appears, stop as soon as that clearing the messages will only possible and turn off the vehicle. make the messages disappear, not correct the problem. Instruments and Controls 5-37

Restart the vehicle and check for HOOD OPEN PASSENGER DOOR OPEN the message on the DIC display. On some models, this message This message displays and a chime If the message is still displayed or displays and a chime sounds if the sounds if the passenger door is appears again when you begin hood is not fully closed. Stop and not fully closed and the vehicle is driving, the brake system needs turn off the vehicle, check the hood shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn service as soon as possible. for obstructions, and close the hood off the vehicle, check the door for See your dealer/retailer. again. Check to see if the message obstructions, and close the door still appears on the DIC. again. Check to see if the message Cruise Control Messages still appears on the DIC. LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN CRUISE SET TO XXX This message displays and a chime RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays whenever sounds if the driver side rear door is This message displays and a chime the cruise control is set. See Cruise not fully closed and the vehicle is sounds if the passenger side rear Control on page 9‑32 for more shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn door is not fully closed and the information. off the vehicle, check the door for vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). obstructions, and close the door Stop and turn off the vehicle, check Door Ajar Messages again. Check to see if the message the door for obstructions, and close still appears on the DIC. the door again. Check to see if the DRIVER DOOR OPEN message still appears on the DIC. This message displays and a chime LIFTGATE OPEN sounds if the driver door is not fully This message displays and a chime closed and the vehicle is shifted sounds if the liftgate is open while out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle, check the door for the vehicle and check the liftgate. obstructions, and close the door Restart the vehicle and check for again. Check to see if the message the message on the DIC display. still appears on the DIC. 5-38 Instruments and Controls

Engine Cooling System ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP Messages ENGINE ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle Notice: If you drive your vehicle ENGINE HOT A/C while the engine is overheating, while the engine is overheating, (Air Conditioning) OFF severe engine damage may severe engine damage may This message displays when the occur. If an overheat warning occur. If an overheat warning engine coolant becomes hotter than appears on the instrument panel appears on the instrument panel the normal operating temperature. cluster and/or DIC, stop the cluster and/or DIC, stop the See Engine Coolant Temperature vehicle as soon as possible. vehicle as soon as possible. Gauge on page 5‑13. To avoid Do not increase the engine speed Do not increase the engine added strain on a hot engine, above normal idling speed. See speed above normal idling speed. the air conditioning compressor Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 See Engine Overheating on automatically turns off. When the for more information. page 10‑18 for more information. coolant temperature returns to This message displays when the This message displays and a normal, the air conditioning engine coolant temperature is too continuous chime sounds if the compressor turns back on. You can hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to engine cooling system reaches continue to drive your vehicle. idle until it cools down. See Engine unsafe temperatures for operation. If this message continues to appear, Coolant Temperature Gauge on Stop and turn off the vehicle as have the system repaired by your page 5‑13. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid dealer/retailer as soon as possible See Overheated Engine Protection severe damage. This message clears when the engine has cooled to avoid damage to the engine. Operating Mode on page 10‑20 for information on driving to a safe to a safe operating temperature. place in an emergency. Instruments and Controls 5-39

Engine Oil Messages until the cause of the low oil This message also displays when pressure is corrected. See Engine the vehicle's engine power is CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Oil on page 10‑8 for more reduced. Reduced engine power This message displays when the information. can affect the vehicle's ability to engine oil needs to be changed. This message displays if low oil accelerate. If this message is on, When you change the engine oil, be pressure levels occur. Stop the but there is no reduction in sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE vehicle as soon as safely possible performance, proceed to your OIL SOON message. See Engine and do not operate it until the cause destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle Oil Life System on page 10‑9 for of the low oil pressure has been information on how to reset the corrected. Check the oil as soon is driven. The vehicle may be driven message. See Engine Oil on as possible and have your vehicle at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and page 10‑8 and Scheduled serviced by your dealer/retailer. speed may be reduced. Anytime Maintenance on page 11‑2 for See Engine Oil on page 10‑8. more information. this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/ OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP Engine Power Messages retailer for service as soon as ENGINE ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED possible. Notice: If you drive your vehicle This message displays and a chime Fuel System Messages while the engine oil pressure sounds when the cooling system is low, severe engine damage temperature gets too hot and the FUEL LEVEL LOW may occur. If a low oil pressure engine further enters the engine warning appears on the coolant protection mode. See This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel instrument panel cluster and/or Engine Overheating on page 10‑18 DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as for further information. as soon as possible. See Fuel possible. Do not drive the vehicle Gauge on page 5‑12 and Fuel on page 9‑42 for more information. 5-40 Instruments and Controls

TIGHTEN GAS CAP under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) AUTOMATIC LIGHT System Operation on page 2 3 This message may display along ‑ CONTROL ON and Driver Information Center (DIC) with the check engine light on the (With DIC Buttons) on page 5 24 or This message displays when the instrument panel cluster if the ‑ Driver Information Center (DIC) automatic headlamps are turned on. vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened (Without DIC Buttons) on This message clears itself after properly. See Malfunction Indicator 10 seconds. page 5‑29 for more information. Lamp on page 5‑17. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank REPLACE BATTERY IN TURN SIGNAL ON on page 9‑45. The diagnostic REMOTE KEY This message displays and a chime system can determine if the fuel sounds if a turn signal is left on for This message displays if a Remote cap has been left off or improperly 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter installed. A loose or missing fuel signal/multifunction lever to the off battery is low. The battery needs cap allows fuel to evaporate into the position. atmosphere. A few driving trips with to be replaced in the transmitter. the cap properly installed should See “Battery Replacement” under Object Detection System turn this light and message off. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2‑3. Messages Key and Lock Messages Lamp Messages PARK ASSIST OFF REMOTE KEY LEARNING If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic ACTIVE AUTOMATIC LIGHT Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, CONTROL OFF after the vehicle has been started This message displays while you and shifted out of P (Park), this are matching a Remote Keyless This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off. message displays to remind the Entry (RKE) transmitter to driver that the URPA system has your vehicle. See “Matching This message clears itself after 10 seconds. been turned off or to notify the driver Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” that the system has turned itself off. Instruments and Controls 5-41

Press the set/reset button or If this message still comes on, Airbag System Messages the trip odometer reset stem to it means there is a problem. acknowledge this message and See your dealer/retailer for service. SERVICE AIR BAG clear it from the DIC display. For The vehicle is safe to drive, This message displays if there is a more information see Ultrasonic however, you do not have the problem with the airbag system. Parking Assist on page 9‑35. benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce Have your dealer/retailer inspect the your speed and drive accordingly. SERVICE PARK ASSIST system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5‑15 and If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL Airbag System on page 3‑32 for Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, more information. this message displays if there is This message displays when there a problem with the URPA system. is a problem with the Traction Anti-Theft Alarm System Do not use this system to help you Control System (TCS). When this park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist message is displayed, the system Messages on page 9‑35 for more information. will not limit wheel spin. Adjust SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT See your dealer/retailer for service. your driving accordingly. See your SYSTEM dealer/retailer for service. See Ride Control System StabiliTrak System on page 9‑30 This message displays when there Messages for more information. is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may SERVICE STABILITRAK TRACTION CONTROL OFF not restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer This message displays if there is This message displays when the ® Traction Control System (TCS) is before turning off the engine. a problem with the StabiliTrak See Immobilizer Operation on system. If this message appears, try turned off. Adjust your driving page 2‑14 for more information. to reset the system. Stop; turn off accordingly. See StabiliTrak System the engine for at least 15 seconds; on page 9‑30 for more information. then start the engine again. This message clears itself after 10 seconds. 5-42 Instruments and Controls

THEFT ATTEMPTED SERVICE POWER STEERING Tire Messages This message displays if the This message displays when a TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE content theft-deterrent system has problem is detected with the detected a break-in attempt while power steering system. When this On vehicles with the Tire Pressure you were away from your vehicle. message is displayed, you may Monitor System (TPMS), this See Anti-Theft Alarm System on notice that the effort required to message displays when the page 2‑13 for more information. steer the vehicle increases or feels pressure in one or more of the heavier, but you will still be able to vehicle's tires is low. Service Vehicle Messages steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle This message also displays serviced by your dealer/retailer LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT SERVICE A/C (Air immediately. (right front), LEFT RR (left rear), Conditioning) SYSTEM SERVICE VEHICLE SOON or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate This message displays when the the location of the low tire. This message displays when a electronic sensors that control the The low tire pressure warning air conditioning and heating non-emissions related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced light will also come on. See Tire systems are no longer working. Pressure Light on page 5‑21. Have the climate control system by your dealer/retailer as soon as serviced by your dealer/retailer if possible. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you you notice a drop in heating and air STARTING DISABLED conditioning efficiency. can. Inflate the tires by adding air SERVICE THROTTLE until the tire pressure is equal to the This message displays when values shown on the Tire Loading your vehicle's throttle system is Information label. See Tires on not functioning properly. Have page 10‑36, Vehicle Load Limits on your vehicle serviced by your page 9‑12, and Tire Pressure on dealer/retailer. page 10‑43. Instruments and Controls 5-43

You can receive more than one If the warning comes on and stays rear differential fluid is overheating. tire pressure message at a time. on, there may be a problem with the This message turns off when the To read the other messages that TPMS. See your dealer/retailer. differential fluid cools. may have been sent at the same TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE The AWD system is disabled until time, press the set/reset button or the compact spare tire is replaced the trip odometer reset stem. The This message displays when by a full-size tire. If the warning DIC also shows the tire pressure the Tire Pressure Monitor message is still on after putting on values. See Driver Information System (TPMS) is re-learning the full-size tire, you need to reset Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on the tire positions on your vehicle. the warning message. To reset the page 5‑24 or Driver Information The tire positions must be warning message, turn the ignition Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) re-learned after rotating the tires off and then back on again after on page 5‑29. or after replacing a tire or sensor. 30 seconds. If the message stays See Tire Rotation on page 10‑49, on, see your dealer/retailer right SERVICE TIRE MONITOR Tire Pressure Monitor System on SYSTEM away. See All-Wheel Drive on page 10‑44, and Tire Pressure on page 9‑28 for more information. On vehicles with the Tire Pressure page 10‑43 for more information. Monitor System (TPMS), this SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE message displays if a part on the Transmission Messages If your vehicle has the All-Wheel TPMS is not working properly. ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF Drive (AWD) system, this message The tire pressure light also flashes displays if there is a problem with and then remains on during the If your vehicle has the All-Wheel this system. If this message same ignition cycle. See Tire Drive (AWD) system, this message appears, stop as soon as possible Pressure Light on page 5‑21. displays when there is a compact and turn off the vehicle. Restart the Several conditions may cause this spare tire on the vehicle, when vehicle after 30 seconds and check message to appear. See Tire the Antilock Brake System (ABS) for the message on the DIC display. Pressure Monitor Operation on warning light comes on, or when the page 10‑46 for more information. 5-44 Instruments and Controls

If the message is still displayed or This message displays and a chime Vehicle Speed Messages appears again when you begin sounds if the transmission fluid in driving, the AWD system needs the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the SPEED LIMITED TO service. See your dealer/retailer. transmission fluid temperature high XXX MPH (KM/H) can cause damage to the vehicle. This message displays when your SERVICE TRANSMISSION Stop the vehicle and let it idle to vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph allow the transmission to cool. This message displays when there (128 km/h) because the vehicle This message clears when the fluid is a problem with the transmission. detects a problem in the speed temperature reaches a safe level. See your dealer/retailer for service. variable assist steering system. TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Have your vehicle serviced by your Vehicle Reminder dealer/retailer. ENGINE Messages Notice: If you drive your vehicle Washer Fluid Messages while the transmission fluid is ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE overheating and the transmission WITH CARE WASHER FLUID LOW ADD temperature warning is displayed This message displays when the FLUID on the instrument panel cluster outside air temperature is cold This message displays when the and/or DIC, you can damage the enough to create icy road transmission. This could lead to windshield washer fluid is low. Fill conditions. Adjust your driving the windshield washer fluid reservoir costly repairs that would not accordingly. be covered by your warranty. as soon as possible. See Engine Do not drive your vehicle with Compartment Overview on overheated transmission fluid page 10‑6 for the location of the or while the transmission windshield washer fluid reservoir. temperature warning is displayed. Also, see Washer Fluid on page 10‑21 for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-45

Vehicle The customization preferences Feature Settings Menu Items are automatically recalled. Personalization The following are customization To change customization features that allow you to program preferences, use the following settings to the vehicle: Vehicle Personalization procedure. (With DIC Buttons) DISPLAY IN ENGLISH Entering the Feature This feature will only display if a Your vehicle may have Settings Menu language other than English has customization capabilities that been set. This feature allows you to allow you to program certain 1. Turn the ignition on and place change the language in which the features to one preferred setting. the vehicle in P (Park). DIC messages appear to English. Customization features can only To avoid excessive drain on the be programmed to one setting battery, it is recommended that Press the customization button until on the vehicle and cannot be the headlamps are turned off. the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN programmed to a preferred setting 2. Press the customization button ENGLISH screen appears on the for two different drivers. to enter the feature DIC display. Press the set/reset All of the customization options may settings menu. button once to display all DIC not be available on your vehicle. messages in English. If the menu is not available, Only the options available will be FEATURE SETTINGS DISPLAY LANGUAGE displayed on the DIC. AVAILABLE IN PARK will This feature allows you to select The default settings for the display. Before entering the the language in which the DIC customization features were set menu, make sure the vehicle messages will appear. when your vehicle left the factory, is in P (Park). but may have been changed from their default state since then. 5-46 Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button AUTO DOOR LOCK To select a setting, press the until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select set/reset button while the desired screen appears on the DIC display. when the vehicle's doors will setting is displayed on the DIC. Press the set/reset button once to automatically lock. See Automatic access the settings for this feature. AUTO DOOR UNLOCK Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more Then press the customization button information. This feature allows you to select to scroll through the following whether or not to turn off the settings: Press the customization button until automatic door unlocking feature. AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the It also allows you to select which ENGLISH (default): All messages DIC display. Press the set/reset will appear in English. doors and when the doors will button once to access the settings automatically unlock. See Automatic FRANCAIS: All messages will for this feature. Then press the Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more appear in French. customization button to scroll information. through the following settings: ESPANOL: All messages will Press the customization button until appear in Spanish. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on NO CHANGE: No change will be The doors will automatically lock the DIC display. Press the set/reset made to this feature. The current when the vehicle is shifted out of button once to access the settings setting will remain. P (Park). for this feature. Then press the AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors customization button to scroll To select a setting, press the through the following settings: set/reset button while the desired will automatically lock when the setting is displayed on the DIC. vehicle speed is above 8 mph OFF: None of the doors will (13 km/h) for three seconds. automatically unlock. You can also change the language by pressing the trip odometer reset NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the made to this feature. The current stem. See “Language” under Driver driver's door will unlock when the Information Center (Without DIC setting will remain. key is taken out of the ignition. Buttons) earlier in this section for more information. Instruments and Controls 5-47

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the driver's door will unlock when the REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on set/reset button while the desired vehicle is shifted into P (Park). the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. button once to access the settings ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK will unlock when the key is taken for this feature. Then press the out of the ignition. customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select through the following settings: the type of feedback you will ALL IN PARK (default): All of the OFF: There will be no feedback receive when unlocking the doors will unlock when the vehicle is vehicle with the Remote Keyless shifted into P (Park). when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will NO CHANGE: No change will be not receive feedback when made to this feature. The current LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps unlocking the vehicle with the RKE setting will remain. will flash when you press the lock transmitter if the doors are open. button on the RKE transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To select a setting, press the HORN ONLY: The horn will sound System Operation on page 2‑3 set/reset button while the desired for more information. setting is displayed on the DIC. on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN & LIGHTS (default): The until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the exterior lamps will flash when you appears on the DIC display. Press type of feedback you will receive press the lock button on the RKE the set/reset button once to access when locking the vehicle with the transmitter, and the horn will sound the settings for this feature. Then Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) when the lock button is pressed press the customization button to transmitter. You will not receive again within five seconds of the scroll through the following settings: feedback when locking the vehicle previous command. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter if the doors NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press are open. See Remote Keyless made to this feature. The current the unlock button on the RKE Entry (RKE) System Operation on setting will remain. transmitter. page 2‑3 for more information. 5-48 Instruments and Controls

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior You can temporarily override EXIT LIGHTING lamps will flash when you press delayed locking by pressing the This feature allows you to select the unlock button on the RKE power door lock switch twice or the the amount of time you want the transmitter. lock button on the RKE transmitter exterior lamps to remain on when NO CHANGE: No change will be twice. See Delayed Locking on it is dark enough outside. This made to this feature. The current page 2‑8 for more information. happens after the key is turned setting will remain. Press the customization button until from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. To select a setting, press the DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on Press the customization button until set/reset button while the desired the DIC display. Press the set/reset EXIT LIGHTING appears on the setting is displayed on the DIC. button once to access the settings DIC display. Press the set/reset for this feature. Then press the button once to access the settings DELAY DOOR LOCK customization button to scroll for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select through the following settings: customization button to scroll whether or not the locking of the OFF: There will be no delayed through the following settings: vehicle's doors and liftgate will be locking of the vehicle's doors. OFF: The exterior lamps will not delayed. When locking the doors ON (default): The doors will not turn on. and liftgate with the power door lock until five seconds after the last 30 SECONDS (default): The lock switch and a door or the door or the liftgate is closed. liftgate is open, this feature will exterior lamps will stay on for delay locking the doors and liftgate NO CHANGE: No change will be 30 seconds. until five seconds after the last made to this feature. The current 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will door is closed. You will hear setting will remain. stay on for one minute. three chimes to signal that the To select a setting, press the delayed locking feature is in 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will set/reset button while the desired stay on for two minutes. use. The key must be out of the setting is displayed on the DIC. ignition for this feature to work. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Instruments and Controls 5-49

To select a setting, press the The lights will remain on for LOUD: The chime volume will be set/reset button while the desired 20 seconds or until the lock button set to a loud level. setting is displayed on the DIC. on the RKE transmitter is pressed, NO CHANGE: No change will be or the vehicle is no longer off. APPROACH LIGHTING made to this feature. The current See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) setting will remain. This feature allows you to select System Operation on page 2‑3 for whether or not to have the exterior more information. There is no default for chime lights turn on briefly during low light volume. The volume will stay at NO CHANGE : No change will be the last known setting. periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current using the Remote Keyless Entry setting will remain. To select a setting, press the (RKE) transmitter. set/reset button while the desired To select a setting, press the setting is displayed on the DIC. Press the customization button until set/reset button while the desired APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting is displayed on the DIC. PARK TILT MIRRORS the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings CHIME VOLUME If your vehicle has this feature, it for this feature. Then press the allows you to select whether or This feature allows you to select the not the outside mirror(s) will customization button to scroll volume level of the chime. through the following settings: automatically tilt down when the Press the customization button until vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). OFF: The exterior lights will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑18 turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset for more information. with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings ON (default): If it is dark enough for this feature. Then press the outside, the exterior lights will turn customization button to scroll on briefly when you unlock the through the following settings: vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal level. 5-50 Instruments and Controls

Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the The automatic easy exit seat PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on set/reset button while the desired movement will only occur one time the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. after the key is removed from the button once to access the settings ignition. If the automatic movement for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT SEAT has already occurred, and you put customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it the key back in the ignition and through the following settings: allows you to select your preference remove it again, the seat and OFF (default): Neither outside for the automatic easy exit seat steering column will stay in the mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Delayed Locking on original exit position, unless a vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). page 2‑8 for more information. memory recall took place prior to removing the key again. DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's Press the customization button until outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the NO CHANGE: No change will be when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset made to this feature. The current R (Reverse). button once to access the settings setting will remain. for this feature. Then press the PASSENGER MIRROR: The To select a setting, press the customization button to scroll set/reset button while the desired passenger's outside mirror will be through the following settings: tilted down when the vehicle is setting is displayed on the DIC. shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur. MEMORY SEAT RECALL BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and ON: The driver's seat will move If your vehicle has this feature, it passenger's outside mirrors will be allows you to select your preference tilted down when the vehicle is back when the key is removed from the ignition. for the remote memory seat recall shifted into R (Reverse). feature. See Delayed Locking on NO CHANGE: No change will be page 2‑8 for more information. made to this feature. The current setting will remain. Instruments and Controls 5-51

Press the customization button To select a setting, press the NO CHANGE: No change will be until MEMORY SEAT RECALL set/reset button while the desired made to this feature. The current appears on the DIC display. Press setting is displayed on the DIC. setting will remain. the set/reset button once to access REMOTE START To select a setting, press the the settings for this feature. Then set/reset button while the desired press the customization button to If your vehicle has this feature, it setting is displayed on the DIC. scroll through the following settings: allows you to turn the remote start OFF (default): No remote memory off or on. The remote start feature FACTORY SETTINGS seat recall will occur. allows you to start the engine from This feature allows you to set all of outside of the vehicle using the ON: The driver's seat and outside the customization features back to Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) their factory default settings. mirrors will automatically move to transmitter. See Remote Vehicle the stored driving position when Start on page 2‑5 for more Press the customization button until the unlock button on the Remote information. FACTORY SETTINGS appears on Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is the DIC display. Press the set/reset Press the customization button until pressed. See “Relearn Remote Key” button once to access the settings under Driver Information Center REMOTE START appears on the for this feature. Then press the (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on DIC display. Press the set/reset customization button to scroll button once to access the settings page 5‑24 or Driver Information through the following settings: Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll RESTORE ALL (default): The on page 5‑29 for more information through the following settings: customization features will be set on matching transmitters to driver to their factory default settings. ID numbers. OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The NO CHANGE: No change will be customization features will not made to this feature. The current ON (default): The remote start be set to their factory default setting will remain. feature will be enabled. settings. 5-52 Instruments and Controls

To select a setting, press the Exiting the Feature Universal Remote set/reset button while the desired Settings Menu setting is displayed on the DIC. System The feature settings menu will be EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on page 13 17 for information This feature allows you to exit the occurs: ‑ regarding Part 15 of the Federal feature settings menu. . The vehicle is shifted out of Communications Commission (FCC) Press the customization button P (Park). Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry until FEATURE SETTINGS . The vehicle is no longer in Canada. PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the ON/RUN. DIC display. Press the set/reset . The trip/fuel or vehicle Universal Remote System button once to exit the menu. information DIC buttons are Programming If you do not exit, pressing the pressed. customization button again will . The end of the feature settings return you to the beginning of the menu is reached and exited. feature settings menu. . A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made.

This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. Instruments and Controls 5-53

Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door, To program up to three devices: Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing the and reverse feature. This includes garage door opener motor-head any garage door opener model or gate motor-head. Be sure that manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the Read the instructions completely garage door or gate that is being before attempting to program programmed. the Universal Home Remote. It is recommended that a new Because of the steps involved, it battery be installed in your may be helpful to have another hand-held transmitter for quicker person available to assist you with and more accurate transmission programming the Universal Home of the radio-frequency signal. Remote. Programming the Universal 1. From inside the vehicle, press Keep the original hand-held Home Remote System and hold down the two outside transmitter for use in other vehicles buttons at the same time, as well as for future Universal Home For questions or help programming releasing only when the Remote programming. It is also the Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote recommended that upon the sale System, call 1‐800‐355‐3515 indicator light begins to flash, of the vehicle, the programmed or go to www.homelink.com. after 20 seconds. This step will Universal Home Remote buttons Programming a garage door opener erase the factory settings or all should be erased for security involves time-sensitive actions, so previously programmed buttons. purposes. See “Erasing Universal read the entire procedure before Home Remote Buttons” later in this starting. Otherwise, the device will Do not hold down the buttons for section. time out and the procedure will have longer than 30 seconds and do to be repeated. not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons. 5-54 Instruments and Controls

2. Hold the end of your hand-held 4. The indicator light on the light, continue with transmitter about 3 to 8 cm Universal Home Remote will the programming (1 to 3 inches) away from the flash slowly at first and then Steps 6 through 8. Universal Home Remote buttons rapidly after Universal Home It may be helpful to have while keeping the indicator Remote successfully receives another person assist light in view. The hand-held the frequency signal from the with the remaining steps. transmitter was supplied by the hand-held transmitter. Release manufacturer of your garage both buttons. door opener receiver (motor 5. Press and hold the newly-trained head unit). Universal Home Remote button 3. At the same time, press and and observe the indicator light. hold both the Universal Home . If the indicator light stays Remote button to be used to on continuously, the control the garage door and the programming is complete hand-held transmitter button. and the garage door should Do not release the Universal move when the Universal Home Remote button or the Home Remote button is hand-held transmitter button until pressed and released. Step 4 has been completed. There is no need to Some entry gates and garage continue programming 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have door openers may require Steps 6 through 8. been completed, locate inside substitution of Step 3 with the garage the garage door . If the Universal Home opener receiver (motor-head the procedure noted in “Gate Remote indicator light unit). Locate the Learn or Operator and Canadian blinks rapidly for “ ” Smart button. The name and Programming” later in this two seconds and then “ ” color of the button may vary by section. turns to a constant manufacturer. Instruments and Controls 5-55

7. Firmly press and release the To program the remaining If you live in Canada, or you are “Learn” or “Smart” button. After two Universal Home Remote having difficulty programming a you press this button, you will buttons, begin with Step 2 of gate operator or garage door have 30 seconds to complete “Programming the Universal Home opener by using the “Programming Step 8. Remote System.” Do not repeat Universal Home Remote” 8. Immediately return to the Step 1, as this will erase all procedures, regardless of where vehicle. Firmly press and hold previous programming from the you live, replace Step 3 under the Universal Home Remote Universal Home Remote buttons. “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the following: button, selected in Step 3 to Gate Operator and Canadian control the garage door, for Programming Continue to press and hold the two seconds, and then release Universal Home Remote button it. If the garage door does not If you have questions or need while you press and release move, press and hold the help programming the Universal every two seconds (cycle) the same button a second time for Home Remote System, call hand-held transmitter button until two seconds, and then release 1-800-355-3515 or go to the frequency signal has been it. Again, if the door does not www.homelink.com. successfully accepted by the move, press and hold the Canadian radio-frequency laws Universal Home Remote. same button a third time for require transmitter signals to time The Universal Home Remote two seconds, and then release. out or quit after several seconds indicator light will flash slowly at The Universal Home Remote of transmission. This may not be first and then rapidly. Proceed should now activate the long enough for Universal Home with Step 4 under “Programming garage door. Remote to pick up the signal during Universal Home Remote” to programming. Similarly, some U.S. complete the training procedure. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner. 5-56 Instruments and Controls

Universal Remote System To erase all programmed buttons on Reprogramming a Single Operation the Universal Remote device: Universal Remote Button To reprogram any of the three Using Universal Remote Universal Remote buttons, repeat Press and hold the appropriate the programming instructions earlier Universal Remote button for at least in this section, beginning with half of a second. The indicator light Step 2. will come on while the signal is For help or information on the being transmitted. Universal Home Remote System, Erasing Universal Remote call the customer assistance phone Buttons number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 13‑4. All programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. Lighting 6-1

Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control ...... 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls Exterior Lighting Courtesy Lamps ...... 6-5 Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Reading Lamps ...... 6-5 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Lighting Features Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Daytime Running Lamps Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-6 System ...... 6-3 Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7 Turn and Lane-Change Battery Power Protection ...... 6-8 Signals ...... 6-4 Fog Lamps ...... 6-4

The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. 6-2 Lighting

It controls the following systems: ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the Headlamp High/ parking lamps on together with the . Headlamps following: Low-Beam Changer . Taillamps 2 3 . Taillamps Headlamp High/Low Beam . Parking Lamps Changer: Push the turn signal/lane . License Plate Lamps change lever away from you to turn . License Plate Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights the high beams on. . Instrument Panel Lights 2 (Headlamps): Turns the Pull the lever towards you to return . Fog Lamps headlamps on together with the to low beams. The exterior lamps control has following lamps listed below. four positions: A warning chime sounds if the driver's door is opened when the 9 (Off): Briefly turn to this position ignition switch is off and the to turn the automatic light control off headlamps are on. or on again. . Parking Lamps AUTO (Automatic): Turns the headlamps on automatically at . Taillamps This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel cluster when the normal brightness, together with the . License Plate Lamps following: high beam headlamps are on. . Instrument Panel Lights . Parking Lamps # (Fog Lamps): Push the fog . Taillamps lamps control in to turn on the . License Plate Lamps fog lamps. . Instrument Panel Lights See Fog Lamps on page 6‑4. Lighting 6-3

Flash-to-Pass The DRL system makes either darkness of the surroundings. the low-beam headlamps come The other lamps that come on with This feature is used to signal to on at a reduced brightness or the headlamps will also come on. the vehicle ahead that you want the DRL lights, for vehicles with to pass. When it is bright enough outside, High Intensity Discharge (HID) the headlamps will go off and the If the headlamps are off or in headlamps when the following DRL will come on. the low‐beam position, pull the conditions are met: The regular headlamp system turn signal lever toward you to . The ignition is in the ON/RUN should be turned on when needed. momentarily switch to high‐beams. position. Do not cover the light sensor on top Release the lever to turn the . The exterior lamps control is high-beam headlamps off. of the instrument panel because it in AUTO. works with the DRL. Daytime Running . The engine is running. Hazard Warning Flashers Lamps (DRL)/Automatic When the DRL are on, the regular headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, | Headlamp System Hazard Warning Flasher: and other lamps will not be on. Press this button located on the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can The instrument panel and cluster instrument panel below the audio make it easier for others to see the will also not be lit. system, to make the front and rear front of your vehicle during the day. For vehicles with HID headlamps, turn signal lamps flash on and off. Fully functional daytime running if the DRL are on and the left or This warns others that you are lamps are required on all vehicles right turn signal lamp is turned on, having trouble. Press again to turn first sold in Canada. the left or right DRL will go off. the flashers off. The headlamps automatically The turn signals do not work while change from DRL to the regular the hazard warning flashers are on. headlamps depending on the 6-4 Lighting

Turn and Lane-Change Raise or lower the lever until the Fog Lamps arrow starts to flash to signal a lane Signals change. Hold it there until the lane Use the fog lamps for better vision change is completed. If the lever is in foggy or misty conditions. briefly pressed and released, the The fog lamps button is on the turn signal flashes three times. exterior lamps control to the left of The lever returns to its starting the steering column. position whenever it is released. # (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior If after signaling a turn or lane lamps button to turn the fog lamps change the arrow flashes rapidly on or off. A light comes on in the or does not come on, a signal bulb instrument panel cluster when the might be burned out. fog lamps are in use. The ignition must be on for the fog lamps Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb to work. is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on When the headlamps are changed An arrow on the instrument panel page 10‑30. to high-beam, the fog lamps turn off. cluster flashes in the direction of the The fog lamps come back on again turn or lane change. Turn Signal On Chime when the high-beam headlamps are Move the lever all the way up or If either one of the turn signals are turned off. down to signal a turn. left on and the vehicle has been Some localities have laws that driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), require the headlamps to be on a chime will sound. along with the fog lamps. Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting The reading lamps, located on the Dome Lamp Override headliner above the rearview mirror, The dome lamp override button is can be turned on or off independent next to the exterior lamps control. Instrument Panel of the automatic courtesy lamps, Illumination Control when the doors are closed. E (Dome Lamp Override): Press D the button in and the dome lamps (Instrument Panel Dome Lamps remain off when a door is opened. Brightness): The knob with this Press the button again to return it to symbol on it is next to the exterior The dome lamps are located in the the extended position so that the lamps control to the left of the overhead console and above the dome lamps come on when a door steering wheel. Push the knob in rear seat passengers. is opened. all the way until it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise or The dome lamps automatically counterclockwise to brighten or dim come on when a door is opened, Reading Lamps the lights. Push the knob back in unless the dome lamp override Press the button near each lamp to when finished. button is pressed in. turn them on or off. The lamps can also be turned on Courtesy Lamps and off by turning the instrument panel brightness control clockwise The courtesy lamps automatically to the farthest position. come on when a door is opened. The lamps can also be turned on manually by fully turning the instrument panel brightness control clockwise. 6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features When the ignition is on, illuminated Delayed Exit Lighting entry is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps will not come on Delayed exit lighting illuminates the Entry Lighting unless a door is opened. interior for a period of time after the For vehicles with courtesy lamps, key is removed from the ignition. they come on and stay on for a set Delayed Entry Lighting The ignition must be off for delayed time whenever the unlock symbol is exit lighting to work. When the key Delayed entry lighting illuminates pressed on the Remote Keyless is removed, interior illumination the interior for a period of time after Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the activates and remains on until all the doors have been closed. vehicle has one. one of the following occurs: The ignition must be off for delayed If a door is opened, the lamps stay . The ignition is in ON/RUN. entry lighting to work. Immediately on while it is open and then turn off after all the doors have been closed, . The power door locks are automatically about 20 seconds the delayed entry lighting feature activated. after the door is closed. If the unlock continues to work until one of the symbol is pressed and no door is . An illumination period of following occurs: opened, the lamps turn off after 20 seconds has elapsed. about 20 seconds. . The ignition is in ON/RUN. If during the illumination period Entry lighting includes a feature . The doors are locked. a door is opened, the timed illumination period will be canceled called theater dimming. With theater . An illumination period of about and the interior lamps will remain on dimming, the lamps do not turn 25 seconds has elapsed. off at the end of the delay time. because a door is open. Instead, they slowly dim and then If during the illumination period go out. The delay time is canceled a door is opened, the timed if the ignition key is turned to illumination period is canceled ON/RUN or the power door lock and the interior lamps remain on. switch is pressed. The lamps will dim right away. Lighting 6-7

Parade Dimming voltage move up or down. This is needed. It can temporarily reduce normal. If there is a problem, an the power demands of some This feature automatically prohibits alert will be displayed. accessories. the dimming of the instrument panel displays in daylight while the The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in headlamps are on so that the idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being displays are still able to be seen. high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action, Battery Load (alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the enough at idle to produce all the driver. If so, a Driver Information Management power that is needed for very high Center (DIC) message might be The vehicle has Electric Power electrical loads. displayed, such as BATTERY Management (EPM) that estimates A high electrical load occurs when SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY the battery's temperature and state several of the following are on, such VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. of charge. It then adjusts the voltage as: headlamps, high beams, fog If one of these messages displays, for best performance and extended lamps, rear window defogger, it is recommended that the driver life of the battery. climate control fan at high speed, reduce the electrical loads as much heated seats, engine cooling fans, as possible. See Driver Information When the battery's state of charge Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on is low, the voltage is raised slightly trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. page 5‑24 or Driver Information to quickly bring the charge back up. Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) When the state of charge is high, EPM works to prevent excessive on page 5‑29. the voltage is lowered slightly to discharge of the battery. It does this prevent overcharging. If the vehicle by balancing the generator's output has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage and the vehicle's electrical needs. display on the Driver Information It can increase engine idle speed to Center (DIC), you may see the generate more power, whenever 6-8 Lighting

Battery Power Protection This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy lamps, reading/ map lamps, visor vanity lamps or trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they automatically turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs: . The ignition is turned on. . The exterior lamps control is turned off, then on again. The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are manually turned on while the ignition is on or off. Infotainment System 7-1

Audio Players Introduction Infotainment CD Player ...... 7-12 System CD/DVD Player ...... 7-14 Read the following pages to MP3 (Radio with CD and become familiar with the audio Radio with CD/USB) ...... 7-22 system's features. Introduction MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . . 7-28 Introduction ...... 7-1 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-34 { WARNING Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Rear Seat Infotainment Operation ...... 7-2 Taking your eyes off the road Rear Seat Entertainment for extended periods could Radio (RSE) System ...... 7-36 cause a crash resulting in Rear Seat Audio (RSA) AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 injury or death to you or others. Satellite Radio ...... 7-8 System ...... 7-44 Rear Audio Do not give extended attention to Radio Reception ...... 7-11 entertainment tasks while driving. Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-12 Controller (RAC) ...... 7-46 Phone This system provides access to Bluetooth ...... 7-46 many audio and non audio listings. To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. 7-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see Defensive Operation Driving on page 9‑2. The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9‑19 for more information. Navigation/Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. Infotainment System 7-3

See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 7‑36 for more information on the vehicle's RSE system. The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Playing the Radio Radio with CD, DVD, and USB O (Power/Volume): Press to turn The vehicle may have one of these explained later in this section the system on and off. Turn to radios as its audio system. under, “Adjusting the Speakers increase or decrease the volume. (Balance/Fade)”. Radios with CD, DVD, and USB For vehicles with a Rear If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment System (RSE), Radios with CD, DVD, and USB press and hold for more than ® Entertainment (RSE) system, have a Bose Surround Sound it has a CD, DVD, and USB radio. two seconds to turn off the entire System. Some of its features are radio and RSE system and to start the parental control feature. 7-4 Infotainment System

Parental control prevents the rear information displays on the bottom Speed Compensated Volume seat occupant from operating the line. When information is not (SCV): The Speed Compensated Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or available, “NO INFO” is displayed. Volume (SCV) feature automatically remote control. Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, adjusts the radio volume to A lock symbol displays next to the CD, MP3, and WMA features): compensate for road and wind clock display while the parental If additional information is available noise as the vehicle speeds up or control feature is being used. for the current song being played, slows down, so that the volume level is consistent. The feature remains on until O is Auto Text will automatically page/ pressed and held for more than scroll the information every To activate SCV: two seconds, or the driver turns the five seconds above the FAV 1. Set the radio volume. ignition off and exits the vehicle. presets on the radio display. 2. Press the MENU button to 4 (Information): Press to switch To activate Auto Text: display the radio setup menu. the display between the radio 1. Press MENU to display the radio 3. Press the softkey under the station frequency and the time. setup menu. When the ignition is in the OFF AUTO VOLUM (automatic 4 2. Press the softkey under volume) tab on the radio display. position, press to display the time. AUTO TXT tab on the radio For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA 4. Press the softkey under the display. Speed Compensated Volume or RDS features, press 4 to display 3. Press the softkey under the ON setting (OFF, Low, Med, or additional text information related to tab on the radio display. High) to select the level of radio the current FM-RDS or XM station; 4 volume compensation. Press or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If is pressed and the song title the softkey located below the If information is available during XM, or artist information is longer than BACK tab on the MENU SETUP CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the what can be displayed, the extra display or let the display time out song title information displays on information will page every after approximately 10 seconds. the top line of the display and artist five seconds when Auto Text is activated. Infotainment System 7-5

Each higher setting allows To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers for more radio volume or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade) compensation at faster press the softkey under the BASS, vehicle speeds. MID, or TREB tab for more than BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): two seconds. A beep sounds and To adjust the balance or fade: Setting the Tone the level adjusts to the middle f (Bass/Midrange/Treble) 1. Press until the speaker control position. tabs display. BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, To quickly adjust all tone and f or Treble): To adjust bass, speaker controls to the middle 2. Continue pressing to highlight midrange, or treble: f the tab, or press the softkey position, press for more than under the tab. 1. Press f until the tone control two seconds until a beep sounds. tabs display. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, EQ (Equalization): Press to do one of the following until the 2. Continue pressing f to highlight choose bass and treble equalization levels are obtained. settings designed for different types the tab, or press the softkey of music. The choices are pop, rock, . Turn f clockwise or under the tab. country, talk, jazz, and classical. counterclockwise. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, Selecting MANUAL or changing do one of the following until the bass or treble, returns the EQ to the . Press \ FWD, levels are obtained. manual bass and treble settings. or s REV. . Turn f clockwise or Unique EQ settings can be saved To quickly adjust balance or fade counterclockwise. for each source. to the middle position, press the If the radio has a Bose® audio softkey under the BAL or FADE tab . Press \ FWD, system, the EQ settings are either for more than two seconds. A beep or s REV. MANUAL or TALK. sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble. 7-6 Infotainment System

To quickly adjust all speaker and If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is Radio tone controls to the middle position, turned on, the radio disables FADE f and mutes the rear speakers. press for more than two seconds AM-FM Radio until a beep sounds. Radio Messages Radio Data System (RDS) Radios with CD and DVD fade Calibration Error: The audio differently depending on the DVD system has been calibrated The Radio Data System (RDS) Media type: for the vehicle from the factory. feature is available for use only on . With DVD‐A 5.1 Surround If Calibration Error displays, it FM stations that broadcast RDS media, the left front and right means that the radio has not been information. This system relies upon front speakers fade rearward, configured properly for the vehicle receiving specific information from leaving the center front speakers and it must be returned to your these stations and only works when unaffected until the last dealer/retailer for service. the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS fade step, then all front Locked: This message displays speakers mute. ® station, the station name or call when the THEFTLOCK system letters display. In rare cases, a radio . With DVD‐V 5.1 Surround has locked up the radio. Take the station could broadcast incorrect media, surround sound is vehicle to your dealer/retailer for information that causes the radio maintained until Step 4 of the service. features to work improperly. If this Fade control is reached while If any error occurs repeatedly or happens, contact the radio station. fading rearward. At that point the if an error cannot be corrected, audio system output changes to contact your dealer/retailer. Stereo to prevent the loss of Center channel output when the full rearward fade position is reached. Infotainment System 7-7

Finding a Station favorites button, and steering wheel 3. Press and hold one of the controls. See Steering Wheel six softkeys until a beep sounds. BAND: Press to switch between Controls on page 5 2. When that softkey is pressed AM, FM, or XM. The selection ‑ and released, the station that displays. FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed was set, returns. f (Tune): Turn to select radio as favorites using the six softkeys 4. Repeat the steps for each radio stations. below the radio station frequency station to be stored as a favorite. SEEK : Press to go to the © ¨ tabs and by using the radio favorites To setup the number of favorites previous or to the next station and page button (FAV button). Press pages: stay there. to go through up to six pages of 1. Press MENU to display the radio To scan stations, press and favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each setup menu. hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds. page of favorites can contain any The radio goes to a station, plays 2. Press the softkey below the combination of AM, FM, or XM FAV 1-6 tab. for a few seconds, then goes to the stations. next station. Press either arrow 3. Select the desired number of again to stop scanning. The balance/fade and tone settings favorites pages by pressing the that were previously adjusted, are softkey below the displayed The radio only seeks and scans stored with the favorite stations. stations with a strong signal that page numbers. are in the selected band. To store a station as a favorite: 4. Press FAV, or let the menu 1. Tune to the desired radio station. time out, to return to the original Storing a Radio Station main radio screen showing the as a Favorite 2. Press FAV to display the page to radio station frequency tabs store the station. Drivers are encouraged to set up and to begin the process of their radio station favorites while programming favorites for the the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to chosen amount of numbered favorite stations using the presets, pages. 7-8 Infotainment System

Satellite Radio To scan stations, press and 4. Press either of the two buttons hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds. below the desired category tab XM™ Satellite Radio Service The radio goes to a station, plays to immediately tune to the first XM is a satellite radio service for a few seconds, then goes to the XM station associated with that that is based in the 48 contiguous next station. Press either arrow category. United States and 10 Canadian again to stop scanning. 5. To go to the next or previous provinces. XM Satellite Radio The radio only seeks and scans XM station within the selected has a wide variety of programming stations with a strong signal that category, do one of the and commercial-free music, are in the selected band. following: coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality . f sound. For more information, Finding a Category (CAT) Turn . contact XM at www.xmradio.com Station . Press the buttons below the or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. CAT (Category): The CAT button is right or left arrows on the and www.xmradio.ca or call used to find XM stations when the display. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. ™ radio is in the XM mode. To find XM . Press either SEEK arrow. channels within a desired category: Finding a Station 6. To exit the category search BAND: Press to switch between 1. Press BAND until the XM mode, press the FAV button or AM, FM, or XM. The selection frequency displays. BAND button to display the displays. 2. Press CAT to display the favorites again. f (Tune): Turn to select radio category tabs. stations. 3. Continue pressing CAT until the © SEEK ¨ : Press to go to the desired category name displays. previous or to the next station and . Radios with CD and DVD stay there. can also navigate the category list by pressing s REV or \ FWD. Infotainment System 7-9

Undesired XM categories can be Categories cannot be removed or The balance/fade and tone settings removed through the setup menu. added while the vehicle is moving that were previously adjusted, are To remove an undesired category, faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). stored with the favorite stations. perform the following: Storing a Radio Station as a To store a station as a favorite: 1. Press MENU to display the radio Favorite 1. Tune to the desired radio station. setup menu. Drivers are encouraged to set up 2. Press FAV to display the page to 2. Press the softkey below the their radio station favorites while store the station. XM CAT tab. the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to 3. Press and hold one of the favorite stations using the presets, 3. Turn f to display the category to six softkeys until a beep sounds. favorites button, and steering wheel be removed. When that softkey is pressed controls. See Steering Wheel and released, the station that 4. Press the softkey under the Controls on page 5‑2. Remove tab until the category was set, returns. FAV (Favorites): A maximum of name along with the word 4. Repeat the steps for each radio 36 stations can be programmed as Removed displays. station to be stored as a favorite. favorites using the six softkeys 5. Repeat the steps to remove below the radio station frequency To setup the number of favorites more categories. tabs and by using the radio favorites pages: Removed categories can be page button (FAV button). Press 1. Press MENU to display the radio restored by pressing the softkey to go through up to six pages of setup menu. under the Add tab when a removed favorites, each having six favorite category is displayed or by pressing stations available per page. Each 2. Press the softkey below the the softkey under the Restore page of favorites can contain any FAV 1-6 tab. All tab. combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. 7-10 Infotainment System

3. Select the desired number of No XM Signal: The system is No Title Info: No song title favorites pages by pressing the functioning correctly, but the vehicle information is available at this time softkey below the displayed is in a location that is blocking the on this channel. The system is page numbers. XM™ signal. When the vehicle is working properly. 4. Press FAV, or let the menu time moved into an open area, the signal No CAT Info: No category out, to return to the original should return. information is available at this time main radio screen showing the Loading XM: The audio system is on this channel. The system is radio station frequency tabs acquiring and processing audio and working properly. and to begin the process of text data. No action is needed. This No Information: No text or programming favorites for the message should disappear shortly. informational messages are chosen amount of numbered Channel Off Air: This channel is available at this time on this pages. not currently in service. Tune in to channel. The system is working XM™ Radio Messages another channel. properly. XL (Explicit Language Channel Unauth : This channel is CAT Not Found: There are no Channels): These channels, or blocked or cannot be received with channels available for the selected any others, can be blocked at a your XM Subscription package. category. The system is working customer's request, by calling Channel Unavail: This previously properly. 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). assigned channel is no longer XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver XM Updating: The encryption code assigned. Tune to another station. in the vehicle could have previously in the receiver is being updated, and If this station was one of the been in another vehicle. For security no action is required. This process presets, choose another station purposes, XM receivers cannot be should take no longer than for that preset button. swapped between vehicles. If this 30 seconds. No Artist Info: No artist message is received after having information is available at this time the vehicle serviced, check with on this channel. The system is your dealer/retailer. working properly. Infotainment System 7-11

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, accessories, and external electronic occur when things like storms and this message alternates with the devices are plugged into the power lines interfere with radio XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. accessory power outlet. If there is reception. When this happens, try This label is needed to activate the interference or static, unplug the reducing the treble on the radio. service. item from the accessory power XM™ Satellite Radio Service Unknown: If this message is outlet. XM Satellite Radio Service gives received when tuned to channel 0, FM there could be a receiver fault. digital radio reception from Consult with your dealer/retailer. FM signals only reach about 16 to coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous 65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although the United States, and in Canada. Just Check XM Receivr: If this radio has a built-in electronic circuit as with FM, tall buildings or hills can message does not clear within a that automatically works to reduce interfere with satellite radio signals, short period of time, the receiver interference, some static can occur, causing the sound to fade in and could have a fault. Consult with your especially around tall buildings or out. In addition, traveling or standing dealer/retailer. hills, causing the sound to fade in under heavy foliage, bridges, XM Not Available: If this message and out. garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. does not clear within a short period AM of time, the receiver could have a Cellular Phone Usage fault. Consult with your dealer/ The range for most AM stations is retailer. greater than for FM, especially at Cellular phone usage may cause night. The longer range can cause interference with the vehicle's radio. Radio Reception station frequencies to interfere This interference may occur when with each other. For better radio making or receiving phone calls, Frequency interference and static reception, most AM radio stations charging the phone's battery, can occur during normal radio boost the power levels during the or simply having the phone on. reception if items such as cell phone day, and then reduce these levels chargers, vehicle convenience during the night. Static can also 7-12 Infotainment System

This interference can cause an Audio Players If either arrow is held, or pressed increased level of static while multiple times, the player continues listening to the radio. If static is moving backward or forward received while listening to the radio, CD Player through the tracks on the CD. unplug the cellular phone and turn Playing a CD s REV (Fast Reverse): Press it off. Insert a CD partway into the slot, and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard Multi-Band Antenna label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. at a reduced volume. Release to The multi-band antenna is located Z resume playing the track. The on the roof of the vehicle. This type EJECT : Press and release to elapsed time of the track displays. eject the disc that is currently of antenna is used with the AM/FM \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press radio, as well as OnStar® and the playing. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the and hold to advance playback XM™ Satellite Radio Service disc is ejected, Remove Disc quickly within a track. Sound will be System, if the vehicle has these heard at a reduced volume. Release features. Keep this antenna clear displays. The disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed, after to resume playing the track. The of snow and ice build up for clear elapsed time of the track displays. radio reception. If the vehicle has several seconds, the disc a sunroof, the performance of the automatically pulls back into the RDM (Random): CD tracks can be radio system may be affected if the player. listened to in random, rather than sunroof is open. Loading items onto f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on sequential order with the random the roof of the vehicle can interfere the CD that is currently playing. setting. To use random, press the with the performance of the radio softkey under the RDM label until SEEK : Press to go to system and, if the vehicle has this © ¨ © Random Current Disc displays. the start of the current track, if more feature, OnStar®. Make sure the Press the softkey again to turn off than ten seconds on the CD have multi-band antenna is not random play. obstructed. played. Press ¨ to go to the next track. Infotainment System 7-13

BAND: Press to listen to the radio bottom surface of the disc. If the Notice: If a label is added to a when a CD is playing. The CD surface of a CD is damaged, such CD, or more than one CD is remains inside the radio for future as cracked, broken, or scratched, inserted into the slot at a time, listening. the CD does not play properly or not or an attempt is made to play CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to at all. Do not touch the bottom side scratched or damaged CDs, the select between CD, or Auxiliary. of a CD while handling it; this could CD player could be damaged. damage the surface. Pick up CDs While using the CD player, use . When a CD is in the player by grasping the outer edges or the only CDs in good condition the CD icon and a message edge of the hole and the outer edge. without any label, load one CD at showing the disc and/or track a time, and keep the CD player number displays. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a and the loading slot free of . If an auxiliary input device is not clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral foreign materials, liquids, and connected, “No Input Device detergent solution mixed with water, debris. Found” displays. and clean it. Make sure the wiping If an error displays, see “CD Care of CDs process starts from the center to Messages” later in this section. the edge. If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or can be reduced due to CD-R or Care of the CD Player CD-RW Disc CD-RW quality, the method of Do not add any label to a CD, it The radio has the capability of recording, the quality of the music could get caught in the CD player. playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or that has been recorded, and the If a CD is recorded on a personal CD-RW disc. For more information way the CD-R or CD-RW has been computer and a description label is on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R handled. Handle them carefully. needed, try labeling the top of the or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their recorded CD with a marking pen. with CD and Radio with CD/USB) original cases or other protective on page 7‑22 or MP3 (Radio with cases and away from direct sunlight The use of CD lens cleaners for CD/DVD) on page 7‑28. and dust. The CD player scans the CDs is not advised. 7-14 Infotainment System

CD Messages . There could have been a If the ignition or radio is turned off, problem while burning the CD. while a CD is in the player, it stays CHECK DISC: Radios with a . in the player. When the ignition or Single CD player display CHECK The label could be caught in the radio is turned on, the CD starts DISC and/or ejects the CD if an CD player. playing where it stopped, if it was error occurs. If the CD is not playing correctly for the last selected audio source. The Optical Error: The disc was any other reason, try a known CD is controlled by the buttons on inserted upside down. good CD. the radio faceplate or by the RSA Disk Read Error: A disc was If any error occurs repeatedly or if unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) inserted with an invalid or unknown an error cannot be corrected, System on page 7‑44 for more format. contact your dealer/retailer. If the information. The DVD/CD decks, radio displays an error message, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the Player Error: There are disc LOAD write it down and provide it to your lower slot is the CD deck) of the or disc EJECT problems. dealer/retailer when reporting the radio are compatible with most . It is very hot. When the problem. audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and temperature returns to normal, MP3/WMAs. the CD should play. CD/DVD Player When a CD is inserted, the text . The road is very rough. When Playing a CD (In Either the label DVD or CD symbol displays on the left side of the radio display. the road becomes smoother, the DVD or CD Slot) CD should play. As each new track starts to play, the Insert a CD partway into the slot, track number displays. . The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, label side up. The player pulls it in or upside down. Z CD (Eject): Press and release and the CD should begin playing to eject the disc that is currently . The air is very humid. If so, wait (loading a disc into the system, playing. The disc ejects from the about an hour and try again. depending on media type and bottom slot. A beep sounds and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Ejecting Disc displays. Once the for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for disc is ejected, Remove Disc a DVD to begin playing). displays. The disc can be removed. Infotainment System 7-15

If the disc is not removed, If either arrow is held, or pressed BAND: Press to listen to the radio after several seconds, the disc multiple times, the player continues when a CD or DVD is playing. automatically pulls back into the moving backward or forward The CD or DVD remains inside player. through the tracks on the CD. the radio for future listening or Z DVD (Eject): Press and s REV (Fast Reverse): Press for viewing entertainment. release to eject the disc that is and hold to reverse playback quickly DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press currently playing in the top slot. within a track. Sound will be heard to select between DVD, CD, A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc at a reduced volume. Release to or Auxiliary. displays. resume playing the track. The . If an auxiliary input device is elapsed time of the track displays. If loading and reading of a disc not connected, “No Aux Input cannot be completed, and the disc \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Device” displays. and hold to advance playback fails to eject, press and hold Z . When a disc is in either slot, the DVD for more than five seconds to quickly within a track. Sound will be DVD/CD text tab and a message force the disc to eject. heard at a reduced volume. Release showing the track or chapter f to resume playing the track. The number displays. (Tune): Turn to select tracks on elapsed time of the track displays. the CD that is currently playing. . If an auxiliary input device is not RDM (Random): CD tracks can be © SEEK ¨ : Press © to go connected, and a disc is in both listened to in random, rather than the DVD slot and the CD slot the to the start of the current track if sequential order with the random the track has played more than DVD/CD AUX button only cycles setting. To use random, press the between the two sources and five seconds. If the track has played softkey under the RDM tab until does not indicate “No Aux Input less than five seconds the previous Random Current Disc displays. Device”. track will play. Press the softkey again to turn off . If a front auxiliary input device is Press to go to the next track. random play. ¨ connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options. 7-16 Infotainment System

If a disc is inserted into the top DVD damaged, such as cracked, broken, Notice: If a label is added to a slot, the rear seat operator can turn or scratched, the CD does not play CD, or more than one CD is on the video screen and use the properly or not at all. Do not touch inserted into the slot at a time, remote control to only navigate the the bottom side of a CD while or an attempt is made to play CD tracks through the remote handling it; this could damage the scratched or damaged CDs, the control. surface. Pick up CDs by grasping CD player could be damaged. the outer edges or the edge of the While using the CD player, use See “Using the Auxiliary Input hole and the outer edge. only CDs in good condition Jack(s)” later in this section, without any label, load one CD at or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, If the surface of a CD is soiled, take Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of System on page 7‑36 for more clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral information. detergent solution mixed with water, foreign materials, liquids, and and clean it. Make sure the wiping debris. Care of CDs and DVDs process starts from the center to If an error displays, see “CD If playing a CD-R, the sound quality the edge. Messages” later in this section. can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of Care of the CD and DVD Player Radios with CD and DVD recording, the quality of the music Do not add any label to a CD, it Audio Output that has been recorded, and the could get caught in the CD or DVD Only one audio source can be way the CD-R or CD-RW has been player. If a CD is recorded on a heard through the speakers at handled. Handle them carefully. personal computer and a description one time. An audio source is Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their label is needed, try labeling the defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM, original cases or other protective top of the recorded CD with a FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, cases and away from direct sunlight marking pen. or Rear Auxiliary Jack. and dust. The CD or DVD player The use of CD lens cleaners for scans the bottom surface of the CDs is not advised. disc. If the surface of a CD is Infotainment System 7-17

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, Press O to turn the radio on. Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or or upside down. The radio can be heard through CD-RW Disc . all of the vehicle speakers. The radio has the capability of The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. Front seat passengers can listen playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by CD-RW disc. For more information . There could have been a pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R problem while burning the CD. or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or . The label could be caught in the rear auxiliary input (if available). with CD and Radio with CD/USB) CD player. on page 7 22 or MP3 (Radio with If a playback device is plugged into ‑ CD/DVD) on page 7‑28. If the CD is not playing correctly for the radio’s front auxiliary input jack any other reason, try a known or the rear auxiliary jack, the front CD Messages good CD. seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this source through Optical Error: The disc was If any error occurs repeatedly or inserted upside down. the vehicle speakers. See “Using if an error cannot be corrected, the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later Disk Read Error: A disc was contact your dealer/retailer. If the in this section, or “Audio/Video inserted with an invalid or unknown radio displays an error message, (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat format. write it down and provide it to your Entertainment (RSE) System on dealer/retailer when reporting the Player Error: There are disc LOAD problem. page 7‑36 for more information. or disc EJECT problems. In some vehicles, depending on . It is very hot. When the audio options, the rear speakers temperature returns to normal, can be muted when the RSA power the CD should play. is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) System on page 7‑44 for . The road is very rough. When more information. the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. 7-18 Infotainment System

Using the DVD Player Playing a DVD s REV (Fast Reverse): Press The DVD player can be controlled f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on to quickly reverse the DVD at by the buttons on the remote a CD or DVD, to manually tune a five times the normal speed. control, the RSA system, or by the radio station, or to change clock The radio displays the elapsed buttons on the radio faceplate. or date settings, while in the clock time while in fast reverse. To stop See “Remote Control”, under Rear or date setting mode. See the fast reversing, press again. This Seat Entertainment (RSE) System information given earlier in this button may not work when the DVD on page 7‑36 and Rear Seat Audio section specific to the radio, CD, is playing the copyright information (RSA) System on page 7‑44 for and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the or the previews. more information. Clock” in the index, for setting the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press clock and date. The DVD player is only compatible to fast forward the DVD. The radio with DVDs of the appropriate region © SEEK (Previous Track/ displays the elapsed time and fast code that is printed on the jacket of Chapter): Press to return to forwards five times the normal most DVDs. the start of the current track or speed. To stop fast forwarding, chapter. Press © again to go to press again. This button may not The DVD slot of the radio is work when the DVD is playing the previous track or chapter. This compatible with most audio CDs, the copyright information or the button may not work when the DVD CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, previews. DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, is playing the copyright information DVD+R/RW media along with or the previews. MP3 and WMA formats. SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): If an error message displays on the Press to go to the next track or video screen or the radio, see “DVD chapter. This button may not work Display Error Messages” under, when the DVD is playing the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) copyright information or the System on page 7‑36 and “DVD previews. Radio Error Messages” in this section for more information. Infotainment System 7-19

Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either c (Stop): Press to stop playing, If the DVD is ejected, but not the play or pause icon displayed on rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. removed, the player automatically the radio system, to toggle between r (Enter): Press to select the pulls it back in after 15 seconds. pausing or restarting playback of choices that are highlighted in If loading and reading of a DVD a DVD. any menu. . cannot be completed, because of If the forward arrow is showing y (Menu): Press to access the an unknown format, etc., and the on display, the system is in DVD menu. The DVD menu is disc fails to eject, press and hold pause mode. different on every DVD. Use the for more than five seconds to force . If the pause icon is showing softkeys under the navigation the disc to eject. on display, the system is in arrows to navigate the cursor DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons playback mode. through the DVD menu. After making a selection press this Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio . If the DVD screen is off, press the play button to turn the button. This button only operates display menu shows several icons. when using a DVD. Press the softkeys under any icon screen on. during DVD playback. See the icon Some DVDs begin playing after the Nav (Navigate): Press to display list below for more information. previews have finished, although directional arrows for navigating through the menus. The rear seat passenger can there could be a delay of up to navigate the DVD-V menus and 30 seconds. If the DVD does q (Return): Press to exit the controls through the remote control. not begin playing the movie current active menu and return to See “Remote Control”, under Rear automatically, press the softkey the previous menu. This button Seat Entertainment (RSE) System under the play/pause icon displayed operates only when a DVD is on page 7‑36 for more information. on the radio. If the DVD still does playing and a menu is active. The Video Screen automatically not play, refer to the on-screen turns on when the DVD-V is instructions, if available. inserted into the DVD slot. 7-20 Infotainment System

DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons r / j (Play/Pause): Press either Inserting a Disc Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio the play or pause icon displayed on To play a disc, gently insert the disc, display menu shows several icons. the radio system, to toggle between with the label side up, into the Press the softkeys under any icon pausing or restarting playback of loading slot. The DVD player might during DVD playback. See the icon a DVD. not accept some paper labeled list below for more information. . If the forward arrow is showing media. The player starts loading the The rear seat operator can on display, the system is in disc into the system and shows navigate the DVD-A menus and pause mode. “Loading Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio displays controls through the remote control. . If the pause icon is showing a softkey menu of option(s). Some See “Remote Control”, under Rear on display, the system is in Seat Entertainment (RSE) System discs automatically play the movie playback mode. while others default to the softkey on page 7‑36 for more information. The Video Screen does not q Group r : Press to cycle menu display, which requires the automatically power on when the through musical groupings on the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. DVD-A disc. to be pressed; either by the softkey on the radio or by the rear seat It must be manually turned on by Nav (Navigate): Press to display passenger using the remote control. the rear seat occupant through the directional arrows for navigating remote control power button. through the menus. It may take up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing. e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video screen shows the audio stream changing. Infotainment System 7-21

Stopping and Resuming Playback The DVD should resume play from DVD Error Messages where it last stopped if the disc To stop playing a DVD without Player Error: This message has not been ejected and the stop turning off the system, do one of the displays when there are disc load or button has not been pressed twice following: eject problems. on the remote control. If the disc . Press c on the remote control. has been ejected or the stop button Disc Format Error: This message has been pressed twice on the displays, if the disc is inserted with . Press the softkey under the remote control, the disc resumes the disc label wrong side up, or if stop or the play/pause icons playing at the beginning of the disc. the disc is damaged. displayed on the radio. Ejecting a Disc Disc Region Error: This message . If the radio head is sourced to displays, if the disc is not from a something other than DVD-V, Press Z DVD on the radio to eject correct region. press the DVD/CD AUX button the disc. If a disc is ejected from the No Disc Inserted: This message to make DVD-V the active radio, but not removed, the radio source. displays, if no disc is present reloads the disc after a short period Z To resume DVD playback, do one of of time. The disc is stored in the when DVD or DVD/CD AUX the following: radio. The radio does not resume is pressed on the radio. play of the disc automatically. If the . Press r / j on the remote movie is reloaded and the RSA control. system is sourced to the DVD, . Press the softkey under the the player begins to play again. play/pause icon displayed on If loading and reading a DVD or the radio. CD cannot be completed, and the disc fails to eject, press and hold Z DVD for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. 7-22 Infotainment System

MP3 (Radio with CD and Compressed Audio or Mixed USB Supported File and Folder Radio with CD/USB) Mode Discs Structure The radio can play discs that The radio supports: Format contain both uncompressed CD . Up to 700 folders. Radios that have the capability of audio and MP3/WMA files. If both . Up to 8 folders in depth. playing MP3s can play.mp3 or .wma formats are on the disc, the radio files that were recorded onto a plays both file formats in the order . Up to 65,535 files. CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can in which they were recorded to the disc. . Folder and file names up to be recorded with the following fixed 64 bytes. bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, CD R or CD RW Supported File ‐ ‐ . 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, and Folder Structure Files with an .mp3 or .wma file 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, extension. The radio supports: 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and . AAC files stored on an iPod. 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. . Up to 50 folders. . FAT16 Radios that have a USB port can . Up to 8 folders in depth. play.mp3 and .wma files that are . FAT32 . Up to 15 playlists. stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on . Up to 512 files and folders. ® an iPod . . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension. Infotainment System 7-23

Root Directory Tracks are played in the following File System and Naming The root directory of the disc is order: The song name that displays is the treated as a folder. If the root . Play begins from the first track in song name that is contained in the directory has compressed audio the first playlist and continues ID3 tag. If the song name is not files, the directory displays on the sequentially through all tracks present in the ID3 tag, then the radio as the CD label. in each playlist. When the last radio displays the file name without If a disc contains both track of the last playlist has the extension (such as .mp3) as the uncompressed CD audio and played, play continues from the track name. MP3/WMA files, a folder under first track of the first playlist. Track names longer than the root directory called CD . Play begins from the first track 32 characters or four pages are accesses all of the CD audio in the first folder and continues shortened. Parts of words on the tracks on the disc. sequentially through all tracks in last page of text and the extension each folder. When the last track of the filename does not display. Empty Folder of the last folder has played, Folders that do not contain files are play continues from the first Preprogrammed Playlists skipped, and the player advances to track of the first folder. Preprogrammed playlists that the next folder that contains files. When play enters a new folder, the were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ Order of Play display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the software can be accessed, however, Compressed audio files are folder mode has been chosen as they cannot be edited using the accessed in the following order: the default display. The new track radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing . Playlists (Px). name displays. compressed audio song files. . Files stored in the root directory. Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls . Files stored in folders in the root file extension and are stored on a directory. USB device may be supported by the radio with a USB port. 7-24 Infotainment System

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 S c (Previous Folder): Press When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files in order by f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA the softkey below S c to go to the artist. The current artist playing is files. first track in the previous folder. shown on the second line of the © SEEK: Press to go to the c T (Next Folder): Press the display. Once all songs by that artist start of the track, if more than softkey below c T to go to the first are played, the player moves to the ten seconds have played. Press track in the next folder. next artist in alphabetical order and and hold or press multiple times to begins playing files by that artist. continue moving backward through RDM (Random): Files on the To listen to files by another artist, tracks. disc can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To use press the softkey located below ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next random, press the softkey under the either arrow tab. The disc goes track. Press and hold or press RDM tab until Random Current Disc to the next or previous artist in multiple times to continue moving displays to play songs in random alphabetical order. Continue forward through tracks. order. Press the same softkey again pressing either softkey below the s REV (Reverse): Press and to turn off random play. arrow tab until the artist displays. hold to reverse playback quickly. h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to Sound is heard at a reduced volume playback by album: softkey below h to play files in and the elapsed time of the file order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey located below displays. Release s REV to the Sort By tab. resume playing. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press one of the softkeys below \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press information. It can take several the album tab from the sort and hold to advance playback minutes to scan the disc depending screen. quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the volume and the elapsed time of the The radio may begin playing while it \ back tab to return to the main file displays. Release FWD to is scanning in the background. music navigator screen. resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. Infotainment System 7-25

The album name displays on the end to the USB port located in the Using the Radio to Control a second line between the arrows center console. If the vehicle is on USB Storage Device or iPod and songs from the current album and the USB connection works, The radio can control a USB begins to play. Once all songs from “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo that album have played, the player may appear on the iPod and iPod storage device or an iPod using the moves to the next album in appears on the radio's display. The radio buttons and knobs and display song information on the radio s alphabetical order on the CD and iPod music appears on the radio’s ’ begins playing MP3 files from that display and begins playing. display. f album. The iPod charges while it is (Tune): Turn to select files. To exit music navigator mode, press connected to the vehicle if the © SEEK: Press to go to the the softkey below the Back tab to vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY start of the track, if more than return to normal MP3 playback. or ON/RUN position. When the ten seconds have played. Press vehicle is turned off, the iPod and hold or press multiple times to Connecting a USB Storage ® automatically powers off and will continue moving backward through Device or iPod not charge or draw power from the tracks. vehicle's battery. The USB Port can be used to ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next control an iPod or a USB storage If you have an older iPod model that track. Press and hold or press device. is not supported, it can still be used multiple times to continue moving To connect a USB storage device, by connecting it to the Auxiliary forward through tracks. Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm connect the device to the USB port s REV (Reverse): Press and (1/8 in) stereo cable. See Using the located in the center console. “ hold to reverse playback quickly. Auxiliary Input Jack earlier for more ” Sound is heard at a reduced To connect an iPod, connect one information. end of the USB cable that came volume. Release s REV to with the iPod to the iPod’s dock resume playing. The elapsed connector and connect the other time of the file displays. 7-26 Infotainment System

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey 4. Turn f to scroll through the files and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. in the selected folder. quickly. Sound is heard at a The tab appears raised when pause 5. Press f to select the file to be reduced volume. Release \ FWD is being used. Press the softkey played. to resume playing. The elapsed time below j again to resume playback. of the file displays. To skip through large lists, the five Back: Press the softkey below the softkeys can be used to navigate in 4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main the following order: additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the selected track. root directory on a USB storage . First softkey, first item in the list. Using Softkeys to Control a device. . Second softkey, 1% through the USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the list each time the softkey is pressed. The five softkeys below the radio softkey below c to view the . display are used to control the contents of the current folder on Third softkey, 5% through the list functions listed below. the USB drive. To browse and each time the softkey is pressed. select files: . To use the softkeys: Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the softkey is 1. Press the softkey below c . 1. Press the first or fifth softkey pressed. below the radio display to f 2. Turn to scroll through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. display the functions listed of folders. below, or press the softkey below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the folder. currently displayed. If there is more than one folder, 2. Press the softkey below the tab repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the with the function on it to use that folder is reached. function. Infotainment System 7-27 h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the five ' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in softkey below to repeat one the following order: ' select a file on an iPod, using the track. The tab appears raised when iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. Repeat Track is being used. sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through the Shuffle Functionality . Playlists list each time the softkey is pressed. To use Shuffle: . Artists . Third softkey, 5% through the list Press the softkey below > , . Albums each time the softkey is pressed. 2 , < or = to select . Genres between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All . Fourth softkey, 10% through the Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle . Songs list each time the softkey is Album, or Shuffle Folder. . Composers pressed. (Shuffle Off): This is the . Fifth softkey, end of the list. > To select files: default mode when a USB storage Repeat Functionality device or iPod is first connected. 1. Press the softkey below h . To use Repeat: 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle 2. Turn f to scroll through the list Songs): Shuffles all songs on the of menus. Press the softkey below " or ' USB storage device or iPod. to select between Repeat All and 3. Press f to select the menu. Repeat Track. < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all songs in the current album on 4. Turn f to scroll through " (Repeat All): Press the softkey an iPod. the folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all selected menu. = tab appears lowered when Repeat songs in the current folder on a USB All is being used. This is the default 5. Press f to select the file to be storage device. mode when a USB storage device played. or iPod is first connected. 7-28 Infotainment System

MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) The CD Player reads both The CD Player supports: uncompressed audio and MP3/ . Up to 512 files and folders. Format WMA files on a mixed mode disc. . Up to 8 folders in depth. The radio can play.mp3 or .wma Uncompressd audio is played files that were recorded onto a before MP3/WMA files. Press the . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl CD-R or CD-RW disc. CAT (category) button to toggle extension. between uncompressed audio and The USB port can play MP3/WMA files. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda .mp3 and .wma files that are file extension. CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File stored on a USB storage device USB Supported File and Folder as well as AAC files that are and Folder Structure ® Structure stored on an iPod . The DVD Player supports: The radio supports: Compressed Audio or Mixed . Up to 255 folders. Mode Discs . Up to 700 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. The radio plays discs that contain . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 15 playlists. both uncompressed CD audio and . Up to 65,535 files. MP3/WMA files depending on which . Up to 40 sessions. . slot the disc is loaded into. Folder and file names up to . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl 64 bytes. The DVD Player only reads extension. . uncompressed audio and ignores Files with an .mp3 or .wma file . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda extension. MP3/WMA files on a mixed file extension. mode disc. . AAC files stored on an iPod. . FAT16 . FAT32 Infotainment System 7-29

Root Directory When the disc contains only . Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues The root directory of the disc is playlists and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are sequentially through all tracks in treated as a folder. If the root each folder. When the last track directory has compressed audio located under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up of the last folder has played, files, the directory displays as play continues from the first F1 ROOT on the radio. buttons search playlists first and then goes to the root folder. When track of the first folder. If a disc contains both the radio displays the name of the When play enters a new folder, the uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ folder the radio displays ROOT. display does not automatically show WMA files, a folder under the root Order of Play the new folder name unless the directory called CD accesses all of folder mode has been chosen as the CD audio tracks on the disc. Compressed audio files are the default display. The new track Empty Folder accessed in the following order: name displays. . Folders that do not contain files are Playlists. File System and Naming skipped, and the player advances to . Files stored in the root directory. The song name that displays is the the next folder that contains files. . Files stored in folders in the root song name that is contained in the No Folder directory. ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the Tracks are played in the following When the disc contains only radio displays the file name without order: compressed files, the files are the extension (such as .mp3) as the located under the root folder. The . Play begins from the first track in track name. next and previous folder function the first playlist and continues Track names longer than does not function on a disc that was sequentially through all tracks 32 characters or four pages are recorded without folders or playlists. in each playlist. When the last shortened. Parts of words on the When displaying the name of the track of the last playlist has last page of text and the extension folder the radio displays ROOT. played, play continues from the of the filename does not display. first track of the first playlist. 7-30 Infotainment System

Preprogrammed Playlists © SEEK: Press to go to the S c (Previous Folder): Press Preprogrammed playlists that start of the track, if more than the softkey below S c to go to the were created using WinAmp™, five seconds have played. Press to first track in the previous folder. MusicMatch , or Real Jukebox go to the previous track if more then ™ ™ c T (Next Folder): Press the software can be accessed, however, five seconds have played. Press they cannot be edited using the and hold or press multiple times to softkey below c T to go to the first radio. These playlists are treated continue moving backward through track in the next folder. tracks. as special folders containing RDM (Random): Files on the disc compressed audio song files. ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next can be listened to in random, rather Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls track. Press and hold or press than sequential order. To use file extension and are stored on a multiple times to continue moving random, press the softkey under the USB device may be supported by forward through tracks. RDM tab until Random Current Disc the radio with a USB port. s REV (Reverse): Press and displays to play songs in random hold to reverse playback quickly. order. Press the same softkey again Playing an MP3/WMA File to turn off random play. From a Disc (In Either the DVD Sound is heard at a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the file h (Music Navigator): Press the or CD Slot) displays. Release s REV to softkey below h to play files in If a disc is inserted into the top DVD resume playing. order by artist or album. slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The player scans the disc to sort the remote control to navigate the CD and hold to advance playback files by artist and album ID3 tag (tracks only). quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced information. It can take several volume and the elapsed time of the minutes to scan the disc depending f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA file displays. Release \ FWD to on the number of files on the disc. files. resume playing. The elapsed time The radio may begin playing while it of the file displays. is scanning in the background. Infotainment System 7-31

When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the end to the USB port located in the begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows center console. If the vehicle is on artist. The current artist playing is and songs from the current album and the USB connection works, shown on the second line of the begins to play. Once all songs from “OK to disconnect” and a GM logo display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player may appear on the iPod and iPod are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in appears on the radio's display. The next artist in alphabetical order and alphabetical order on the CD and iPod music appears on the radio’s begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3 files from that display and begins playing. To listen to files by another artist, album. The iPod charges while it is press the softkey located below To exit music navigator mode, press connected to the vehicle if the either arrow tab. The disc goes the softkey below the Back tab to vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY to the next or previous artist in return to normal MP3 playback. or ON/RUN position. When the alphabetical order. Continue vehicle is turned off, the iPod Connecting a USB Storage pressing either softkey below the ® automatically powers off and will arrow tab until the artist displays. Device or iPod not charge or draw power from the To change from playback by artist to The USB Port can be used to vehicle's battery. playback by album: control an iPod or a USB storage If you have an older iPod model that device. 1. Press the softkey located below is not supported, it can still be used the Sort By tab. To connect a USB storage device, by connecting it to the Auxiliary connect the device to the USB port Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm 2. Press one of the softkeys below located in the center console. (1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the the album tab from the sort Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more screen. To connect an iPod, connect one information. end of the USB cable that came 3. Press the softkey below the with the iPod to the iPod’s dock back tab to return to the main connector and connect the other music navigator screen. 7-32 Infotainment System

Using the Radio to Control a \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press j (Pause): Press the softkey USB Storage Device or iPod and hold to advance playback below j to pause the track. The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced The tab appears raised when pause storage device or an iPod using volume. Release \ FWD to is being used. Press the softkey the radio buttons and knobs and resume playing. The elapsed below j again to resume playback. display song information on the time of the file displays. Back: Press the softkey below the radio’s display. 4 (Information): Press to display back tab to go back to the main f (Tune): Turn to select files. additional information about the display screen on an iPod, or the selected track. © SEEK: Press to go to the root directory on a USB storage start of the track, if more than Using Softkeys to Control a device. ten seconds have played. Press USB Storage Device or iPod c (Folder View): Press the and hold or press multiple times to softkey below c to view the continue moving backward through The five softkeys below the radio contents of the current folder on tracks. display are used to control the functions listed below. the USB drive. To browse and ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next select files: To use the softkeys: track. Press and hold or press c multiple times to continue moving 1. Press the first or fifth softkey 1. Press the softkey below . forward through tracks. below the radio display to 2. Turn f to scroll through the list s REV (Reverse): Press and display the functions listed of folders. hold to reverse playback quickly. below, or press the softkey Sound is heard at a reduced below the function if it is 3. Press f to select the folder. currently displayed. volume. Release s REV to If there is more than one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the resume playing. The elapsed 2. Press the softkey below the tab folder is reached. time of the file displays. with the function on it to use that function. Infotainment System 7-33

4. Turn f to scroll through the files h (Music Navigator): Press the To skip through large lists, the five in the selected folder. softkey below h to view and softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: 5. Press f to select the file to be select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's menu system. Files are . First softkey, first item in the list. played. sorted by: . Second softkey, 1% through To skip through large lists, the five . Playlists the list each time the softkey is softkeys can be used to navigate in pressed. the following order: . Artists . Third softkey, 5% through the list . . Albums First softkey, first item in the list. each time the softkey is pressed. . . Genres Second softkey, 1% through the . Fourth softkey, 10% through list each time the softkey is . Songs the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Composers pressed. . Third softkey, 5% through the list . Fifth softkey, end of the list. each time the softkey is pressed. To select files: Repeat Functionality . Fourth softkey, 10% through the 1. Press the softkey below h . list each time the softkey is f To use Repeat: pressed. 2. Turn to scroll through the list of menus. Press the softkey below " or ' . Fifth softkey, end of the list. to select between Repeat All and 3. Press f to select the menu. Repeat Track. 4. Turn f to scroll through " (Repeat All): Press the softkey the folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The selected menu. tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default 5. Press f to select the file to be mode when a USB storage device played. or iPod is first connected. 7-34 Infotainment System

' (Repeat Track): Press the Auxiliary Devices To use an auxiliary input device, softkey below to repeat one connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to ' The vehicle may have a 3.5 mm the radio's front auxiliary input jack. track. The tab appears raised when (1/8 in) auxiliary input jack located Repeat Track is being used. on the lower right side of the O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to Shuffle Functionality faceplate and for vehicles with a USB port, it is located in the center increase or decrease the volume To use Shuffle: console. of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments might have to Press the softkey below > , 2, Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) be made from the portable device < or = to select between Auxiliary Input Jack if the volume is not loud or soft Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ enough. Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, The auxiliary input jack is located on or Shuffle Folder. the lower right side of the faceplate. BAND: Press to listen to the radio This is not an audio output; do not when a portable audio device is > (Shuffle Off): This is the plug a headphone set into the front playing. The portable audio device default mode when a USB storage auxiliary input jack. Connect an continues playing, so you might device or iPod is first connected. auxiliary input device such as an want to stop it or turn it off. ® 2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle iPod , laptop computer, MP3 player, CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Songs): Shuffles all songs on the CD player, or cassette tape player, select between CD, or Auxiliary. USB storage device or iPod. etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio . When a CD is in the player < (Shuffle Album): Shuffles listening. the CD icon and a message all songs in the current album on showing the disc and/or track an iPod. Drivers are encouraged to number displays. set up any auxiliary device = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all while the vehicle is in P (Park). See . If an auxiliary input device is not songs in the current folder on a USB Defensive Driving on page 9‑2 connected, “No Input Device storage device. for more information on driver Found” displays. distraction. Infotainment System 7-35

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press remote control to only navigate the USB Supported Devices to select between DVD, CD, CD tracks through the remote . USB Flash Drives or Auxiliary. control. . Portable USB Hard Drives . If an auxiliary input device is See “Using the Auxiliary Input not connected, “No Aux Input Jack(s)” later in this section, . Fifth generation or later iPod Device” displays. or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, . iPod nanos Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) . When a disc is in either slot, the . iPod touch DVD/CD text tab and a message System on page 7‑36 for more showing the track or chapter information. . iPod classic number displays. Using the USB Port Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the USB port. . If an auxiliary input device is not For vehicles with a USB port, the connected, and a disc is in both connector is located in the center Make sure the iPod has the latest the DVD slot and the CD slot the console. firmware from Apple® for proper DVD/CD AUX button only cycles operation. iPod firmware can be Radios with a USB port can control ® between the two sources and updated using the latest iTunes a USB storage device or an iPod® does not indicate “No Aux Input application. See www.apple.com/ using the radio buttons and knobs. Device”. itunes. See MP3 (Radio with CD and Radio . If a front auxiliary input device is with CD/USB) on page 7‑22 or For help with identifying your iPod, connected, the DVD/CD AUX MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) on go to www.apple.com/support. button cycles through all page 7‑28 for information about available options. how to connect and control a USB If a disc is inserted into top DVD storage device or an iPod. slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the 7-36 Infotainment System

Rear Seat In severe or extreme weather Headphones conditions the RSE system might or The RSE includes two 2-channel Infotainment might not work until the temperature wireless headphones that are is within the operating range. The dedicated to this system. Channel 1 operating range for the RSE system Rear Seat Entertainment is dedicated to the video screen, is above −4°F (−20°C) or below while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA (RSE) System 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of selections. These headphones are The vehicle may have a DVD Rear the vehicle is outside of this range, used to listen to media such as Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. heat or cool the vehicle until the CDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, The RSE system works with the temperature is within the operating radio, any auxiliary source vehicle's audio system. The DVD range of the RSE system. connected to A/V jacks, or the player is part of the front radio. The auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle RSE system includes a radio with a Parental Control has this feature. The wireless DVD player, a video display screen, The RSE system may have a headphones have an On/Off button, audio/video jacks, two wireless Parental Control feature, depending channel 1/2 switch, and a volume headphones, and a remote control. on the radio. To enable Parental control. Switch the headphones to See Operation on page 7 2 for ‑ Control, press and hold the radio Off when not in use. more information on the vehicle's power button for more than audio/DVD system. two seconds to stop all system Push the power button to turn on features such as: radio, video the headphones. An indicator light Before Driving screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While located on the headphones comes The RSE is designed for rear seat Parental Control is on, Q displays. on. If the light does not come on, passengers only. The driver cannot the batteries might need to be safely view the video screen while When the radio is turned back on, replaced. Intermittent sound or driving and should not try to do so. Parental Control is unlocked. static on the headphones can also be an indication of weak batteries. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more information. Infotainment System 7-37

The headphones may automatically ear. The symbol R (Right) appears Battery Replacement turn off after four hours of on the upper right side, above the To change the batteries on the continuous use. ear pad and should be positioned headphones: on the right ear. To adjust the volume on the 1. Turn the screw to loosen the headphones, use the volume control Notice: Do not store the battery door located on the left located on the right side. headphones in heat or direct side of the headphones. Slide Infrared transmitters are located sunlight. This could damage the battery door open. the headphones and repairs will at the rear of the RSE overhead 2. Replace the two batteries in the console. The headphones shut off not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme cold can compartment. Make sure that automatically to save the battery they are installed correctly, using power if the RSE system and RSA weaken the batteries. Keep the headphones stored in a cool, the diagram on the inside of the are shut off or if the headphones are battery compartment. out of range of the transmitters for dry place. more than three minutes. Moving too If the foam ear pads attached to 3. Replace the battery door and far forward or stepping out of the the headphones become worn or tighten the door screw. vehicle, can cause the headphones damaged, the pads can be replaced If the headphones are to be stored to lose the audio signal. separately from the headphone set. for a long period of time, remove the For optimal audio performance, the See your dealer/retailer for more batteries and keep them in a cool, headphones must be worn correctly. information. dry place. Headphones should be worn with Headphones should be stored in the the headband over the top of the front floor console and not in the head for best audio reception. front seat back pocket. Headphone The symbol L (Left) appears on the damage can occur when the second upper left side, above the ear pad row seats are folded forward. and should be positioned on the left 7-38 Infotainment System

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks are color coded to How to Change the RSE Video match typical home entertainment Screen Settings system equipment. The yellow The screen display mode (normal, jack (A) is for the video input. full, and zoom), screen brightness, The white jack (B) is for the left and setup menu language can be audio input. The red jack (C) is changed from the on screen setup for the right audio input. menu by using the remote control. Power for auxiliary devices is not To change a setting: supplied by the radio system. 1. Press z . To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external 2. Use n , q , p , o and r to auxiliary device to the color-coded navigate and use the A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary setup menu. device and the video screen power z The A/V jacks, located on the rear on. If the video screen is in the DVD 3. Press again to remove the of the floor console, allow audio player mode, pressing the AUX setup menu from the screen. or video signals to be connected (auxiliary) button on the remote Audio Output from an auxiliary device such as control, switches the video screen a camcorder or a video game from the DVD player mode to the Audio from the DVD player or unit to the RSE system. Adapter auxiliary device. The radio can listen auxiliary inputs can be heard connectors or cables (not supplied) to the audio of the connected through the following sources: might be required to connect the auxiliary device by sourcing to . Wireless Headphones auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. auxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices on Refer to the manufacturer s . ’ page 7‑34 for more information. Vehicle Speakers instructions for proper usage. . Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system, if the vehicle has this feature. Infotainment System 7-39

The RSE system always transmits Video Screen Notice: Avoid directly touching the audio signal to the wireless the video screen, as damage may The video screen is located in the headphones, if there is audio occur. See Cleaning the Video overhead console. When the video “ available. See Headphones earlier Screen later in this section for “ ” screen is not in use, push it up into ” in this section for more information. more information. its locked position. The DVD player is capable of To use the video screen: Remote Control outputting audio to the wired headphone jacks on the RSA 1. Push the release button located To use the remote control, aim it at system, if the vehicle has this on the overhead console. the transmitter window at the rear of feature. The DVD player can be the overhead console and press the 2. Move the screen to the desired desired button. Direct sunlight or selected as an audio source on the position. RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio very bright light could affect the (RSA) System on page 7‑44 for If a DVD is playing and the screen ability of the RSE transmitter to more information. is raised to its locked position, the receive signals from the remote screen remains on; this is normal, control. If the remote control does When a device is connected to the and the DVD continues to play not seem to be working, the A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary through the previous audio source. batteries might need to be replaced. input jack, if the vehicle has this P See “Battery Replacement” later in feature, the rear seat passengers Press on the remote control or eject the disc to turn off the screen. this section. Objects blocking the are able to hear audio from the line of sight could also affect the auxiliary device through the wireless The infrared receivers for the function of the remote control. or wired headphones. The front seat wireless headphones and the passengers are able to listen to remote control are located at the playback from this device through rear of the overhead console. the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio. 7-40 Infotainment System

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD v (Title): Press to return the DVD c (Stop): Press to stop playing, slot, the remote control O button to the main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a can be used to turn on the video function could vary for each disc. DVD. Press twice to return to screen display and start the disc. y (Main Menu): Press to access the beginning of the DVD. The radio can also turn on the video the DVD menu. The DVD menu is s (Play/Pause): Press to start screen display. See Operation on different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press while a DVD page 7‑2 for more information. navigation arrows to move the is playing to pause it. Press again Notice: Storing the remote cursor around the DVD menu. After to continue playing the DVD. control in a hot area or in direct making a selection press the enter When the DVD is playing, sunlight can damage it, and the button. This button only operates depending on the radio, play repairs will not be covered by the when using a DVD. may be slowed down by warranty. Storage in extreme cold n , q, p, o (Menu Navigation s [ can weaken the batteries. Keep pressing then . The DVD Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to continues playing in a slow play the remote control stored in a navigate through a menu. cool, dry place. mode. Depending on the radio, r (Enter): Press to select the perform reverse slow play by Remote Control Buttons choice that is highlighted in pressing s then r . To cancel O (Power): Press to turn the any menu. slow play mode, press s again. video screen on and off. z (Display Menu): Press to adjust t (Previous Track/Chapter): the brightness, screen display mode P (Illumination): Press to turn the Press to return to the start of the (normal, full, or zoom), and display remote control backlight on. The current track or chapter. Press again the language menu. backlight automatically times out to go to the previous track or after seven to ten seconds if no q (Return): Press to exit the chapter. This button might not work other button is pressed while the current active menu and return to when the DVD is playing the backlight is on. the previous menu. This button copyright information or the operates only when the display previews. menu or a DVD menu is active. Infotainment System 7-41 u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to e (Audio): Press to change audio 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): go to the beginning of the next tracks on DVDs that have this The numeric keypad provides the chapter or track. This button might feature when the DVD is playing. capability of direct chapter or track not work when the DVD is playing The format and content of this number selection. the copyright information or the function vary for each disc. \ (Clear): Press within previews. { (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/ three seconds after entering a r (Fast Reverse): Press to OFF subtitles and to move through numeric selection, to clear all quickly reverse the DVD or CD. subtitle options when a DVD is numerical inputs. To stop fast reversing a DVD video, playing. The format and content of } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press press s . To stop fast reversing this function vary for each disc. to select chapter or track numbers a DVD audio or CD, release r . AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch greater than nine. Press this button This button might not work when the system between the DVD player before entering the number. the DVD is playing the copyright and an auxiliary source. If the remote control becomes lost information or the previews. d (Camera): Press to change or damaged, a new universal [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast camera angles on DVDs that have remote control can be purchased. forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast this feature when a DVD is playing. If this happens, make sure the The format and content of this universal remote control uses a forwarding a DVD video, press s . ® function vary for each disc. Toshiba code set. To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release [ . This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. 7-42 Infotainment System

Battery Replacement Tips and Troubleshooting Chart To change the remote control Problem Recommended Action batteries: No power. The ignition might not be turned 1. Slide the rear cover back, on the ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. remote control. The picture does not fill the screen. Check the display mode settings in 2. Replace the two batteries in the There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the compartment. Make sure that and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote they are installed correctly, using looks stretched out. control. the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls. connections at both devices. 3. Replace the battery cover. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no If the remote control is to be stored obstruction between the remote for a long period of time, remove the control and the transmitter window. batteries and keep them in a cool, Check the batteries to make sure dry place. they are not dead or installed incorrectly. Infotainment System 7-43

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd) DVD Display Error Messages Problem Recommended Action The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed one has. The video screen might display Play but sometimes the DVD starts time, the DVD player resumes one of the following: where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was beginning. stopped. If the stop button was Disc Load/Eject Error: This pressed two times the DVD player message displays when there are begins to play from the beginning of disc load or eject problems. the DVD. Disc Format Error: This message The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen displays if the disc is inserted with there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode. the disc label wrong side up, or if Check the auxiliary input the disc is damaged. connections at both devices. Disc Region Error: This message Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low displays if the disc is not from a audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, and correct region. interference from cellular telephone No Disc Inserted: This message towers or by using a cellular displays if no disc is present when telephone in the vehicle. the Z EJECT button is pressed on Check that the headphones are the radio. on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for headphones. assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player. 7-44 Infotainment System

DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not included) plugged Video distortion can occur when System into the jacks on the RSA. If the operating cellular phones, scanners, For vehicles with Rear Seat Audio vehicle has this feature, audio can CB radios, Global Position Systems (RSA), rear seat passengers can also be heard on Channel 2 of the (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, listen to and control any of the wireless headphones. or walkie talkies. music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, The audio system mutes the rear It might be necessary to turn off the or other auxiliary sources. The rear speakers when the RSA audio is DVD player when operating one of seat passengers can only control active through the headphones. these devices in or near the vehicle. the music sources the front seat To listen to an iPod or portable *Excludes the OnStar® System. passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual audio device through the RSA, Cleaning the RSE Overhead control is allowed). For example, attach the iPod or portable audio Console rear seat passengers can control device to the front auxiliary input a CD and listen to it through the (if available), located on the front When cleaning the RSE overhead headphones, while the driver listens audio system. Turn the iPod on, console surface, use only a clean to the radio through the front then choose the front auxiliary input cloth dampened with clean water. speakers. The rear seat passengers with the RSA SRCE button. Cleaning the Video Screen have control of the volume for each set of headphones. Use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when The RSA functions operate even directly touching or cleaning the when the main radio is off. The front screen, as damage could result. audio system displays X when the RSA is on, and disappears from the display when it is off. Infotainment System 7-45

While listening to a disc, press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press © to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press © or ¨ to perform a cursor up or down on the P (Power): Press to turn the RSA © ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the menu. Hold © or ¨ to perform a on or off. previous or to the next station and cursor left or right on the menu. stay there. This function is inactive, Volume: Turn to increase or to PROG (Program): Press to go to with some radios, if the front seat decrease the volume of the wired the next preset radio station or passengers are listening to the headphones. The left knob controls channel set on the main radio. radio. the left headphones and the right This function is inactive, with some knob controls the right headphones. Press and hold © or ¨ until radios, if the front seat passengers SRCE (Source): Press to select the display flashes to tune to an are listening to the radio. between the radio (AM/FM/XM™), individual station. The display When a CD or DVD audio disc is CD, and if the vehicle has these stops flashing after the buttons playing, press PROG to go to the features, DVD, front auxiliary, and have not been pushed for more beginning of the CD or DVD audio. rear auxiliary. than two seconds. This function is This function is inactive, with some inactive, with some radios, if the radios, if the front seat passengers front seat passengers are listening are listening to the disc. to the radio. 7-46 Infotainment System

When a disc is playing in the CD x w (Next/Previous): Press the Phone or DVD changer, press PROG to down or up arrows to go to the next select the next disc, if multiple discs or to the previous radio station Bluetooth are loaded. This function is inactive, stored as a favorite. with some radios, if the front seat Vehicles with a Bluetooth system When a CD/DVD is playing, press passengers are listening to the disc. can use a Bluetooth capable cell the down or up arrows to go to the phone with a Hands Free Profile to When a DVD video menu is being next or previous track or chapter. displayed, press PROG to perform make and receive phone calls. The the ENTER menu function. © SEEK ¨ : Press the SEEK system can be used while the key is arrows to go to the previous or to in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY Rear Audio the next radio station while in AM, position. The range of the Bluetooth FM, or XM™, if equipped. Press the system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.). Controller (RAC) SEEK arrows to go to the previous Not all phones support all functions, or to the next track or chapter while and not all phones are guaranteed sourced to a CD or DVD slot. to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth SRCE (Source): Press this button system. See gm.com/bluetooth for to switch between the radio, CD, more information on compatible and if the vehicle has these phones. features, DVD, front auxiliary, Voice Recognition and rear auxiliary. The vehicle may have the Rear > The Bluetooth system uses voice Audio Controller (RAC). Certain (Mute): Press this button to recognition to interpret voice radio functions can be controlled silence the system. Press this commands to dial phone numbers with RAC. button again, or any other radio and name tags. button, to turn the sound on. Noise: Keep interior noise levels to + / − x (Volume): Press the plus or a minimum. The system may not minus volume buttons to increase or recognize voice commands if there to decrease the volume. is too much background noise. Infotainment System 7-47

When to Speak: A short tone Bluetooth Controls Pairing Information: sounds after the system responds Use the buttons located on the . Up to five cell phones can be indicating when it is waiting for a steering wheel to operate the paired to the in‐vehicle Bluetooth voice command. Wait until the tone in vehicle Bluetooth system. system. and then speak. ‐ See Steering Wheel Controls on . The pairing process is disabled How to Speak: Speak clearly in a page 5‑2 for more information. when the vehicle is moving. calm and natural voice. b g (Push To Talk) : Press to . The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system Audio System answer incoming calls, to confirm automatically links with the first system information, and to start available paired cell phone in the When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth speech recognition. system, sound comes through order the phone was paired. the vehicle's front audio system c x (Phone On Hook): Press to . Only one paired cell phone can speakers and overrides the audio end a call, reject a call, or to cancel be connected to the in‐vehicle system. Use the audio system an operation. Bluetooth system at a time. volume knob, during a call, to Pairing . change the volume level. The Pairing should only need to be adjusted volume level remains in A Bluetooth enabled cell phone completed once, unless changes memory for later calls. To prevent must be paired to the in‐vehicle to the pairing information have missed calls, a minimum volume Bluetooth system first and then been made or the phone is level is used if the volume is turned connected to the vehicle before it deleted. down too low. can be used. See the cell phone To link to a different paired phone, manufacturers user guide for see Linking to a Different Phone Bluetooth functions before pairing later in this section. the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner's guide for more information. 7-48 Infotainment System

Pairing a Phone This name will be used to Deleting a Paired Phone indicate which phone is 1. Press and hold b g for connected. The system then 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system confirms the name provided. two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 6. The system responds with by a tone. “ has been 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system successfully paired” after the 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” pairing process is complete. responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. followed by a tone. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds additional phones to be paired. 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks with instructions and a four digit which phone to delete followed PIN number. The PIN number Listing All Paired and Connected by a tone. Phones will be used in Step 4. 4. Say the name of the phone 4. Start the Pairing process on the 1. Press and hold b g for to be deleted. If the phone name cell phone that will be paired to two seconds. The system is unknown, use the “List” the vehicle. Reference the cell responds with “Ready” followed command for a list of all paired phone manufacturers user guide by a tone. phones. The system responds for information on this process. with “Would you like to delete 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system Locate the device named ? Yes or No” responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. “General Motors” in the list on followed by a tone. the cellular phone and follow the 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. instructions on the cell phone to 3. Say “List”. The system lists all The system responds with the paired Bluetooth devices. enter the four digit PIN number “OK, deleting ”. that was provided in Step 3. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the system will say “Is 5. The system prompts for a name connected” after the connected for the phone. Use a name phone. that best describes the phone. Infotainment System 7-49

Linking to a Different Phone Storing Name Tags 3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no The system can store up to thirty 1. Press and hold b g for pauses. two seconds. The system phone numbers as name tags that . responds with “Ready” followed are shared between the Bluetooth If the system recognizes by a tone. and OnStar systems. the number it responds with OK, Storing and repeats The system uses the following “ ” 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system the phone number. responds with “Bluetooth ready” commands to store and retrieve followed by a tone. phone numbers: . If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone . Store 3. Say “Change phone”. The number, it responds with system responds with “Please . Digit Store “Store” and repeats the wait while I search for other . Directory number followed by “Please phones”. say yes or no”. If the . If another phone is found, Using the Store Command number is correct, say the response will be The store command allows a phone “Yes”. If the number is “ is now number to be stored without not correct, say “No”. connected”. entering the digits individually. The system will ask for the number to be re entered. . ‐ If another phone is not 1. Press and hold g for found, the original phone b 4. After the system stores the two seconds. The system remains connected. phone number, it responds with responds with “Ready” followed “Please say the name tag” by a tone. followed by a tone. 2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store, number please” followed by a tone. 7-50 Infotainment System

5. Say a name tag for the phone 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system 5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name tag is responds with “Please say the number. The name tag is recorded and the system first digit to store” followed by recorded and the system responds with “About to store a tone. responds with “About to store . Does that 3. Say the first digit to be stored. . Does that sound OK?”. The system will repeat back the sound OK?”. . If the name tag does not digit it heard followed by a tone. . If the name tag does not sound correct, say “No” Continue entering digits until the sound correct, say “No” and repeat Step 5. number to be stored is complete. and repeat Step 5. . If the name tag sounds . If an unwanted number is . If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and the recognized by the system, correct, say “Yes” and the name tag is stored. After say “Clear” at any time to name tag is stored. After the number is stored the clear the last number. the number is stored the system returns to the system returns to the . To hear all of the numbers main menu. recognized by the system, main menu. Using the Digit Store Command say “Verify” at any time and Using the Directory Command the system will repeat them. The digit store command allows a The directory command lists all of phone number to be stored by 4. After the complete number has the name tags stored by the system. entering the digits individually. been entered, say “Store”. The To use the directory command: system responds with “Please 1. Press and hold b g for say the name tag” followed by 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system a tone. two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. by a tone. Infotainment System 7-51

2. Say “Directory”. The system 2. Say “Delete”. The system Using the Delete All Name Tags responds with “Directory” and responds with “Delete, please Command then plays back all of the stored say the name tag” followed by The delete all name tags command name tags. When the list is a tone. deletes all stored phone book name complete, the system returns to 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. tags and route name tags for the main menu. The system responds with OnStar (if present). Deleting Name Tags “Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”. The system uses the following command: . If the name tag is correct, commands to delete name tags: 1. Press and hold for say “Yes” to delete the b g . Delete name tag. The system two seconds. The system . Delete all name tags responds with “OK, deleting responds with “Ready” followed , returning to by a tone. Using the Delete Command the main menu.” 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The delete command allows specific . If the name tag is incorrect, The system responds with name tags to be deleted. say “No”. The system “You are about to delete all To use the delete command: responds with “No. OK, let's name tags stored in your try again, please say the phone directory and your route 1. Press and hold b g for name tag.” destination directory. Are you two seconds. The system sure you want to do this? Please responds with “Ready” followed say yes or no.” by a tone. . Say “Yes” to delete all name tags. . Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the main menu. 7-52 Infotainment System

Making a Call . If the system does not 4. Continue entering digits until the recognize the number, it number to be dialed is complete. Calls can be made using the confirms the numbers After the whole number has following commands: followed by a tone. If the been entered, say “Dial”. . Dial number is correct, say The system responds with “OK, “Yes”. The system responds . Digit Dial Dialing” and dials the number. with “OK, Dialing” and dials . . Call the number. If the number If an unwanted number is is not correct, say No . recognized by the system, . Re dial “ ” ‐ The system will ask for the say “Clear” at any time to Using the Dial Command number to be re‐entered. clear the last number. . To hear all of the numbers Using the Digit Dial Command 1. Press and hold b g for recognized by the system, two seconds. The system 1. Press and hold for say “Verify” at any time and responds with Ready followed b g “ ” two seconds. The system the system will repeat them. by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed Using the Call Command 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds by a tone. with Dial using . “ ” 2. Say Digit Dial . The system 1. Press and hold b g for Number please followed by “ ” “ ” responds with Digit dial using two seconds. The system a tone. “ , please say the responds with “Ready” followed 3. Say the entire number without first digit to dial” followed by by a tone. pausing. a tone. 2. Say “Call”. The system responds . If the system recognizes 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at with “Call using . the number, it responds a time. Following each digit, the Please say the name tag” with “OK, Dialing” and dials system will repeat back the digit followed by a tone. the number. it heard followed by a tone. Infotainment System 7-53

3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re‐dial Command Call Waiting to call. 1. Press and hold b g for Call waiting must be supported on . If the system clearly two seconds. The system the Bluetooth phone and enabled by recognizes the name tag it responds with “Ready” followed the wireless service carrier to work. responds with “OK, calling, by a tone. ” and dials the . Press b g to answer an number. 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The incoming call when another call system responds with “Re‐dial is active. The original call is . If the system is unsure it using ” and dials placed on hold. recognizes the right name the last number called from the tag, it confirms the name connected Bluetooth phone. . Press b g again to return to the tag followed by a tone. original call. If the name tag is correct, Once connected, the person called . To ignore the incoming call, say “Yes”. The system will be heard through the audio responds with OK, calling, speakers. continue with the original call “ with no action. ” and dials the Receiving a Call number. If the name tag . Press c x to disconnect the When an incoming call is received, is not correct, say “No”. current call and switch to the call the audio system mutes and a ring The system will ask for the on hold. name tag to be re‐entered. tone is heard in the vehicle. Once connected, the person called . Press b g and begin speaking will be heard through the audio to answer the call. speakers. . Press c x to ignore a call. 7-54 Infotainment System

Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone Three‐Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the During a call with the audio in the and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call vehicle: carrier to work. cannot hear them. 1. Press b g . The system 1. While on a call press b g . To Mute a call responds with “Ready” followed The system responds with by a tone. 1. Press b g . The system “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system 2. Say “Three‐way call”. by a tone. responds with “Transferring call” The system responds with and the audio will switch from 2. Say Mute Call . The system “Three‐way call, please say “ ” the vehicle to the cell phone. dial or call . responds with “Call muted”. ” To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle 3. Use the dial or call command to To Cancel Mute Bluetooth System dial the number of the third party 1. Press b g . The system The cellular phone must be paired to be called. responds with “Ready” followed and connected with the Bluetooth 4. Once the call is connected, by a tone. system before a call can be transferred. The connection process press b g to link all the callers 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. together. The system responds with can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or “Resuming call”. Ending a Call ACC/ACCESSORY position. Transferring a Call Press c x to end a call. During a call with the audio on the Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b g for more than the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and two seconds. The audio switches the cell phone. from the cell phone to the vehicle. Infotainment System 7-55

Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 3. Say the number to send. Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones . If the system clearly the voice recognition commands on The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can recognizes the number it the cell phone. See the cell phone send numbers and numbers stored responds with “OK, Sending manufacturers user guide to see if as name tags during a call. This is Number” and the dial tones the cell phone supports this feature. used when calling a menu driven are sent and the call This feature can be used to verbally phone system. Account numbers continues. access contacts stored in the cell can be programmed into the . If the system is not sure it phone. phonebook for retrieval during recognized the number menu driven calls. 1. Press and hold b g for properly, it responds “Dial two seconds. The system Sending a Number During a Call Number, Please say yes or no? followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed ” by a tone. 1. Press b g . The system If the number is correct, say responds with “Ready” followed “Yes”. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system by a tone. with “OK, Sending Number” responds with “Bluetooth ready” and the dial tones are sent 2. Say Dial . The system responds followed by a tone. “ ” and the call continues. with “Say a number to send 3. Say “Voice”. The system tones” followed by a tone. responds with “OK, accessing ”. . The cell phone's normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone's operating instructions. 7-56 Infotainment System

Sending a Stored Name Tag . If the system is not sure Other Information During a Call it recognized the name The Bluetooth® word mark and tag properly, it responds ® 1. Press b g . The system “Dial , Please logos are owned by the Bluetooth responds with “Ready” followed say yes or no?” followed SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by a tone. by a tone. If the name by General Motors is under license. tag is correct, say “Yes”. Other trademarks and trade names 2. Say “Send name tag.” are those of their respective owners. The system responds with The system responds with OK, Sending “Say a name tag to send tones” “ ” See Radio Frequency Statement on followed by a tone. and the dial tones are sent page 13‑17 for FCC information. and the call continues. 3. Say the name tag to send. Clearing the System . If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it Unless information is deleted out responds with “OK, Sending of the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, ” and the dial it will be retained indefinitely. tones are sent and the call This includes all saved name tags in continues. the phonebook and phone pairing information. For information on how to delete this information, see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags. Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls Climate Control Systems The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Climate Control Systems this system. Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...... 8-4 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Control Only) ...... 8-10 Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . 8-11 Air Vents Air Vents ...... 8-12

A. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the B. Temperature Control way counterclockwise to turn the front climate control system off. C. Air Delivery Mode Control 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise D. Air Conditioning or counterclockwise to increase or E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) decrease the fan speed. F. Recirculation G. Rear Window Defogger 8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. # (Air Conditioning): Press to clockwise or counterclockwise Recirculation cannot be selected turn the air conditioning system on to increase or decrease the while in floor mode. or off. An indicator light comes on temperature of the air flowing - (Defog): This clears the when A/C is on. The air conditioning from the system. windows of fog or moisture. Air is system does not operate when Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn directed to the windshield, floor the outside temperature is below clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets, and side window vents. 4°C (40°F). The indicator light change the current airflow mode. When this mode is selected, the flashes three times and turns off when outside conditions affect air By positioning the right knob system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning unless the conditioning operation. This is between two modes, a combination normal. of those two modes is selected. outside temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). Recirculation cannot be For quicker cool down on hot days: H (Vent): Air is directed to the selected while in the defog mode. instrument panel outlets. Do not drive the vehicle until all the 1. Open the windows to let hot air escape. ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided windows are clear. between the instrument panel and 0 (Defrost): This clears the 2. Select H mode. floor outlets. Some air is directed windshield of fog or frost, more towards the windshield and side quickly. Air is directed to the 3. Select # . window outlets. Cooler air is windshield and side window vents, 4. Select the coolest temperature. directed to the upper outlets and with some to the floor vents. In this 5. Select the highest fan speed. warmer air to the floor outlets. mode, outside air is pulled inside 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be 6. Close the windows after the hot floor outlets, with some of the air selected while in the defrost mode. air has escaped. directed to the windshield, side The air conditioning system runs 7. Once the vehicle's interior window, and second row floor automatically in this setting, unless temperature is below the outside outlets. In this mode, the system the outside temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle temperature, select @ mode until all the windows are clear. for faster cooling. Climate Controls 8-3

Using recirculation for long periods The recirculation mode cannot be < (Rear Window Defogger): of time could cause the air inside used with floor, defrost, or defogging Press to turn the rear window of the vehicle to become too dry. modes. If recirculation is selected in defogger on or off. The rear window To prevent this from happening, these modes, the indicator flashes defogger stays on for about after the inside of the vehicle has three times and turns off. The air 10 minutes, before automatically cooled, turn the recirculation conditioning also comes on when turning off. The defogger will mode off. this mode is activated unless the also turn off when the engine The air conditioning system outside air temperature is less than is turned off. removes moisture from the air, so 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation mode the windows can fog when Do not drive the vehicle until all the water might drip under the vehicle windows are clear. while idling or after turning off the the weather is cold and damp. engine. This is normal. To clear the fog, select either the For vehicles with heated outside defog or defrost mode and increase rearview mirrors, fog or frost is @ (Recirculation): Press to turn the fan speed. cleared from the surface of the the recirculation mode on or off. mirror when < is pressed. An indicator light comes on when REAR (Rear Climate Control): recirculation is on. When the engine Press to turn the rear heating and Notice: Do not use anything is turned off, the recirculation mode air conditioning on or off. See Rear sharp on the inside of the rear automatically turns off and must be Climate Control System (Rear window. If you do, you could Climate Control Only) on page 8 10 re‐selected when the engine is ‑ cut or damage the warming grid, turned on again. or Rear Climate Control System and the repairs would not be (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) covered by the vehicle warranty. This mode recirculates and helps on page 8‑11. Do not attach a temporary vehicle to quickly cool the air inside the license, tape, a decal or anything vehicle. It can be used to prevent Rear Window Defogger similar to the defogger grid. outside air and odors from entering The rear window defogger uses a the vehicle. warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. 8-4 Climate Controls

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Display Function The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Each time the temperature, mode, this system. or fan control buttons are pressed, the climate control display shows that function along with the inside temperature setting. The outside temperature is displayed on the instrument panel cluster. O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. While the system is off, outside air still enters through the floor outlets, but the air delivery mode can be adjusted. The climate control system will also turn on if either the fan control, A. Fan Control I. Power (On/Off) defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning B. AUTO J. Rear Window Defogger buttons are pressed. C. Defrost K. Air Conditioning D. Recirculation L. PASS (Passenger) E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) M. Passenger Side Temperature F. Air Delivery Mode Control Control G. Driver Side Temperature Control H. Display Climate Controls 8-5

Automatic Operation quickly cool the vehicle. Temperature Control The recirculation indicator light AUTO (Automatic): The system The driver and passenger side will come on. automatically controls the inside temperature buttons are used temperature, the air delivery, and 2. Set the temperature for the to adjust the temperature of the the fan speed. driver and passenger. air coming through the system. The temperature can be adjusted To use automatic mode: To find a comfortable setting, start with a 22°C (73°F) even if the system is turned 1. Press the AUTO button. temperature setting and off since outside air still enters When AUTO is selected, the allow about 20 minutes for the the vehicle, unless the current temperature(s) selected system to regulate. Use the recirculation mode is selected. and AUTO is shown on the driver's side or passenger side See “Recirculation” later in this display. The current air delivery temperature buttons to adjust section. mode and fan speed also the temperature setting as Driver Side Temperature appear for approximately necessary. The system will Control: Press the + or − buttons five seconds. remain at the selected setting. to increase or decrease the driver When AUTO is selected, the Choosing the warmest or coolest side temperature. The driver side air conditioning and air inlet temperatures does not cause temperature display will show the are automatically controlled. the vehicle to heat or cool more temperature setting. The air conditioning runs when quickly. Passenger Side Temperature the outside temperature is over To avoid blowing cold air in cold Control: Press the + or − buttons 4°C (40°F). The system is weather, the system delays to increase or decrease the automatically set to outside turning on the fan until warm passenger side temperature. air, unless it is hot outside and air is available. Press the fan The passenger side display will then the air inlet changes to control to override this delay show the temperature setting. recirculation mode to help and select the fan speed. 8-6 Climate Controls

PASS (Passenger): Press to H / G (Air Delivery Mode 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the set the passenger temperature Control): Press to change the floor outlets, with some of the air to match the driver temperature direction of the airflow in the vehicle. directed to the windshield, side setting. The PASS indicator will Repeatedly press H or G until the window, and second row floor turn off. When the passenger desired mode appears on the outlets. In this mode, the system temperature setting is different display. Pressing a mode button uses outside air. than the driver setting, the PASS while the system is off changes the indicator comes on. - (Defog): This mode clears the air delivery mode without turning the windows of fog or moisture. Air is Manual Operation system on. Press a mode button directed to the windshield, floor while in automatic control to place outlets, and side window vents. The air delivery mode or fan speed the system into manual control. can be manually adjusted. When this mode is selected, the D C The air delivery mode setting still system turns off recirculation and / (Fan Control): Press to displays, but the word AUTO no runs the air conditioning compressor increase or decrease the fan speed. longer displays, and the AUTO unless the outside temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive Pressing D or C while in automatic button indicator light turns off. the vehicle until all the windows control places the fan speed under H (Vent): Air is directed to the are clear. manual control. instrument panel outlets. The air delivery mode remains in ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided automatic control. The fan setting between the instrument panel and still displays, but the word AUTO no floor outlets. Some air is directed longer displays, and the AUTO towards the windshield and side button indicator light turns off. window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. Climate Controls 8-7

0 (Defrost): Press to turn the While in defrost mode, if the PASS Air Conditioning button is pressed, the PASS button defrost on or off. This mode quickly (Air Conditioning): Press to indicator flashes three times to # clears the windshield of fog or frost. turn the air conditioning (A/C) on show that the passenger climate Air is directed to the windshield, and off. An indicator light comes control system cannot be activated. side window, and floor vents. In this on when A/C is on. mode, outside air is pulled inside If the passenger temperature the vehicle. The air conditioning buttons are adjusted while in The A/C does not work when system runs automatically in defrost mode, the driver the outside temperature is below this setting, unless the outside temperature indicator will change. 4°C (40°F). If # is pressed the temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). The passenger temperature will indicator flashes three times and not be displayed. Do not drive the vehicle until all the turns off to show that the A/C mode windows are clear. When returning to bi-level, vent, is not available. If the A/C is on or floor mode, the previous and the outside temperature drops temperature settings displays in below a temperature which is too place of any change made while cool for air conditioning to be in defrost mode. effective, the A/C indicator turns off to show that the A/C mode has been canceled. 8-8 Climate Controls

On hot days, open the windows The recirculation mode cannot be Rear Window Defogger briefly to let hot inside air escape. used with floor, defog, or defrosting The rear window defogger uses a This helps reduce the time it takes modes. If recirculation is selected in warming grid to remove fog from the for the interior of the vehicle to these modes, the indicator flashes rear window. cool down. three times and turns off. The air (Rear Window Defogger): The air conditioning system conditioning compressor also comes < Press to turn the rear window removes moisture from the air, so on when this mode is activated. defogger on or off. The rear window water might drip under the vehicle While in recirculation mode the defogger stays on for about while idling or after turning off the windows can fog when the weather 10 minutes, before turning off. engine. This is normal. is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost The defogger also turns off when @ (Recirculation): Press to turn mode and increase the fan speed. the engine is turned off. Do not drive the recirculation mode on or off. the vehicle until all the windows REAR: Press to turn the rear An indicator light comes on when are clear. recirculation is on. When the engine heating and air conditioning on or For vehicles with heated outside is turned off, the recirculation mode off. See Rear Climate Control rearview mirrors, fog or frost is automatically turns off and must be System (Rear Climate Control Only) cleared from the surface of the re selected when the engine is on page 8‑10 or Rear Climate ‐ mirror when the rear window defog turned on again. Control System (Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11. button is pressed. This mode recirculates and helps Notice: Do not use a razor blade to quickly cool the air inside the or sharp object to clear the inside vehicle. It can be used to prevent rear window. Do not adhere outside air and odors from entering anything to the defogger grid the vehicle. lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Climate Controls 8-9

Sensors There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by The interior temperature sensor adjusting the temperature, fan located on the instrument panel to speed, and the air delivery mode. The solar sensor, located in the the right of the steering column, The system may also supply cooler defrost grille in the middle of the measures the temperature of the air air to the side of the vehicle facing instrument panel, monitors the solar inside the vehicle. the sun. The recirculation mode will heat. Do not cover the solar sensor also be used as needed to maintain or the system will not work properly. cool outlet temperatures. 8-10 Climate Controls

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow Control Only) according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to 9 to turn the fan off. Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airflow temperature. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front to the desired mode to change the airflow direction. B. Temperature Control climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or H (Vent): Air is directed through C. Air Delivery Mode Control off. An indicator comes on when the the overhead outlets. rear system is on. The system also For vehicles with the rear climate ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed control system, the controls are turns on if any of the rear controls are adjusted. through the rear floor outlets, as located on the rear of the center well as the overhead outlets. console. The system can also be Mimic Mode: This mode matches controlled with the front controls. the rear climate control to the front 6 (Floor): Air is directed through climate control settings. It comes on the floor outlets. The rear system when REAR is pressed. floor outlets are located under the third row seats. Climate Controls 8-11

Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate control to the front Rear Seat Audio) climate control settings. It comes on when REAR is pressed. Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. DC (Fan Control): Press the fan up or down buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Temperature Control: Press + or − to increase or decrease the air temperature. The A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front temperature settings will display climate control system to turn the B. Air Delivery Mode Control in 0 12 increments, going rear climate control system on or ‐ from the coolest (0) to the C. Temperature Control off. The system also turns on if any warmest (12) setting. For vehicles with the rear climate of the rear controls, except for the C control system, the controls are are pressed. An indicator comes on located on the rear of the center when the rear system is on. console. The system can also be turned off, by pressing and holding the C button. 8-12 Climate Controls

N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Air Vents Operation Tips Press to manually change the . Clear away any ice, snow, direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Use the slider switch in the center of the outlet, to change the direction of or leaves from the air inlets press the button until the desired at the base of the windshield mode appears on the display. the air flow. Use the thumbwheel near the outlet to control the amount that can block the flow of air into H (Vent): Air is directed through of air flow or to shut off the airflow. the vehicle. the overhead outlets. . Keep all outlets open whenever Use of non-GM approved hood ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed possible for best system deflectors can adversely affect through the rear floor outlets, as performance. the performance of the system. well as the overhead outlets. . Keep the path under all seats 6 (Floor): Air is directed through clear of objects to help circulate the floor outlets. The rear system the air inside the vehicle more floor outlets are located under the effectively. third row seats. . If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes with mild temperature throughout the vehicle, turn on the air conditioner to reduce windshield fogging. Driving and Operating 9-1

Shifting Into Park ...... 9-21 Object Detection Systems Driving and Shifting Out of Park ...... 9-22 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-35 Operating Parking Over Things Rear Vision That Burn ...... 9-23 Camera (RVC) ...... 9-36 Engine Exhaust Fuel Driving Information Engine Exhaust ...... 9-23 Fuel ...... 9-42 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 Running the Vehicle While Recommended Fuel ...... 9-43 Drunk Driving ...... 9-2 Parked ...... 9-24 Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-43 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 California Fuel Braking ...... 9-3 Automatic Transmission Requirements ...... 9-43 Steering ...... 9-4 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-44 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Manual Mode ...... 9-26 Fuel Additives ...... 9-44 Loss of Control ...... 9-6 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-27 Filling the Tank ...... 9-45 Driving on Wet Roads ...... 9-7 Drive Systems Filling a Portable Fuel Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-8 Container ...... 9-47 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 All-Wheel Drive ...... 9-28 Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Brakes Towing If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-11 Antilock Brake General Towing Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-12 System (ABS) ...... 9-28 Information ...... 9-47 Starting and Operating Parking Brake ...... 9-29 Driving Characteristics and Brake Assist ...... 9-30 Towing Tips ...... 9-48 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-17 Trailer Towing ...... 9-53 Ignition Positions ...... 9-18 Ride Control Systems Towing Equipment ...... 9-57 Retained Accessory StabiliTrak System ...... 9-30 Power (RAP) ...... 9-19 Conversions and Add-Ons Starting the Engine ...... 9-19 Cruise Control Add-On Electrical Engine Heater ...... 9-20 Cruise Control ...... 9-32 Equipment ...... 9-59 9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information Death and injury associated with WARNING (Continued) drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or Alcohol affects four things that Defensive driving means always “ possible death. These simple anyone needs to drive a vehicle: expect the unexpected.” The first defensive driving techniques judgment, muscular coordination, step in driving defensively is to wear vision, and attentiveness. your safety belt, see Safety Belts on could save your life. page 3‑16. Police records show that Drunk Driving almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve { WARNING { WARNING alcohol. In most cases, these Assume that other road users deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is In recent years, more than drivers) are going to be careless very dangerous. Your reflexes, 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and deaths have been associated with judgment can be affected by what they might do and be ready. the use of alcohol, with about even a small amount of alcohol. In addition: 250,000 people injured. You can have a serious — or . Allow enough following even fatal — collision if you drive For persons under 21, it is against distance between you and the law in every U.S. state to drink the driver in front of you. after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has alcohol. There are good medical, . Focus on the task of driving. been drinking. Ride home in a psychological, and developmental (Continued) cab; or if you are with a group, reasons for these laws. designate a driver who will not The obvious way to eliminate the drink. leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Driving and Operating 9-3

Medical research shows that Braking And, of course, actual stopping alcohol in a person's system distances vary greatly with the can make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light surface of the road, whether it is especially injuries to the brain, on page 5‑19. pavement or gravel; the condition spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception of the road, whether it is wet, dry, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding or icy; tire tread; the condition of the drinking — driver or passenger — is to push the brake pedal is brakes; the weight of the vehicle; in a crash, that person's chance of perception time. Actually doing and the amount of brake force being killed or permanently disabled it is reaction time. applied. is higher than if the person had not Avoid needless heavy been drinking. Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a second. But that braking. Some people drive in is only an average. It might be spurts — heavy acceleration Control of a Vehicle less with one driver and as long as followed by heavy braking — rather The following three systems two or three seconds or more with than keeping pace with traffic. help to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition, This is a mistake. The brakes might driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and not have time to cool between hard accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do stops. The brakes will wear out driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But much faster with a lot of heavy ask more of those control systems even in three‐fourths of a second, braking. Keeping pace with the than the tires and road can provide. a vehicle moving at 100 km/h traffic and allowing realistic following Meaning, you can lose control of the (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). That distances eliminates a lot of vehicle. See StabiliTrak System on could be a lot of distance in an unnecessary braking. That means page 9‑30. emergency, so keeping enough better braking and longer brake life. space between the vehicle and Adding non dealer/non retailer ‐ ‐ others is important. accessories can affect vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 10‑3. 9-4 Driving and Operating

If the engine ever stops while the Steering Steering Tips vehicle is being driven, brake It is important to take curves at a normally but do not pump the Power Steering reasonable speed. brakes. If the brakes are pumped, If power steering assist is lost the pedal could get harder to push because the engine stops or the Traction in a curve depends on the down. If the engine stops, there will power steering system is not condition of the tires and the road still be some power brake assist but functioning, the vehicle can be surface, the angle at which the it will be used when the brake is steered but it will take more effort. curve is banked, and vehicle speed. applied. Once the power assist is While in a curve, speed is the one used up, it can take longer to stop Variable Effort Steering factor that can be controlled. and the brake pedal will be harder The vehicle has a steering system If there is a need to reduce speed, to push. that continuously adjusts the effort do it before entering the curve, while Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer felt when steering at all vehicle the front wheels are straight. accessories can affect vehicle speeds. It provides ease when Try to adjust the speed so you can performance. See Accessories and parking, yet a firm, solid feel at drive through the curve. Maintain a Modifications on page 10‑3. highway speeds. reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Driving and Operating 9-5

Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery There are times when steering The vehicle's right wheels can drop can be more effective than braking. off the edge of a road onto the For example, you come over a hill shoulder while driving. and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision. the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock The vehicle can perform very well positions, it can be turned a full in emergencies like these. First 180 degrees very quickly without apply the brakes. See Braking on removing either hand. But you have If the level of the shoulder is only page 9‑3. It is better to remove as to act fast, steer quickly, and just as slightly below the pavement, much speed as possible from a quickly straighten the wheel once recovery should be fairly easy. collision. Then steer around the you have avoided the object. problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 9-6 Driving and Operating

Ease off the accelerator and then, Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when if there is nothing in the way, steer water, snow, ice, gravel, or other In a skid, a driver can lose control of so that the vehicle straddles the material is on the road. For safety, the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid edge of the pavement. Turn the slow down and adjust your driving most skids by taking reasonable steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to to these conditions. It is important care suited to existing conditions, 5 inches), about one-eighth turn, to slow down on slippery surfaces and by not overdriving those until the right front tire contacts because stopping distance is longer conditions. But skids are always the pavement edge. Then turn the and vehicle control more limited. possible. steering wheel to go straight down While driving on a surface with The three types of skids correspond the roadway. reduced traction, try your best to to the vehicle's three control avoid sudden steering, acceleration, systems. In the braking skid, Loss of Control or braking, including reducing the wheels are not rolling. In the vehicle speed by shifting to a lower Let us review what driving experts steering or cornering skid, too much gear. Any sudden changes could say about what happens when the speed or steering in a curve causes cause the tires to slide. You might three control systems — brakes, tires to slip and lose cornering force. not realize the surface is slippery steering, and acceleration — do not And in the acceleration skid, too until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to have enough friction where the tires much throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues such as meet the road to do what the driver wheels to spin. — has asked. enough water, ice, or packed snow If the vehicle starts to slide, ease on the road to make a mirrored In any emergency, do not give up. your foot off the accelerator pedal surface — and slow down when Keep trying to steer and constantly and quickly steer the way you you have any doubt. seek an escape route or area of want the vehicle to go. If you start Remember: Antilock brakes help less danger. steering quickly enough, the vehicle avoid only the braking skid. may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Driving and Operating 9-7

Driving on Wet Roads There is no hard and fast rule about WARNING (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to Rain and wet roads can reduce slow down when the road is wet. vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through Other Rainy Weather Tips Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause your Besides slowing down, other wet of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this weather driving tips include: driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle . Allow extra following distance. deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be . Pass with caution. { WARNING very cautious about trying to drive . Keep windshield wiping through flowing water. equipment in good shape. Wet brakes can cause crashes. . They might not work as well in Hydroplaning Keep the windshield washer fluid a quick stop and could cause reservoir filled. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water pulling to one side. You could . Have good tires with proper can build up under your vehicle's lose control of the vehicle. tread depth. See Tires on tires so they actually ride on the page 10 36. After driving through a large water. This can happen if the road ‑ puddle of water or a car/vehicle is wet enough and you are going . Turn off cruise control. wash, lightly apply the brake fast enough. When your vehicle is pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no normally. contact with the road. (Continued) 9-8 Driving and Operating

Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads { WARNING Always be alert and pay attention Driving on steep hills or through to your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) If you become tired or sleepy, find on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for or with the ignition off is a safe place to park your vehicle driving in these conditions include: dangerous. The brakes will and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in have to do all the work of slowing Other driving tips include: good shape. down and they could get so hot that they would not work well. . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, You would then have poor braking tires, cooling system, and . Keep interior temperature cool. or even none going down a hill. transmission. You could crash. Always have the . Keep your eyes moving scan — . the road ahead and to the sides. Going down steep or long hills, engine running and the vehicle in shift to a lower gear. gear when going downhill. . Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often. { WARNING

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. Driving and Operating 9-9

. Stay in your own lane. Do not Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS) swing wide or cut across the on page 9‑28 improves vehicle center of the road. Drive at Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on speeds that let you stay in your slippery roads, but apply the brakes own lane. Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the sooner than when on dry pavement. . Top of hills: Be road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on alert — something could be in Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for your lane (stalled car, accident). (32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can . Pay attention to special road fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in signs (falling rocks area, winding Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a roads, long grades, passing or freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain no-passing zones) and take treated with salt or sand. icy when the surrounding roads appropriate action. Drive with caution, whatever the are clear. Avoid sudden steering condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while traction is not lost. Accelerating too on ice. quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control, if equipped, and makes the surface under the on slippery surfaces. tires slick, so there is even less traction. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. 9-10 Driving and Operating

Blizzard Conditions WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about vehicle unless there is help nearby. . Clear away snow from around carbon monoxide, see Engine If possible, use the Roadside the base of your vehicle, Exhaust on page 9‑23. Assistance Program on page 13 6. ‑ especially any that is blocking To get help and keep everyone in Snow can trap exhaust gases the exhaust pipe. the vehicle safe: under your vehicle. This can . Check again from time to cause deadly CO (carbon . Turn on the hazard warning time to be sure snow does monoxide) gas to get inside. CO flashers. not collect there. could overcome you and kill you. . Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so . Open a window about 5 cm mirror. (two inches) on the side of you might not know it is in your the vehicle that is away from vehicle. Clear away snow from { WARNING the wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust. under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument cause exhaust gases to get panel. Run the engine for short periods inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the Climate Control only as needed to keep warm, but carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful. cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed death. to the highest setting. See (Continued) Climate Control System in the Index. (Continued) Driving and Operating 9-11

To save fuel, run the engine for only If the Vehicle is Stuck short periods as needed to warm { WARNING the vehicle and then shut the engine Slowly and cautiously spin the off and close the window most of wheels to free the vehicle when If the vehicle's tires spin at high the way to save heat. Repeat this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. until help arrives but only when you If the vehicle has a traction system, feel really uncomfortable from the it can often help to free a stuck The vehicle can overheat, cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's causing an engine compartment also helps. traction system in the Index. If stuck fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and If it takes some time for help to too severely for the traction system avoid going above 55 km/h arrive, now and then when you run to free the vehicle, turn the traction the engine, push the accelerator system off and use the rocking (35 mph) as shown on the pedal slightly so the engine runs method. speedometer. faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart For information about using tire the vehicle and to signal for help chains on the vehicle, see Tire with the headlamps. Do this as little Chains on page 10‑57. as possible to save fuel. 9-12 Driving and Operating

Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits it Out { WARNING It is very important to know how Turn the steering wheel left and much weight your vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the heavier than the Gross front wheels. Turn off any traction vehicle capacity weight and Vehicle Weight Rating or stability system. Shift back and (GVWR), or either the forth between R (Reverse) and a includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all maximum front or rear Gross forward gear, spinning the wheels Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). as little as possible. To prevent nonfactory-installed options. transmission wear, wait until the Two labels on your vehicle If you do, parts on the vehicle wheels stop spinning before shifting show how much weight it may can break, and it can change gears. Release the accelerator properly carry, the Tire and the way the vehicle handles. pedal while shifting, and press Loading Information label and These could cause you to lightly on the accelerator pedal the Certification/Tire label. lose control and crash. Also, when the transmission is in gear. overloading can shorten the Slowly spinning the wheels in the life of the vehicle. forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑83. Driving and Operating 9-13

Tire and Loading Information number of occupant seating Steps for Determining Correct Label positions (A), and the maximum Load Limit vehicle capacity weight (B) in 1. Locate the statement kilograms and pounds. “The combined weight of The Tire and Loading occupants and cargo should Information label also shows the never exceed XXX kg or size of the original equipment XXX lbs” on your vehicle's tires (C) and the recommended placard. cold tire inflation pressures (D). 2. Determine the combined For more information on tires weight of the driver and and inflation see Tires on passengers that will be page 10‑36 and Tire Pressure on riding in your vehicle. page 10‑43. Example Label There is also important loading A vehicle specific Tire and information on the vehicle Loading Information label is Certification/Tire label. It tells attached to the center pillar you the Gross Vehicle Weight (B-pillar) of your vehicle. Rating (GVWR) and the Gross With the driver's door open, Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) you will find the label attached for the front and rear axle. below the door lock post See “Certification/Tire Label” (striker). The tire and loading later in this section. information label shows the 9-14 Driving and Operating

3. Subtract the combined 5. Determine the combined weight of the driver and weight of luggage and cargo passengers from XXX kg being loaded on the vehicle. or XXX lbs. That weight may not safely 4. The resulting figure equals exceed the available cargo the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity and luggage load capacity. calculated in Step 4. For example, if the “XXX” 6. If your vehicle will be towing amount equals 1400 lbs a trailer, the load from your and there will be five 150 lb trailer will be transferred to passengers in your vehicle, your vehicle. Consult this the amount of available cargo manual to determine how this Example 1 and luggage load capacity reduces the available cargo A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 and luggage load capacity for Example 1 = 453 kg (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). your vehicle. (1,000 lbs). See Trailer Towing on page 9‑53 B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ for important information on 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg towing a trailer, towing safety (300 lbs). rules and trailering tips. C. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs). Driving and Operating 9-15

seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label

Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight Example 2 = 453 kg for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs). B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example (750 lbs). (1,000 lbs). A vehicle specific Certification/ C. Available Cargo C. Available Cargo Tire label is attached to the rear Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs). Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs). edge of the driver's door. Refer to your vehicle's tire and The label shows the gross loading information label for weight capacity of your vehicle. specific information about your This is called the Gross Vehicle vehicle's capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR). 9-16 Driving and Operating

The GVWR includes the weight Notice : Overloading the of the vehicle, all occupants, { WARNING vehicle may cause damage. fuel, and cargo. Do not load the vehicle any Repairs would not be covered The Certification/Tire label also heavier than the Gross by the vehicle warranty. tells you the maximum weights Vehicle Weight Rating Do not overload the vehicle. for the front and rear axles, (GVWR), or either the If you put things inside your called the Gross Axle Weight maximum front or rear Gross vehicle — like suitcases, tools, Rating (GAWR). To find out the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). packages, or anything else, they actual loads on your front and If you do, parts on the vehicle will go as fast as the vehicle rear axles, you need to go to a can break, and it can change goes. If you have to stop or turn weigh station and weigh your the way the vehicle handles. quickly, or if there is a crash, vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can These could cause you to they will keep going. help you with this. Be sure to lose control and crash. Also, spread out your load equally on overloading can shorten the both sides of the centerline. life of the vehicle. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. Driving and Operating 9-17

. Avoid making hard stops for { WARNING Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or Operating so. During this time the new Things you put inside your brake linings are not yet vehicle can strike and injure New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with people in a sudden stop or new linings can mean turn, or in a crash. Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this . Put things in the cargo will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every area of your vehicle. Try to if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake spread the weight evenly. . If you have all-wheel drive, linings. . Never stack heavier keep your speed at 88 km/h . Do not tow a trailer during things, like suitcases, (55 mph) or less for the first break-in. See Driving inside the vehicle so that 805 km (500 miles). Characteristics and Towing some of them are above . Do not drive at any one Tips on page 9‑48 for the the tops of the seats. constant speed, fast or trailer towing capabilities slow, for the first 805 km of your vehicle and more . Do not leave an (500 miles). Do not make information. unsecured child restraint full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break‐in, engine speed in your vehicle. downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually . When you carry something slow the vehicle. increased. inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. . Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. 9-18 Driving and Operating

Ignition Positions Notice: Using a tool to force the items plugged into the accessory key to turn in the ignition could power outlets. This position unlocks cause damage to the switch or the ignition and steering wheel. break the key. Use the correct Use this position if the vehicle must key, make sure it is all the way in, be pushed or towed. and turn it only with your hand. R (ON/RUN): This position can If the key cannot be turned by be used to operate the electrical hand, see your dealer/retailer. accessories and to display some ( (LOCK/OFF): This position locks instrument panel warning and the ignition and transmission. The indicator lights. The switch stays key can be removed in LOCK/OFF. in this position when the engine The shift lever must be in P (Park) is running. The transmission is to turn the ignition switch to also unlocked in this position. LOCK/OFF. If you leave the key in the ACC/ The ignition switch has four different ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position positions. The steering can bind with the with the engine off, the battery could wheels turned off center. If this be drained. You may not be able to In order to shift out of P (Park), the happens, move the steering wheel start the vehicle if the battery is ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ from right to left while turning the allowed to drain for an extended ACCESSORY and the brake pedal key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this period of time. must be applied. doesn't work, then the vehicle needs / service. (START): This is the position that starts the engine. When the ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This engine starts, release the key. is the position in which you can The ignition switch will return to operate the electrical accessories or ON/RUN for driving. Driving and Operating 9-19

Retained Accessory Starting the Engine starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is Power (RAP) Move the shift lever to P (Park) or turned to the START position, These vehicle accessories can be N (Neutral). The engine will not start and then released when the used for up to 10 minutes after the in any other position. To restart the engine begins cranking, the ignition key is turned off: engine when the vehicle is already engine will continue cranking moving, use N (Neutral) only. for a few seconds or until the . Audio System Notice: Do not try to shift to vehicle starts. If the engine does . Power Windows P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. not start and the key is held . Sunroof (if equipped) If you do, you could damage the in START, cranking will be transmission. Shift to P (Park) stopped after 15 seconds to Power to the windows and sunroof only when the vehicle is stopped. prevent cranking motor damage. will work up to 10 minutes or until a To prevent gear damage, this door is opened. Starting Procedure system also prevents cranking The radio continues to work for 1. With your foot off the accelerator if the engine is already running. 10 minutes or until the driver's door pedal, turn the ignition to START. Engine cranking can be stopped is opened. When the engine starts, let go by turning the ignition switch to of the key. The idle speed will the ACC/ACCESSORY or For an additional 10 minutes of slow down as the engine LOCK/OFF position. operation, close all the doors and warms. Do not race the engine turn the key to ON/RUN and then Notice: Cranking the engine for immediately after starting it. back to LOCK/OFF. long periods of time, by returning Operate the engine and the key to the START position All these features will work when transmission gently to allow immediately after cranking has the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ the oil to warm up and lubricate ended, can overheat and damage ACCESSORY positions. all moving parts. the cranking motor, and drain the The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the System. This feature assists in cranking motor cool down. 9-20 Driving and Operating

2. If the engine does not start after Notice: The engine is designed to To Use the Engine Coolant 5‐10 seconds, especially in work with the electronics in the Heater very cold weather (below 0°F vehicle. If you add electrical parts or −18°C), it could be flooded or accessories, you could change 1. Turn off the engine. with too much gasoline. Try the way the engine operates. 2. Open the hood and unwrap pushing the accelerator pedal all Before adding electrical the electrical cord. The cord is the way to the floor and holding equipment, check with your located on the driver side of the it there as you hold the key in dealer/retailer. If you do not, engine compartment. It is routed START for up to a maximum the engine might not perform around the windshield washer of 15 seconds. Wait at least properly. Any resulting damage fluid reservoir. 15 seconds between each try, to would not be covered by the 3. Plug the cord into a normal, allow the cranking motor to cool vehicle warranty. grounded 110-volt AC outlet. down. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. Engine Heater If the vehicle starts briefly but { WARNING then stops again, repeat these The engine coolant heater can steps. This clears the extra provide easier starting and better Plugging the cord into an gasoline from the engine. Do not fuel economy during engine ungrounded outlet could cause an race the engine immediately warm-up in cold weather conditions electrical shock. Also, the wrong after starting it. Operate the at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles kind of extension cord could engine and transmission gently with an engine coolant heater overheat and cause a fire. You until the oil warms up and should be plugged in at least could be seriously injured. Plug lubricates all moving parts. four hours before starting. Some the cord into a properly grounded models may have an internal three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. thermostat in the cord which will If the cord will not reach, use a prevent engine coolant heater heavy-duty three-prong extension operation at temperatures above cord rated for at least 15 amps. 0°F (−18°C). Driving and Operating 9-21

4. Before starting the engine, be Leaving the Vehicle with the sure to unplug and store the WARNING (Continued) Engine Running cord as it was before to keep fairly level ground, use the steps it away from moving engine { WARNING parts. If you do not, it could that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics be damaged. It can be dangerous to leave the and Towing Tips on page 9‑48. The length of time the heater should vehicle with the engine running. remain plugged in depends on 1. Hold the brake pedal down The vehicle could move suddenly several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer and set the parking brake. if the shift lever is not fully in in the area where you will be See Parking Brake on P (Park) with the parking brake parking the vehicle for the best page 9‑29 for more information. firmly set. And, if you leave the advice on this. vehicle with the engine running, 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) it could overheat and even catch Shifting Into Park by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the shift fire. You or others could be lever all the way toward the front injured. Do not leave the vehicle { WARNING of the vehicle. with the engine running. It can be dangerous to get out of 3. Turn the ignition key to If you have to leave the vehicle the vehicle if the shift lever is not LOCK/OFF. with the engine running, be sure fully in P (Park) with the parking 4. Remove the key and take it with the vehicle is in P (Park) and the brake firmly set. The vehicle can you. If you can leave the vehicle parking brake is firmly set before roll. If you have left the engine with the ignition key in your you leave it. After you have moved running, the vehicle can move hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). the shift lever into P (Park), hold the suddenly. You or others could be regular brake pedal down. Then, injured. To be sure the vehicle will see if you can move the shift lever not move, even when you are on away from P (Park) without first pushing the button. (Continued) 9-22 Driving and Operating

If you can, it means that the shift Shifting Out of Park The shift lock release is always lever was not fully locked in functional except in the case of an P (Park). The vehicle is equipped with uncharged or low voltage (less than an electronic shift lock release 9 volt) battery. Torque Lock system. The shift lock release is designed to: If the vehicle has an uncharged Torque lock is when the weight battery or a battery with low voltage, of the vehicle puts too much . Prevent ignition key removal try charging or jump starting the force on the parking pawl in the unless the shift lever is in battery. See Jump Starting on transmission. This happens when P (Park) with the shift lever page 10‑79 for more information. parking on a hill and shifting the button fully released, and transmission into P (Park) is not To shift out of P (Park): . Prevent movement of the shift done properly and then it is difficult lever out of P (Park), unless the 1. Apply the brake pedal. to shift out of P (Park). To prevent ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ torque lock, set the parking brake 2. Press the shift lever button. ACCESSORY and the regular and then shift into P (Park). To find 3. Move the shift lever to the brake pedal is applied. out how, see “Shifting Into Park” desired position. listed previously. If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park). Driving and Operating 9-23

If you still are unable to shift out of Engine Exhaust P (Park): WARNING (Continued) 1. Fully release the shift lever { WARNING . There are holes or openings button. in the vehicle body from 2. While holding down the brake Engine exhaust contains Carbon damage or after-market pedal, press the shift lever Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not button again. seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. can cause unconsciousness and 3. Move the shift lever to the If unusual fumes are detected or even death. desired position. if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle: If you still cannot move the shift Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: lever from P (Park), see your dealer/ . The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows retailer. with poor ventilation (parking completely down. garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired Parking Over Things that may block underbody immediately. airflow or tail pipes). That Burn Never park the vehicle with the . The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed { WARNING sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a . The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air Things that can burn could touch due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. hot exhaust parts under the . vehicle and ignite. Do not park The vehicle’s exhaust system has been modified, damaged over papers, leaves, dry grass, or improperly repaired. or other things that can burn. (Continued) 9-24 Driving and Operating

Running the Vehicle { WARNING Automatic While Parked Transmission It is better not to park with the It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic The automatic transmission has a engine running. But if you ever have shift lever located on the console to, here are some things to know. transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake between the seats. firmly set. The vehicle can roll. { WARNING Do not leave the vehicle when Idling a vehicle in an enclosed the engine is running unless you area with poor ventilation is have to. If you have left the dangerous. Engine exhaust may engine running, the vehicle can enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust move suddenly. You or others contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) could be injured. To be sure the which cannot be seen or smelled. vehicle will not move, even when It can cause unconsciousness you are on fairly level ground, and even death. Never run the always set the parking brake and engine in an enclosed area move the shift lever to P (Park). that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Follow the proper steps to be P (Park): This position locks the sure the vehicle will not move. See Exhaust on page 9‑23. front wheels. It is the best position Shifting Into Park on page 9‑21. to use when starting the engine If parking on a hill and pulling a because the vehicle cannot move trailer, see Driving Characteristics easily. and Towing Tips on page 9‑48. Driving and Operating 9-25

system. You must fully apply the N (Neutral): In this position, the { WARNING regular brake first and then press engine does not connect with the the shift lever button before shifting wheels. To restart the engine when It is dangerous to get out of the from P (Park) when the ignition key the vehicle is already moving, vehicle if the shift lever is not fully is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out use N (Neutral) only. Also, use in P (Park) with the parking brake of P (Park), ease pressure on the N (Neutral) when the vehicle is firmly set. The vehicle can roll. shift lever, then push the shift lever being towed. Do not leave the vehicle when all the way into P (Park) as you the engine is running unless you maintain brake application. Then { WARNING have to. If you have left the press the shift lever button and engine running, the vehicle can move the shift lever into another Shifting into a drive gear while the move suddenly. You or others gear. See Shifting Out of Park on engine is running at high speed is page 9 22. could be injured. To be sure the ‑ dangerous. Unless your foot is vehicle will not move, even when R (Reverse): Use this gear to firmly on the brake pedal, the you are on fairly level ground, back up. vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit always set the parking brake and Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) people or objects. Do not shift move the shift lever to P (Park). while the vehicle is moving See Shifting Into Park on forward could damage the into a drive gear while the engine page 9‑21. If you are pulling a transmission. The repairs would is running at high speed. trailer, see Driving Characteristics not be covered by the vehicle Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) and Towing Tips on page 9‑48. warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. or N (Neutral) with the engine Make sure the shift lever is fully in running at high speed may To rock the vehicle back and forth to P (Park) before starting the engine. damage the transmission. The get out of snow, ice or sand without The vehicle has an automatic repairs would not be covered by damaging the transmission, see If transmission shift lock control the vehicle warranty. Be sure the the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11. engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. 9-26 Driving and Operating

D (Drive): This position is for designed to improve fuel economy To use this feature: normal driving. It provides the best and performance. Use the brake to 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). fuel economy. If you need more hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not use power for passing, and you are: the accelerator pedal. 2. Press the plus/minus button located on the shift lever, to . Going less than 56 km/h L (Low): This position gives you increase or decrease the gear (35 mph), push the accelerator access to gear ranges. This range available. pedal about halfway down. provides more engine braking but When you shift from D (Drive) to . lower fuel economy than D (Drive). Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) L (Low), the transmission will shift to or more, push the accelerator all You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. a pre-determined lower gear range. the way down. The highest gear available for this Notice: If the vehicle seems to Manual Mode pre-determined range is displayed accelerate slowly or not shift next to the L in the DIC. See Driver gears when you go faster, and Electronic Range Select Information Center (DIC) (With DIC you continue to drive the vehicle (ERS) Mode Buttons) on page 5‑24 or Driver that way, you could damage the Information Center (DIC) (Without ERS mode allows you to choose transmission. Have the vehicle DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 for serviced right away. You can the top-gear limit of the transmission more information. The number drive in L (Low) when you are and the vehicle's speed while displayed in the DIC is the highest driving less than 56 km/h (35 mph) driving down hill or towing a trailer. gear that the transmission will be and D (Drive) for higher speeds The vehicle has an electronic shift allowed to operate in. This means until then. position indicator within the that all gears below that number instrument panel cluster. When are available. For example, when If the vehicle is stopped on a hill, using the ERS Mode a number will with your foot off the brake pedal, 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L, display next to the L, indicating the 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are the vehicle may roll. This is normal current gear that has been selected. and is due to the torque converter automatically shifted by the vehicle. Driving and Operating 9-27

The transmission will not shift into Tow/Haul Mode Automatic Engine Grade 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is Braking used or you shift back into D (Drive). _ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may have a Tow/Haul mode. Automatic Engine Grade Braking While in L (Low), the transmission assists when driving on a downhill The button is located on the will prevent shifting to a lower gear grade. It maintains vehicle speed by instrument panel under the climate range if the engine speed is too automatically implementing a shift controls. high. You have a brief period of schedule that uses the engine and time to slow the vehicle. If vehicle Push the button to activate the the transmission to slow the vehicle. speed is not reduced within the time system. Push it again to deactivate The system will automatically allowed, the lower gear range shift the system. You can use this feature command downshifts to reduce will not be completed. You must to assist when towing or hauling a vehicle speed, until the brake pedal further slow the vehicle, then press heavy load. is no longer being pressed. the − (Minus) button to the desired lower gear range. When Tow/Haul is activated the While in the Electronic Range Tow/Haul symbol will come on Select (ERS) mode, grade braking Automatic Engine Grade braking the instrument panel cluster. is deactivated, allowing the driver is not available when the ERS is See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Driving to select a range and limiting the active. It is available in D (Drive) for Characteristics and Towing Tips on highest gear available. Grade both normal and Tow/Haul mode. page 9‑48 for more information. braking is available for normal While using the ERS, cruise control driving and in Tow/Haul mode. and the tow/haul mode can be used. See Tow/Haul Mode following. See Automatic Transmission on page 9‑24. 9-28 Driving and Operating

Drive Systems Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it becomes necessary to slam on the brakes and continue braking All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake to avoid a sudden obstacle, a With this feature, engine power is System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the always sent to all four wheels. It is This vehicle has the Antilock wheels is about to stop rolling, the fully automatic, and adjusts itself as Brake System (ABS), an advanced computer will separately work the needed for road conditions. electronic braking system that helps brakes at each wheel. When using a compact spare tire prevent a braking skid. ABS can change the brake pressure on an AWD vehicle, the system When the engine is started and to each wheel, as required, faster automatically detects the compact the vehicle begins to drive away, than any driver could. This can help spare and disables AWD. To restore ABS checks itself. A momentary the driver steer around the obstacle AWD operation and prevent motor or clicking noise might be while braking hard. excessive wear on system, replace heard while this test is going on, the compact spare with a full-size and it might even be noticed that As the brakes are applied, the tire as soon as possible. See the brake pedal moves a little. computer keeps receiving updates Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑77 This is normal. on wheel speed and controls for more information. braking pressure accordingly.

If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 5‑20. Driving and Operating 9-29

Remember: ABS does not change Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking the time needed to get a foot up to brake on can overheat the brake the brake pedal or always decrease system and cause premature stopping distance. If you get too wear or damage to brake system close to the vehicle in front of you, parts. Make sure that the parking there will not be enough time to brake is fully released and the apply the brakes if that vehicle brake warning light is off before suddenly slows or stops. Always driving. leave enough room up ahead to To release the parking brake, hold stop, even with ABS. the regular brake pedal down, then Using ABS push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the pedal release. Slowly pull your the brake pedal down firmly and let foot up off the park brake pedal. ABS work. The ABS pump or motor If the parking brake is not released might be heard operating, and the To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then when you begin to drive, the brake brake pedal might be felt to pulsate, push the parking brake pedal down. system warning light will be on and but this is normal. a chime will sound warning you that If the ignition is on, the brake the parking brake is still on. Braking in Emergencies system warning light will come on. ABS allows the driver to steer and See Brake System Warning Light If you are towing a trailer and are brake at the same time. In many on page 5‑19. parking on a hill, see Trailer Towing emergencies, steering can help on page 9‑53. more than even the very best braking. 9-30 Driving and Operating

Brake Assist Ride Control Systems If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak light along This vehicle has a brake assist with one of the following messages feature designed to assist the StabiliTrak System will be displayed on the Driver driver in stopping or decreasing The vehicle has the StabiliTrak Information Center (DIC): vehicle speed in emergency driving system which combines antilock TRACTION CONTROL OFF, conditions. This feature uses the brake, traction and stability control SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, stability system hydraulic brake systems and helps the driver SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these control module to supplement maintain directional control of the conditions are observed, turn the power brake system under vehicle in most driving conditions. the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, conditions where the driver has and then turn it back on again to quickly and forcefully applied the When you first start the vehicle and reset the system. If any of these brake pedal in an attempt to quickly begin to drive away, the system messages still appear on the Driver stop or slow down the vehicle. performs several diagnostic checks Information Center (DIC), the The stability system hydraulic brake to ensure there are no problems. vehicle should be taken in for control module increases brake The system may be heard or felt service. For more information on pressure at each corner of the while it is working. This is normal the DIC messages, see Driver vehicle until the ABS activates. and does not mean there is a Information Center (DIC) (With DIC problem with the vehicle. The Minor brake pedal pulsations or Buttons) on page 5‑24 or Driver pedal movement during this time system should initialize before the Information Center (DIC) (Without vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph). is normal and the driver should DIC Buttons) on page 5‑29. continue to apply the brake pedal In some cases, it may take as the driving situation dictates. approximately 3.2 km (2 miles) of The brake assist feature will driving before the system initializes. automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. Driving and Operating 9-31

Traction control can be turned on is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, by pressing and releasing the and you want to “rock” the vehicle traction control disable button if not to attempt to free it. It may also be automatically shut off for any other necessary to turn off the system reason. when driving in extreme off-road When the traction control system is conditions where high wheel spin is The StabiliTrak light will flash on the turned off, the StabiliTrak light and required. See If the Vehicle is Stuck instrument panel cluster when the the appropriate traction control off on page 9‑11. system is both on and activated. message will be displayed on the Traction Control Operation The system may be heard or felt DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle while it is working; this is normal. will still have brake-traction control The traction control system is part when traction control is off, but will of the StabiliTrak system. Traction not be able to use the engine speed control limits wheel spin by reducing management system. See “Traction engine power to the wheels (engine Control Operation” next for more speed management) and by information. applying brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction control) as When the traction control system necessary. has been turned off, system noises The traction control disable button is may be heard and felt as a result of The traction control system is located on the instrument panel the brake-traction control working. enabled automatically when the below the climate controls. vehicle is started. It will activate It is recommended to leave the and the StabiliTrak light will flash The traction control part of system on for normal driving if it senses that any of the wheels StabiliTrak can be turned off by conditions, but it may be necessary are spinning or beginning to lose pressing and releasing the traction to turn the system off if the vehicle traction while driving. control disable button. 9-32 Driving and Operating

If traction control is turned off, The traction control system may Cruise Control only the brake-traction control activate on dry or rough roads or portion of traction control will work. under conditions such as heavy With cruise control, a speed of The engine speed management will acceleration while turning or about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be disabled. In this mode, engine abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the be maintained without keeping your power is not reduced automatically transmission. When this happens, foot on the accelerator. Cruise and the driven wheels can spin a reduction in acceleration may be control does not work at speeds more freely. This can cause the noticed, or a noise or vibration may below about 40 km/h (25 mph). brake-traction control to activate be heard. This is normal. When the brakes are applied, the constantly. If cruise control is being used when cruise control is disengaged. Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle the system activates, the StabiliTrak is allowed to spin excessively light will flash and cruise control will { WARNING while the StabiliTrak, ABS and automatically disengage. Cruise brake warning lights and any control may be reengaged when Cruise control can be dangerous relevant DIC messages are road conditions allow. See Cruise where you cannot drive safely at displayed, the transfer case could Control on page 9‑32. a steady speed. So, do not use be damaged. The repairs would StabiliTrak may also turn off the cruise control on winding not be covered by the vehicle automatically if it determines that a roads or in heavy traffic. warranty. Reduce engine power problem exists with the system. and do not spin the wheel(s) Cruise control can be dangerous If the problem does not clear itself on slippery roads. On such roads, excessively while these lights after restarting the vehicle, see your and messages are displayed. fast changes in tire traction can dealer/retailer for service. cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. Driving and Operating 9-33

[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise 1. Press the I button to turn the control without erasing the set cruise control system on. speed from memory. 2. Get up to the speed desired. Setting Cruise Control 3. Press and release the SET– Cruise control will not work if the button located on the steering parking brake is set, or if the master wheel. cylinder brake fluid level is low. 4. Take your foot off the The cruise control light on the accelerator. instrument panel cluster comes on Resuming a Set Speed after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. If the cruise control is set at a The cruise control buttons are desired speed and then the brakes located on left side of the steering { WARNING are applied, the cruise control is wheel. disengaged without erasing the T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise If you leave your cruise control on set speed from memory. control on and off. The indicator when you are not using cruise, Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h comes on when cruise control is on. you might hit a button and go into (25 mph) or greater, press the + RES (Resume/Accelerate): cruise when you do not want to. +RES button on the steering wheel. Press to make the vehicle You could be startled and even The vehicle returns to the previously accelerate or resume to a previously lose control. Keep the cruise set speed and stays there. set speed. control switch off until you want to use cruise control. SET– : Press to set the speed and activate cruise control or to make the vehicle decelerate. 9-34 Driving and Operating

Increasing Speed While Using . To slow down in very small vehicle speed. When going Cruise Control amounts, press the SET– button downhill, you might have to brake briefly. Each time this is done, or shift to a lower gear to keep the If the cruise control is already the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h engaged, vehicle speed down. When the (1 mph) slower. brakes are applied the cruise control . Press and hold the +RES button Passing Another Vehicle While is disengaged. on the steering wheel until the Using Cruise Control desired speed is reached, then Ending Cruise Control release it. Use the accelerator pedal to There are three ways to end cruise increase vehicle speed. When . To increase vehicle speed in control: you take your foot off the pedal, small increments, press the . the vehicle will slow down to the Step lightly on the brake pedal. +RES button briefly. Each time previously set cruise speed. this is done, the vehicle goes . Press the [ button. about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. Using Cruise Control on Hills . Press the T button. Reducing Speed While Using How well the cruise control will work Cruise Control on hills depends upon the vehicle Erasing Speed Memory speed, load, and the steepness of If the cruise control system is The cruise control set speed the hills. When going up steep hills, already engaged, memory is erased when the cruise you might have to step on the control or the ignition is turned off. . Press and hold the SET– button accelerator pedal to maintain the on the steering wheel until the lower speed desired is reached, then release it. Driving and Operating 9-35

How the System Works Object Detection { WARNING Systems URPA comes on automatically The Ultrasonic Rear Parking when the shift lever is moved into Ultrasonic Parking Assist Assist (URPA) system does not R (Reverse). A single tone sounds replace driver vision. It cannot to indicate the system is working. For vehicles with the Ultrasonic detect: URPA operates only at speeds less Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, . Objects that are below the than 5 mph (8 km/h). it operates at speeds less than bumper, underneath the 8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the An obstacle is indicated by audible vehicle, or if they are too driver with parking and avoiding beeps. The interval between the close or far from the vehicle objects while in R (Reverse). The beeps becomes shorter as the sensors on the rear bumper are . Children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. used to detect the distance to an bicyclists, or pets. When the distance is less than object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the 30 cm (12 in) the beeps are If you do not use proper care continuous. vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) before and while backing; vehicle off the ground. damage, injury, or death could To be detected, objects must be at occur. Even with URPA, always least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects check behind the vehicle before must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from backing up. While backing, be the rear bumper. This distance may sure to look for objects and check be less during warmer or humid the vehicle's mirrors. weather. 9-36 Driving and Operating

The system can be disabled through . A trailer was attached to the Rear Vision vehicle, or a bicycle or an object the Driver Information Center (DIC). Camera (RVC) See “Park Assist” under Vehicle was hanging out of the liftgate Personalization (With DIC Buttons) during the last drive cycle. Once The vehicle may have a Rear Vision on page 5‑45 for more information. the attached object is removed, Camera system. Read this entire URPA will return to normal section before using it. When the System Does Not operation. Seem to Work Properly . A tow bar is attached to the { WARNING If the URPA system does not vehicle. activate due to a temporary The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . The vehicle's bumper is condition, the message PARK damaged. Take the vehicle to system does not replace driver ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC your dealer/retailer to repair the vision. RVC does not: when the shift lever is moved into system. . Detect objects that are R (Reverse). This may occur under outside the camera's field of the following conditions: . Other conditions may affect system performance, such as view, below the bumper, . The driver disables the system. vibrations from a jackhammer or or underneath the vehicle. . The ultrasonic sensors are not the compression of air brakes on . Detect children, pedestrians, clean. Keep the vehicle's rear a very large truck. bicyclists, or pets. bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, If the system is still disabled, after Do not back the vehicle by only ice and slush. For cleaning driving forward at least 25 km/h instructions, see Exterior Care looking at the RVC screen, or use (15 mph), take the vehicle to your the screen during longer, higher on page 10‑86. dealer/retailer. speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross-traffic. (Continued) Driving and Operating 9-37

Vehicles Without Navigation Turning the Rear Vision Camera WARNING (Continued) System System Off or On Your judged distances using the The rear vision camera system is To turn off the rear vision camera screen will differ from actual designed to help the driver when system, press and hold z , located distances. backing up by displaying a view on the inside rearview mirror, until of the area behind the vehicle. the left indicator light turns off. The So if you do not use proper care When the key is in the ON/RUN rear vision camera display is now before backing up, you could position and the driver shifts the disabled. hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, vehicle into R (Reverse), the video To turn the rear vision camera bicyclist, or pet, resulting in image automatically appears on the system on again, press and vehicle damage, injury, or death. inside rear view mirror. Once the Even though the vehicle has driver shifts out of R (Reverse), hold z until the left indicator light the RVC system, always check the video image automatically illuminates. The rear vision camera carefully before backing up by disappears from the inside rear system display is now enabled and checking behind and around the view mirror. the display will appear in the mirror vehicle. normally. 9-38 Driving and Operating

Vehicles With Navigation 3. Select the Rear Camera Options The delay that is received after System screen button. The Rear Camera shifting out of R (Reverse) is Options screen displays. approximately 10 seconds. The rear vision camera system is The delay can be cancelled by designed to help the driver when performing one of the following: backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. . Pressing a hard key on the When the driver shifts the vehicle navigation system. into R (Reverse), the video image . Shifting in to P (Park). automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver . Reach a vehicle speed of shifts out of R (Reverse), the 5 mph (8 km/h). navigation screen will go back to the There is a message on the rear last screen that had been displayed, vision camera screen that states after a delay. “Check Surroundings for Safety”. Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On or Off 4. Select the Video screen button. To turn the rear vision camera When the Video screen button system on or off: is highlighted the RVC system is on. 1. Shift into P (Park). 2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options, then press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button. Driving and Operating 9-39

Adjusting the Brightness and Symbols To turn the symbols on or off: Contrast of the Screen The navigation system may have 1. Make sure that URPA has not To adjust the brightness and a feature that lets the driver view been disabled. contrast of the screen, press the symbols on the navigation screen 2. Shift into P (Park). MENU button while the rear vision while using the rear vision camera. camera image is on the display. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist 3. Press the MENU hard key to Any adjustments made will only (URPA) system must not be enter the configure menu affect the rear vision camera screen. disabled to use the caution symbols. options, then press the MENU hard key repeatedly until Display ] (Brightness) : Touch the If URPA has been disabled and the symbols have been turned on, is selected or touch the Display + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons screen button. to increase or decrease the the Rear Parking Assist Symbols brightness of the screen. Unavailable error message may 4. Select the Rear Camera Options _ display. See Ultrasonic Parking screen button. The Rear Camera (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus) Assist on page 9‑35. Options screen will display. or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast The symbols appear when an object 5. Touch the Symbols screen of the screen. has been detected by the URPA button. The screen button will be system. The symbol may cover the highlighted when on. object when viewing the navigation screen. 9-40 Driving and Operating

Rear Vision Camera Error Rear Vision Camera Location The area displayed by the camera Messages is limited and does not display Service Rear Vision Camera objects that are close to either System: This message can display corner or under the bumper. when the system is not receiving The area displayed can vary information it requires from other depending on vehicle orientation vehicle systems. or road conditions. The distance of the image that appears on the If any other problem occurs or if a screen differs from the actual problem persists, see your dealer/ distance. retailer. The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides.

The camera is located above the license plate. Driving and Operating 9-41

When the System Does Not . Ice, snow, mud, or anything else Seem To Work Properly builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with The rear vision camera system water, and wipe it with a soft might not work properly or display cloth. a clear image if: . The back of the vehicle is in . The RVC is turned off. an accident, the position and See “Turning the Rear Camera mounting angle of the camera System On or Off” earlier in this can change or the camera can section. be affected. Be sure to have the . It is dark. camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your . The sun or the beam of dealer/retailer. headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. . There are extreme temperature changes.

A. View displayed by the camera. B. Corner of the rear bumper. 9-42 Driving and Operating

The rear vision camera system The fast flash conditions are Fuel display in the rearview mirror used to protect the video may turn off or not appear as device from high temperature Use of the recommended fuel is expected due to one of the following conditions. Once conditions an important part of the proper conditions. If this occurs the left return to normal the device will maintenance of this vehicle. To help indicator light on the mirror will reset and the green indicator keep the engine clean and maintain flash. will stop flashing. optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline . A slow flash may indicate a During any of these fault conditions, advertised as TOP TIER Detergent loss of video signal, or no video the display will be blank and the Gasoline. signal present during the reverse indicator will continue to flash as cycle. long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) Look for the TOP TIER label on the or until the conditions return to fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets . A fast flash may indicate that enhanced detergency standards the display has been on for the normal. developed by auto companies. A list maximum allowable time during Pressing and holding z when the of marketers providing TOP TIER a reverse cycle, or the display left indicator light is flashing will turn Detergent Gasoline can be found at has reached an Over off the video display along with the www.toptiergas.com. Temperature limit. left indicator light. Driving and Operating 9-43

Recommended Fuel California Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline with Requirements a posted octane rating of 87 or If the vehicle is certified to meet higher. If the octane rating is less California Emissions Standards, than 87, an audible knocking noise, it is designed to operate on fuels commonly referred to as spark that meet California specifications. knock, might be heard when driving. See the underhood emission control If this occurs, use a gasoline rated label. If this fuel is not available in at 87 octane or higher as soon as states adopting California emissions possible. If heavy knocking is heard standards, the vehicle will operate when using gasoline rated at satisfactorily on fuels meeting 87 octane or higher, the engine federal specifications, but emission needs service. control system performance might be affected. The malfunction Gasoline Specifications indicator lamp could turn on and the At a minimum, gasoline vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. should meet ASTM specification See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on D 4814 in the United States or page 5‑17. If this occurs, return to CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. your authorized dealer/retailer for Some gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the octane-enhancing additive called condition is caused by the type of methylcyclopentadienyl manganese fuel used, repairs might not be tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend covered by the vehicle warranty. against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel Additives on page 9‑44 for additional information. 9-44 Driving and Operating

Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel If you plan on driving in another in the United States are now System Treatment PLUS, added country outside the United States required to contain additives that to the fuel tank at every engine oil or Canada, the proper fuel might help prevent engine and fuel system change, can help clean deposits be hard to find. Never use leaded deposits from forming, allowing the from fuel injectors and intake gasoline or any other fuel not emission control system to work valves. GM Fuel System Treatment recommended in the previous text properly. In most cases, nothing PLUS is the only gasoline additive on fuel. Costly repairs caused by should have to be added to the fuel. recommended by General Motors. use of improper fuel would not be However, some gasolines contain It is available at your dealer/retailer. covered by the vehicle warranty. only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates, To check the fuel availability, ask Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and an auto club, or contact a major oil regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might company that does business in the injectors and intake valves clean, be available in your area. We country where you will be driving. or if the vehicle experiences recommend that you use these problems due to dirty injectors or gasolines, if they comply with the valves, look for gasoline that is specifications described earlier. advertised as TOP TIER Detergent However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER other fuels containing more than label on the fuel pump to ensure 10% ethanol must not be used in gasoline meets enhanced vehicles that were not designed for detergency standards developed those fuels. by the auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at www.toptiergas.com. Driving and Operating 9-45

Notice: This vehicle was not Filling the Tank To open the fuel door, push the designed for fuel that contains rearward center edge in and release methanol. Do not use fuel and it will open. containing methanol. It can { WARNING corrode metal parts in the fuel Fuel vapor burns violently and a system and also damage plastic fuel fire can cause bad injuries. and rubber parts. That damage To help avoid injuries to you and would not be covered under the vehicle warranty. others, read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump Some gasolines that are island. Turn off the engine when not reformulated for low refueling. Do not smoke near fuel emissions can contain an or when refueling the vehicle. octane-enhancing additive Do not use cellular phones. Keep called methylcyclopentadienyl sparks, flames, and smoking manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); materials away from fuel. Do not ask the attendant where you buy leave the fuel pump unattended gasoline whether the fuel contains To remove the fuel cap, turn it MMT. We recommend against when refueling the vehicle. This is slowly counterclockwise. The fuel the use of such gasolines. Fuels against the law in some places. cap has a spring in it; if the cap is containing MMT can reduce the life Do not re-enter the vehicle while released too soon, it will spring back of spark plugs and the performance pumping fuel. Keep children away to the right. of the emission control system from the fuel pump; never let could be affected. The malfunction children pump fuel. indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer The tethered fuel cap is located for service. behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle. 9-46 Driving and Operating

While refueling, hang the tethered Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not fuel cap from the hook on the top off or overfill the tank and wait { WARNING fuel door. a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the { WARNING the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel Fuel can spray out on you if you See Exterior Care on page 10‑86. by shutting off the pump or by open the fuel cap too quickly. notifying the station attendant. When replacing the fuel cap, turn Leave the area immediately. If you spill fuel and then it clockwise until it clicks. Make something ignites it, you could sure the cap is fully installed. Notice: If a new fuel cap is be badly burned. This spray can The diagnostic system can needed, be sure to get the right happen if the tank is nearly full, determine if the fuel cap has been type of cap from your dealer/ and is more likely in hot weather. left off or improperly installed. This retailer. The wrong type fuel cap Open the fuel cap slowly and wait would allow fuel to evaporate into might not fit properly, might for any hiss noise to stop. Then the atmosphere. See Malfunction cause the malfunction indicator unscrew the cap all the way. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17. lamp to light, and could damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 5‑17. Driving and Operating 9-47

Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing Container . Bring the fill nozzle in contact General Towing { WARNING with the inside of the fill Information opening before operating the Only use towing equipment that Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be while it is in the vehicle. Static has been designed for the vehicle. maintained until the filling is Contact your dealer/retailer or electricity discharge from the complete. container can ignite the fuel trailering retailer for assistance with vapor. You can be badly burned . Do not smoke while preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer. and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel. occurs. To help avoid injury to . Do not use a cellular phone See the following trailer towing you and others: while pumping fuel. information in this section: . Dispense fuel only into . For information on driving while approved containers. towing a trailer, see “Driving Characteristics and . Do not fill a container while Towing Tips”. it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, . For maximum vehicle and trailer or on any surface other than weights, see “Trailer Towing”. the ground. . For information on equipment (Continued) to tow a trailer, see “Towing Equipment”. 9-48 Driving and Operating

For information on towing a disabled The following information has vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on WARNING (Continued) important trailering tips and rules page 10‑83. For information on for your safety and that of your towing the vehicle behind another repairs would not be covered by passengers. Read this section vehicle — such as a motorhome, the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer carefully before pulling a trailer. see Recreational Vehicle Towing on only if all the steps in this section page 10‑83. have been followed. Ask your Pulling A Trailer dealer/retailer for advice and Here are some important points: Driving Characteristics information about towing a trailer . There are many laws, including and Towing Tips with the vehicle. speed limit restrictions that apply to trailering. Check for legal The vehicle can tow a trailer when { WARNING requirements with state or equipped with the proper trailer provincial police. towing equipment. For trailering The driver can lose control when capacity, see Trailer Towing on . Consider using sway control. pulling a trailer if the correct page 9‑53. Trailering changes See Towing Equipment on equipment is not used or the handling, acceleration, braking, page 9‑57. vehicle is not driven properly. durability and fuel economy. . Do not tow a trailer at all during For example, if the trailer is too With the added weight, the engine, the first 800 km (500 miles) heavy, the brakes may not work transmission, wheel assemblies and the new vehicle is driven. well — or even at all. The driver tires are forced to work harder and The engine, axle or other and passengers could be under greater loads. The trailer also parts could be damaged. seriously injured. The vehicle may adds wind resistance, increasing also be damaged; the resulting the pulling requirements. For safe (Continued) trailering, correctly use the proper trailering equipment. Driving and Operating 9-49

. During the first 800 km Check all trailer hitch parts and Tow/Haul Mode (500 miles) that a trailer is attachments, safety chains, Tow/Haul assists when pulling a towed, do not drive over electrical connectors, lamps, tires heavy trailer or a large or heavy 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not and mirror adjustments. If the trailer load. The purpose of the Tow/Haul make starts at full throttle. This has electric brakes, start the vehicle mode is to: reduces wear on the vehicle. and trailer moving and then apply . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). the trailer brake controller by hand . Reduce the frequency and Use a lower gear if the to be sure the brakes are working. improve the predictability of transmission shifts. transmission shifts too often. During the trip, check regularly to be See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in sure that the load is secure, and the . Provide the same solid shift feel this section. lamps and trailer brakes are working as when the vehicle is unloaded. . Obey speed limit restrictions properly. . Improve control of vehicle speed when towing a trailer. Towing with a Stability Control while requiring less throttle pedal . The vehicle is designed primarily System activity. as a passenger and load . Increase the charging system carrying vehicle. If a trailer is When towing, the sound of the stability control system might be voltage to assist in recharging a towed, the vehicle will require battery installed in a trailer. more frequent maintenance due heard. The system is reacting to the to the additional load. vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during Driving with a Trailer cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers. Towing a trailer requires experience. Get familiar with handling and braking with the added trailer weight. The vehicle is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself. 9-50 Driving and Operating

Tow/Haul is designed to be most Following Distance effective when the vehicle and Stay at least twice as far behind the trailer combined weight is at least vehicle ahead as you would when 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross driving the vehicle without a trailer. Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). This can help to avoid situations See Trailer Towing on page 9 53. ‑ that require heavy braking and Press this button located on the Tow/Haul is most useful when sudden turns. console to turn on and turn off the pulling a heavy trailer or a large or Tow/Haul mode. heavy load under the following Passing driving conditions: The Tow/Haul light on the More passing distance is needed instrument panel comes on to . Travelling through rolling terrain. when towing a trailer. Because the indicate that Tow/Haul mode has . Travelling in stop and go traffic. rig is longer, it is necessary to go been selected. farther beyond the passed vehicle . Travelling in busy parking lots before returning to the lane. Tow/Haul may be turned off by where improved low speed pressing the button again, at which control of the vehicle is desired. Backing Up time the indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off. The Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul Hold the bottom of the steering vehicle will automatically turn off when lightly loaded or with no trailer wheel with one hand. To move the Tow/Haul every time it is started. will not cause damage but there is trailer to the left, move that hand to no benefit. Such a selection when the left. To move the trailer to the unloaded may result in unpleasant right, move your hand to the right. engine and transmission driving Always back up slowly and, characteristics and reduced fuel if possible, have someone economy. guide you. Driving and Operating 9-51

Making Turns Turn Signals When Towing a The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). Use a lower gear if the transmission Notice: Making very sharp turns Trailer shifts too often. while trailering could cause the The turn signal indicators on the trailer to come in contact with the instrument panel flash whenever When towing at high altitude on vehicle. The vehicle could be signaling a turn or lane change. steep uphill grades, engine coolant damaged. Avoid making very Properly hooked up, the trailer will boil at a lower temperature than sharp turns while trailering. lamps also flash, telling other at normal altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing When turning with a trailer, make drivers the vehicle is turning, at high altitude on steep uphill wider turns than normal so the changing lanes or stopping. grades, the vehicle may show trailer will not strike soft shoulders, When towing a trailer, the arrows on signs similar to engine overheating. curbs, road signs, trees or other the instrument panel flash for turns To avoid this, let the engine run objects. Use the turn signal well in even if the bulbs on the trailer are while parked, preferably on level advance and avoid jerky or sudden burned out. Check occasionally to ground, with the transmission in maneuvers. be sure the trailer bulbs are still P (Park) for a few minutes before working. turning the engine off. If the Driving On Grades overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 10‑18. Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down On a long uphill grade, shift down a long or steep downgrade. If the and reduce the vehicle speed to transmission is not shifted down, around 88 km/h (55 mph) to reduce the brakes might have to be used the possibility of the engine and the so much that they would get hot and transmission overheating. no longer work well. 9-52 Driving and Operating

Parking on Hills If parking the rig on a hill: Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Press the brake pedal, but do 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal { WARNING not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn while you: the wheels into the curb if facing . Start the engine. Parking the vehicle on a hill with downhill or into traffic if facing the trailer attached can be uphill. . Shift into a gear. dangerous. If something goes 2. Have someone place chocks . Release the parking brake. wrong, the rig could start to move. under the trailer wheels. People can be injured, and both 2. Let up on the brake pedal. the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. When the wheel chocks are in 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is damaged. When possible, always place, release the brake pedal clear of the chocks. park the rig on a flat surface. until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Stop and have someone pick up 4. Reapply the brake pedal. and store the chocks. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). 5. Release the brake pedal. Driving and Operating 9-53

Maintenance When Trailer Engine Cooling When Trailer Weight of the Trailer Towing Towing How heavy can a trailer safely be? The vehicle needs service more The cooling system may temporarily Speed, altitude, road grades, often when pulling a trailer. See this overheat during severe operating outside temperature, special manual's Maintenance Schedule or conditions. See Engine Overheating equipment, and the amount of Index for more information. Things on page 10‑18. tongue weight the vehicle can carry that are especially important in must be considered. See “Weight trailer operation are automatic Trailer Towing of the Trailer Tongue” later in this transmission fluid, engine oil, axle section for more information. lubricant, belts, cooling system and Three important considerations brake system. Inspect these before have to do with weight: Maximum trailer weight is calculated and during the trip. . The weight of the trailer assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the Check periodically to see that all . The weight of the trailer tongue required trailering equipment. hitch nuts and bolts are tight. . The total weight on the vehicle's The weight of additional optional tires equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. 9-54 Driving and Operating

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR Front‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) Front‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg) All‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) All‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg) *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our Weight of the Trailer Tongue If there are a lot of options, trailering information or advice. See equipment, passengers or cargo in The tongue load (A) of any trailer is Customer Assistance Offices on the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue an important weight to measure page 13 4 for more information. weight the vehicle can carry, which ‑ because it affects the total gross will also reduce the trailer weight the weight of the vehicle. The Gross vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the the tongue load must be added to curb weight of the vehicle, any the GVW because the vehicle will cargo carried in it, and the people be carrying that weight, too. See who will be riding in the vehicle. Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12 Driving and Operating 9-55

proper. If they are not, adjustments Combination Weight Rating) of might be made by moving some 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailer items around in the trailer. rating should be: Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the Expect tongue weight to be at least trailering capacity more than the 10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg If a weight-carrying hitch or a total of the additional weight. (850 lbs)) and because the weight is weight-distributing hitch is being applied well behind the rear axle, Consider the following example: used, the trailer tongue (A) should the effect on the rear axle is greater weigh 10‐15 percent of the total A vehicle model base weight is than just the weight itself, as much loaded trailer weight (B). 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg as 1.5 times as much. The weight (2,800 lbs) at the front axle and After loading the trailer, weigh at the rear axle could be 386 kg 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rear the trailer and then the tongue, (850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs). axle. It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg separately, to see if the weights are Since the rear axle already weighs (7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg 1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg (4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (Gross (1,275 lbs) brings the total to 1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs). 9-56 Driving and Operating

If the vehicle has many options and exceeding GVWR. But the effect Total Weight on the Vehicle's there is a front seat passenger and on the rear axle must still be Tires two rear seat passengers with some considered. Because the rear axle luggage and gear in the vehicle as now weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs), Inflate the vehicle's tires to the well. 136 kg (300 lbs) could be 408 kg (900 lbs) can be put on upper limit for cold tires. These added to the front axle weight and the rear axle without exceeding numbers can be found on the 181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axle RGAWR. The effect of tongue Certification label or see Vehicle weight. The vehicle now weighs: weight is about 1.5 times the actual Load Limits on page 9‑12 for more weight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs) information. Do not go over the by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs) GVW limit for the vehicle, or the of tongue weight that can be GAWR, including the weight of the handled. Since tongue weight is trailer tongue. If using a weight usually at least 10 percent of total distributing hitch, do not go over the loaded trailer weight, expect that rear axle limit before applying the the largest trailer the vehicle can weight distribution spring bars. Weight is still below 3 266 kg properly handle is 2 722 kg (7,200 lbs) and you might think (6,000 lbs). 318 additional kilograms (700 lbs) It is important that the vehicle should be subtracted from the does not exceed any of its trailering capacity to stay within ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, GCWR limits. The maximum trailer Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue would only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs). Weight. The only way to be sure it is You may go further and think the not exceeding any of these ratings tongue weight should be limited to is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. less than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) to avoid Driving and Operating 9-57

Towing Equipment Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Weight Carrying Hitches Hitches Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the It is important to have the correct safety chains under the tongue of hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large the trailer to help prevent the tongue trucks going by and rough roads are from contacting the road if it a few reasons why the right hitch is becomes separated from the hitch. needed. Always leave just enough slack so . The rear bumper on the vehicle the rig can turn. Never allow safety is not intended for hitches. Do chains to drag on the ground. not attach rental hitches or other Trailer Brakes bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that A loaded trailer that weighs more does not attach to the bumper. than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to have its own brake system that is . A. Body-to-Ground Distance Will any holes be made in the adequate for the weight of the body of the vehicle when the B. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow trailer hitch is installed? If there the instructions for the trailer brakes are, then be sure to seal the When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so so they are installed, adjusted and holes when the hitch is removed. maintained properly. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, that the distance (A) remains the water, and deadly carbon same both before and after coupling Because the vehicle has antilock monoxide (CO) from the exhaust the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the may get into the vehicle. See vehicle's hydraulic brake system. Engine Exhaust on page 9‑23. If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. 9-58 Driving and Operating

Trailer Wiring Harness *The fuse for this circuit is installed Electric Trailer Brake Control in the underhood electrical center, Wiring Provisions Basic Trailer Wiring but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an The trailer wiring harness, with a They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller are seven-pin connector, is located at dealer/retailer or a qualified service included with the vehicle as part of the rear of the vehicle and is tied to center. the trailer wiring package. The the vehicle's frame. The harness If the back-up lamp circuit is not instrument panel contains blunt cut connector can be plugged into a functional, contact your dealer/ wires behind the steering column for seven-pin universal heavy-duty retailer. the electric trailer brake controller. trailer connector available through The harness contains the following your dealer/retailer. If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is being charged, press the Tow/Haul wires: The seven-wire harness contains mode switch located on the center . Red/Black: Power Supply the following trailer circuits: console near the climate controls. . White: Brake Switch Signal . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal This will boost the vehicle system voltage and properly charge the . Gray: Illumination . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn battery. If the trailer is too light for Signal . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal Tow/Haul mode, turn on the . . Brown: Taillamps headlamps (Non‐HID only) as a Black: Ground . Black: Ground second way to boost the vehicle The electric trailer brake controller system and charge the battery. should be installed by your dealer/ . Light Green: Back-up Lamps retailer or a qualified service center. . Red/Black: Battery Feed . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* Driving and Operating 9-59

Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is Add-Ons not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑44 and Adding electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped you check with your dealer/ Vehicle on page 3‑44. retailer first. Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. 9-60 Driving and Operating

2 NOTES Vehicle Care 10-1

Cooling System ...... 10-14 Bulb Replacement Vehicle Care Engine Coolant ...... 10-14 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Engine Overheating ...... 10-18 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 General Information Overheated Engine License Plate Lamp ...... 10-29 Protection Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-29 General Information ...... 10-2 Operating Mode ...... 10-20 California Proposition Power Steering Fluid ...... 10-20 Electrical System 65 Warning ...... 10-3 Washer Fluid ...... 10-21 High Voltage Devices and California Perchlorate Brakes ...... 10-22 Wiring ...... 10-29 Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brake Fluid ...... 10-23 Electrical System Accessories and Battery ...... 10-25 Overload ...... 10-30 Modifications ...... 10-3 All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-25 Fuses and Circuit Vehicle Checks Starter Switch Check ...... 10-26 Breakers ...... 10-30 Engine Compartment Fuse Doing Your Own Automatic Transmission Shift Block ...... 10-30 Service Work ...... 10-4 Lock Control System Instrument Panel Fuse Hood ...... 10-5 Check ...... 10-26 Block ...... 10-34 Engine Compartment Ignition Transmission Lock Overview ...... 10-6 Check ...... 10-26 Wheels and Tires Park Brake and P (Park) Engine Cover ...... 10-7 Tires ...... 10-36 Mechanism Check ...... 10-27 Engine Oil ...... 10-8 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-37 Wiper Blade Engine Oil Life System ...... 10-9 Tire Designations ...... 10-39 Replacement ...... 10-27 Automatic Transmission Tire Terminology and Fluid ...... 10-11 Headlamp Aiming Definitions ...... 10-40 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-28 Tire Pressure ...... 10-43 10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure Monitor Storing the Tire Sealant and General Information System ...... 10-44 Compressor Kit ...... 10-66 Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Changing ...... 10-67 For service and parts needs, visit Operation ...... 10-46 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-76 your dealer/retailer. You will receive Tire Inspection ...... 10-49 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-77 genuine GM parts and GM-trained Tire Rotation ...... 10-49 and supported service people. When It Is Time for New Jump Starting Jump Starting ...... 10-79 Genuine GM parts have one of Tires ...... 10-51 these marks: Buying New Tires ...... 10-51 Towing Different Size Tires and Towing the Vehicle ...... 10-83 Wheels ...... 10-53 Recreational Vehicle Uniform Tire Quality Towing ...... 10-83 Grading ...... 10-54 Wheel Alignment and Tire Appearance Care Balance ...... 10-55 Exterior Care ...... 10-86 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-56 Interior Care ...... 10-90 Tire Chains ...... 10-57 Floor Mats ...... 10-93 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-57 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...... 10-59 Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and 65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag accessories to the vehicle can affect known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, vehicle performance and safety, cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in including such things as airbags, other reproductive harm. Engine remote keyless transmitters, may braking, stability, ride and handling, exhaust, many parts and systems, contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics, many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control, emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these perchlorate. accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. 10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle components Vehicle Checks resulting from the installation or use WARNING (Continued) of non‐GM certified parts, including control module modifications, is not Doing Your Own . Be sure to use the proper covered under the terms of the Service Work nuts, bolts, and other vehicle warranty and may affect fasteners. English and remaining warranty coverage for { WARNING metric fasteners can be affected parts. easily confused. If the wrong GM Accessories are designed to You can be injured and the fasteners are used, parts complement and function with other vehicle could be damaged if you can later break or fall off. systems on the vehicle. Your GM try to do service work on a vehicle You could be hurt. dealer/retailer can accessorize without knowing enough about it. If doing some of your own service the vehicle using genuine GM . Be sure you have sufficient work, use the proper service Accessories. When you go to your knowledge, experience, manual. It tells you much more GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM the proper replacement about how to service the vehicle Accessories, you will know that parts, and tools before than this manual can. To order the GM-trained and supported service attempting any vehicle proper service manual, see Service technicians will perform the work maintenance task. using genuine GM Accessories. Publications Ordering Information on (Continued) page 13‑13. Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3‑44. Vehicle Care 10-5

This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood 3. After you have partially lifted Before attempting to do your own the hood, gas struts will service work, see Airbag System To open the hood, do the following: automatically take over to lift Check on page 3‑45. and hold the hood in the fully Keep a record with all parts receipts open position. and list the mileage and the date Before closing the hood, be sure all of any service work performed. filler caps are on properly. See Maintenance Records on Pull the hood down to close. Lower page 11‑11. the hood until the lifting pressure 1. Pull the hood release handle of the strut is reduced. Then allow with this symbol on it. It is the hood to fall and latch into place located under the instrument under its own weight. Check to panel on the driver's side of the make sure the hood is closed. If the vehicle. hood does not fully latch, gently 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull push the hood down at the front up on the center of the hood, and center of the hood until it is and push the secondary hood completely latched. release to the right. 10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap . H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7. Engine Cover See Cooling System on I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See page 10 14. ‑ “Checking Engine Oil” under B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. Engine Oil on page 10‑8. See Cooling System on J. Automatic Transmission Fluid page 10 14. ‑ Dipstick. See “Checking the C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Fluid Level” under Automatic See Jump Starting on Transmission Fluid on page 10‑79. page 10‑11. D. Engine Compartment Fuse K. Brake Master Cylinder Block on page 10‑30. Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. under Brakes on page 10‑22. See Jump Starting on L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑79. page 10‑12. A. Oil Fill Cap F. Power Steering Reservoir and M. Windshield Washer Fluid B. Engine Cover Cap (under engine cover). Reservoir. See “Adding Washer To remove: See Power Steering Fluid on Fluid under Washer Fluid on ” 1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). page 10‑20. page 10‑21. 2. Raise the engine cover (B) to G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When “ release from the retainers. to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 10‑8. 3. Lift and remove the engine cover. 4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall engine cover. 10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil Checking Engine Oil that the oil level gets above the It is a good idea to check the engine cross-hatched area that shows oil level at each fuel fill. In order to the proper operating range, the get an accurate reading, the oil engine could be damaged. must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle If the oil is below the cross-hatched is a yellow loop. See Engine area at the tip of the dipstick, Compartment Overview on add at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, See Engine Compartment Overview 1. Turn off the engine and give the see Capacities and Specifications on page 10‑6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. oil several minutes to drain back on page 12‑2. into the oil pan. If this is not Add enough oil to put the level done, the oil dipstick might not somewhere in the proper operating show the actual level. range in the cross-hatched area. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean Push the dipstick all the way back in it with a paper towel or cloth, when through. then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. Vehicle Care 10-9

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use This symbol indicates that Engine Oil Additives / Engine the oil has been certified by Look for three things: Oil Flushes the American Petroleum . GM6094M Institute (API). Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the Use only an oil that meets Notice: Use only engine oil starburst symbol that meet GM GM Standard GM6094M. identified as meeting GM standards are all that is needed . SAE 5W-30 Standard GM6094M and showing for good performance and engine the American Petroleum Institute protection. SAE 5W-30 is best for the Certified For Gasoline Engines vehicle. These numbers on an starburst symbol. Failure to use Engine oil system flushes are not oil container show its viscosity, the recommended oil can result recommended and could cause or thickness. Do not use in engine damage not covered by engine damage not covered by the other viscosity oils such as the vehicle warranty. vehicle warranty. SAE 20W-50. Cold Temperature Operation Engine Oil Life System . American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol If in an area of extreme cold, When to Change Engine Oil where the temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either This vehicle has a computer system an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an that indicates when to change the SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide engine oil and filter. This is based easier cold starting for the engine at on engine revolutions and engine extremely low temperatures. Always temperature, and not on mileage. use an oil that meets the required Based on driving conditions, the Oils meeting these requirements specification, GM6094M. See “What mileage at which an oil change is should have the starburst Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for more indicated can vary considerably. symbol on the container. information. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. 10-10 Vehicle Care

When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. that oil life has been diminished, Life System If the “Change Engine Oil Soon” it indicates that an oil change is The Engine Oil Life System message comes back on when necessary. A “Change Engine Oil calculates when to change the the vehicle is started, the engine Soon” message comes on. Change engine oil and filter based on oil life system has not reset. the oil as soon as possible within Repeat the procedure. the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is vehicle use. Whenever the oil is possible that, if driving under the changed, reset the system so it can If the vehicle has Driver Information best conditions, the oil life system calculate when the next oil change Center (DIC) buttons: might not indicate that an oil change is required. If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, is necessary for over a year. with the engine off. However, the engine oil and filter “Change Engine Oil Soon” message must be changed at least once a being turned on, reset the system. 2. Press the vehicle information year and at this time the system If the vehicle does not have Driver button until “Oil Life Remaining” must be reset. Your dealer/retailer Information Center (DIC) buttons: displays. has trained service people who will 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, 3. Press and hold the set/reset perform this work using genuine with the engine off. The vehicle button until “100%” is displayed. parts and reset the system. It is also must be in P (Park) to access Three chimes sound and the important to check the oil regularly this display. Press the trip “Change Engine Oil Soon” and keep it at the proper level. odometer reset stem until message goes off. If the system is ever reset “Oil Life Remaining” displays. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. accidentally, the oil must be 2. Press and hold the trip odometer changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) If the “Change Engine Oil Soon” reset stem until Oil Life since the last oil change. “ message comes back on when the Remaining shows 100%. Remember to reset the oil life ” “ ” vehicle is started, the engine oil life Three chimes sound and the system whenever the oil is changed. system has not reset. Repeat the “Change Engine Oil Soon” procedure. message goes off. Vehicle Care 10-11

What to Do with Used Oil Automatic Transmission Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may Used engine oil contains certain Fluid damage the vehicle, and the elements that can be unhealthy for It is not necessary to check damages may not be covered by your skin and could even cause the transmission fluid level. the vehicle's warranty. Always cancer. Do not let used oil stay on A transmission fluid leak is the use the automatic transmission your skin for very long. Clean your only reason for fluid loss. If a leak fluid listed in Recommended skin and nails with soap and water, occurs, take the vehicle to the Fluids and Lubricants on or a good hand cleaner. Wash or dealer/retailer and have it repaired page 11 8. properly dispose of clothing or rags ‑ as soon as possible. containing used engine oil. See the The transmission fluid will not manufacturer's warnings about the Change the fluid at the intervals reach the end of the dipstick unless use and disposal of oil products. listed in Scheduled Maintenance on the transmission is at operating page 11 2, and be sure to use temperature. If you need to check Used oil can be a threat to the ‑ the transmission fluid listed in the transmission fluid level, please environment. If you change your Recommended Fluids and take the vehicle to your dealer/ own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Lubricants on page 11 8. retailer. from the filter before disposal. Never ‑ dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. 10-12 Vehicle Care

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the and lightly shake the filter (away Maintenance II intervals and replace from vehicle) to release loose dust it at the first oil change after each and dirt. If the filter remains caked 80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval. with dirt, a new filter is required. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 11 2 for more information. To inspect or replace the engine air ‑ cleaner/filter, do the following: If driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil 1. Remove the engine cover. A. Ventilation Tube change. See Engine Cover on B. Sensor See Engine Compartment Overview page 10‑7. on page 10‑6 for the location of the 2. Disconnect the cover fitting from engine air cleaner/filter. the ventilation tube (A). 3. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the sensor (B). Vehicle Care 10-13

6. Remove the housing cover (C) with outlet duct. { WARNING 7. Remove the filter (D) and any Operating the engine with the air loose debris that may be found cleaner/filter off can cause you in the base (E). or others to be burned. The air 8. Inspect or replace the filter (D). cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine 9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 to reinstall the housing cover and backfires. Use caution when reconnect the electrical working on the engine and do not connector to the sensor. drive with the air cleaner/filter off. A. Clamp 10. Reinstall the engine cover. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is See Engine Cover on off, dirt can easily get into the B. Screws page 10‑7. engine, which could damage it. C. Housing Cover Always have the air cleaner/filter D. Filter in place when you are driving. E. Base 4. Loosen the outlet duct clamp (A). 5. Loosen the six housing cover (C) screws (B). 10-14 Vehicle Care

Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other { WARNING than DEX-COOL® can cause The cooling system allows the premature engine, heater core, engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition, working temperature. under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require when the engine is not running changing sooner, at 50 000 km and can cause injury. Keep (30,000 miles) or 24 months, hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant { WARNING in the vehicle. Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle hot. Do not touch them. If you do, ® you can be burned. is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. The coolant is designed to A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank Do not run the engine if there is remain in the vehicle for five years a leak. If you run the engine, it or 240 000 km (150,000 miles), B. Radiator Pressure Cap could lose all coolant. That could whichever occurs first. C. Engine Cooling Fans cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 10‑18. Vehicle Care 10-15

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If an improper coolant drinkable water and DEX-COOL mixture is used, the engine could { WARNING coolant. If using this mixture, overheat and be badly damaged. nothing else needs to be added. The repair cost would not be Adding only plain water to This mixture: covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture the cooling system can be . Gives freezing protection down dangerous. Plain water, or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside can freeze and crack the engine, other liquid such as alcohol, can temperature. radiator, heater core, and other boil before the proper coolant parts. . Gives boiling protection up mixture will. The vehicle's coolant to 129°C (265°F), engine Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or warning system is set for the temperature. additives are used in the vehicle's proper coolant mixture. With plain cooling system, the vehicle water or the wrong mixture, the . Protects against rust and could be damaged. Use only the engine could get too hot but corrosion. proper mixture of the engine you would not get the overheat . Will not damage aluminum parts. coolant listed in this manual warning. The engine could catch for the cooling system. See . Helps keep the proper engine Recommended Fluids and fire and you or others could be temperature. burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of Lubricants on page 11‑8 for more information. clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. 10-16 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the The vehicle must be on a level Recovery Tank surface when checking the coolant level. { WARNING Check to see if coolant is visible in You can be burned if you spill the coolant recovery tank. If the The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on hot engine parts. coolant inside the coolant recovery this symbol on it. Coolant contains ethylene glycol tank is boiling, do not do anything When the engine is cold, the coolant and it will burn if the engine parts else until it cools down. If coolant is level should be at or above the are hot enough. Do not spill visible but the coolant level is not at FULL COLD line marked on the or above the FULL COLD mark, add coolant on a hot engine. recovery tank. a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Notice: This vehicle has a water and DEX-COOL coolant at the When the engine is hot, the specific coolant fill procedure. coolant recovery tank, but be sure level could be higher than the Failure to follow this procedure the cooling system is cool before FULL COLD line. If the coolant is could cause the engine to this is done. See Cooling System on below the FULL COLD line when overheat and be severely page 10‑14 for more information. the engine is hot, there could be a leak in the cooling system. damaged. If coolant is needed, add the proper If the coolant is low, add the ® coolant or take the vehicle to a DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the dealer/retailer for service. coolant recovery tank. Vehicle Care 10-17

How to Add Coolant to the 2. Remove the radiator pressure Radiator WARNING (Continued) cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator cooling system and surge tank hose, is no longer hot. { WARNING pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. Turn the pressure cap slowly An electric engine cooling fan counterclockwise about one full under the hood can start up even If coolant is needed, add the proper turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for when the engine is not running mixture directly to the radiator, but that to stop. A hiss means there and can cause injury. Keep be sure the cooling system is cool is still some pressure left in the hands, clothing, and tools away before this is done. system. from any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are 3. Keep turning the pressure cap under pressure, and if you turn slowly and remove it. the surge tank pressure 4. Fill the radiator to the base of cap — even a little — they can the filler neck with the proper come out at high speed. Never DEX-COOL coolant mixture. turn the cap when the cooling 5. When coolant begins to flow out system, including the surge tank 1. Detach fasteners and lift off of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the the panel that covers the pressure cap. Be sure to secure (Continued) radiator cap. it tightly. 10-18 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There is an engine coolant temperature gauge on the 6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to 8. Start the engine and let it run instrument panel cluster. the FULL COLD mark. until the upper radiator hose See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 5‑13. 7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant feels warm. Any time during this recovery tank but leave the procedure, watch out for the The vehicle may also display radiator pressure cap off. engine cooling fan(s). an ENGINE OVERHEATED 9. If the coolant level inside the IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE radiator filler neck is low, add OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE more of the proper DEX-COOL message in the Driver Information coolant mixture through the filler Center (DIC). See Warning Lights, neck until the level is back up Gauges, and Indicators on to the base of the filler neck. page 5‑10. Replace the pressure cap. You may decide not to lift the hood Be sure to secure it tightly. when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 13‑6. Vehicle Care 10-19

If you do decide to lift the hood , If Steam Is Coming From The make sure the vehicle is parked on Engine Compartment WARNING (Continued) a level surface. See Overheated Engine Then check to see if the engine { WARNING Protection Operating Mode on cooling fans are running. If the page 10‑20 for information on Steam from an overheated engine engine is overheating, both fans driving to a safe place in an can burn you badly, even if you should be running. If they are not, emergency. do not continue to run the engine just open the hood. Stay away and have the vehicle serviced. from the engine if you see or hear If No Steam Is Coming From Notice: Engine damage from steam coming from it. Turn it off The Engine Compartment running the engine without and get everyone away from the If an engine overheat warning is coolant is not covered by the vehicle until it cools down. Wait displayed but no steam can be seen warranty. until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open or heard, the problem may not be Notice: If the engine catches fire the hood. too serious. Sometimes the engine while driving with no coolant, the can get a little too hot when the vehicle can be badly damaged. If you keep driving when the vehicle: The costly repairs would not be vehicles engine is overheated, . Climbs a long hill on a hot day. covered by the vehicle warranty. the liquids in it can catch fire. See Overheated Engine You or others could be badly . Stops after high-speed driving. Protection Operating Mode on burned. Stop the engine if it . Idles for long periods in traffic. page 10‑20 for information on overheats, and get out of the . Tows a trailer. driving to a safe place in an vehicle until the engine is cool. emergency. (Continued) 10-20 Vehicle Care

If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle Notice: After driving in the with no sign of steam: the engine for three minutes while overheated engine protection 1. Turn the air conditioning off. parked. If the warning is still operating mode, to avoid engine displayed, turn off the engine until it damage, allow the engine to cool 2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated before attempting any repair. temperature and to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode” The engine oil will be severely fan speed. Open the windows as next in this section. degraded. Repair the cause of necessary. coolant loss, change the oil and 3. If in a traffic jam, shift to Overheated Engine reset the oil life system. See N (Neutral), otherwise, shift Protection Engine Oil on page 10‑8. to the highest gear while Operating Mode driving — D (Drive) or L (Low). Power Steering Fluid If the temperature overheat gauge This emergency operating mode lets is no longer in the overheat zone the vehicle be driven to a safe place or an overheat warning no longer in an emergency situation. If an displays, the vehicle can be driven. overheated engine condition exists, Continue to drive the vehicle slow an overheat protection mode which for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe alternates firing groups of cylinders vehicle distance from the car in front helps prevent engine damage. of you. If the warning does not come In this mode, there is a significant The power steering fluid reservoir is back on, continue to drive normally. loss in power and engine located under the engine cover on performance. The temperature the passenger side of the vehicle. If the warning continues, pull over, gauge indicates an overheat See Engine Compartment Overview stop, and park the vehicle condition exists. Driving extended on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. right away. distances and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. Vehicle Care 10-21

When to Check Power Steering 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Fluid dipstick with a clean rag. may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by It is not necessary to regularly 5. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. the vehicle's warranty. Always check power steering fluid unless use the correct fluid listed in you suspect there is a leak in the 6. Remove the cap again and look Recommended Fluids and system or you hear an unusual at the fluid level on the dipstick. Lubricants on page 11‑8. noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the The fluid level should be system inspected and repaired. somewhere between MAX and Washer Fluid MIN line on the dipstick in room How to Check Power Steering temperature. If the fluid is on or What to Use Fluid below MIN line, you should add When adding windshield washer fluid close to MAX Line. fluid, be sure to read the To check the power steering fluid: manufacturer's instructions before 1. Turn the key off and let the What to Use use. If the vehicle will be operating engine compartment cool down. To determine what kind of fluid to in an area where the temperature 2. Remove the engine cover. use, see Recommended Fluids and may fall below freezing, use a fluid See Engine Cover on Lubricants on page 11‑8. Always that has sufficient protection against freezing. page 10‑7. use the proper fluid. 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 10-22 Vehicle Care

Adding Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes When the windshield washer fluid . When using concentrated This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear LOW ADD FLUID message will be manufacturer's instructions indicators that make a high-pitched displayed on the Driver Information for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid . Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed. Messages on page 5‑44 for more ready-to-use washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be information. Water can cause the solution heard all the time the vehicle is to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly. parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as { WARNING well as washer fluid. The brake wear warning sound . Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full means that soon the brakes will Open the cap with the washer not work well. That could lead to symbol on it. Add washer fluid when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion an accident. When the brake until the tank is full. See Engine wear warning sound is heard, Compartment Overview on if freezing occurs, which have the vehicle serviced. page 10‑6 for reservoir location. could damage the tank if it is completely full. . Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle's windshield washer system and paint. Vehicle Care 10-23

Notice: Continuing to drive with Brake Pedal Travel For example, installing disc brake worn-out brake pads could result pads that are wrong for the vehicle, See your dealer/retailer if the brake in costly brake repair. can change the balance between pedal does not return to normal the front and rear brakes for the Some driving conditions or climates height, or if there is a rapid increase — worse. The braking performance can cause a brake squeal when the in pedal travel. This could be a expected can change in many other brakes are first applied or lightly sign that brake service might be ways if the wrong replacement applied. This does not mean required. something is wrong with the brakes. brake parts are installed. Brake Adjustment Properly torqued wheel nuts are Brake Fluid necessary to help prevent brake Every time the brakes are applied, pulsation. When tires are rotated, with or without the vehicle moving, inspect brake pads for wear and the brakes adjust for wear. evenly tighten wheel nuts in Replacing Brake System Parts the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and The braking system on a vehicle is Specifications on page 12‑2. complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together Brake linings should always be if the vehicle is to have really good The brake master cylinder reservoir replaced as complete axle sets. braking. The vehicle was designed is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as and tested with top-quality brake indicated on the reservoir cap. See parts. When parts of the braking Engine Compartment Overview on system are replaced, be sure to page 10‑6 for the location of the get new, approved replacement reservoir. parts. If this is not done, the brakes might not work properly. 10-24 Vehicle Care

There are only two reasons why the What to Add { WARNING brake fluid level in the reservoir Use only new DOT 3 brake might go down: If too much brake fluid is added, it fluid from a sealed container. . The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn, See Recommended Fluids and because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You Lubricants on page 11‑8. wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and Always clean the brake fluid installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged. reservoir cap and the area around back up. Add brake fluid only when work the cap before removing it. This . A fluid leak in the brake is done on the brake hydraulic helps keep dirt from entering the hydraulic system can also cause system. reservoir. a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a When the brake fluid falls to a low { WARNING leak means that sooner or later level, the brake warning light comes the brakes will not work well. on. See Brake System Warning With the wrong kind of fluid in Do not top off the brake fluid. Light on page 5‑19. the brake hydraulic system, Adding fluid does not correct a leak. the brakes might not work well. If fluid is added when the linings This could cause a crash. Always are worn, there will be too much use the proper brake fluid. fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Vehicle Care 10-25

Notice: Battery Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable from the . Using the wrong fluid Refer to the replacement number on can badly damage brake battery to keep the battery from the original battery label when a running down. hydraulic system parts. new battery is needed. For example, just a few Extended Storage: Remove the drops of mineral-based oil, black, negative (−) cable from the such as engine oil, in the { DANGER battery or use a battery trickle brake hydraulic system can Battery posts, terminals, and charger. damage brake hydraulic related accessories contain lead system parts so badly that and lead compounds, chemicals All-Wheel Drive they will have to be replaced. known to the State of California to Do not let someone put in It is not necessary to check the the wrong kind of fluid. cause cancer and reproductive all–wheel drive lubricant levels. harm. Wash hands after handling. A fluid leak is the only reason for . If brake fluid is spilled on the fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle's painted surfaces, Vehicle Storage vehicle to the dealer/retailer as soon the paint finish can be as possible. damaged. Be careful not { to spill brake fluid on the WARNING vehicle. If you do, wash it Batteries have acid that can burn off immediately. you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 10‑79 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. 10-26 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but do Shift Lock Control not start the engine. Without { WARNING System Check applying the regular brake, try When you are doing this to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the inspection, the vehicle could { WARNING shift lever moves out of P (Park), move suddenly. If the vehicle When you are doing this contact your dealer/retailer for moves, you or others could be inspection, the vehicle could service. injured. move suddenly. If the vehicle 1. Before starting this check, be moves, you or others could be Ignition Transmission sure there is enough room injured. Lock Check around the vehicle. 1. Before starting this check, be While parked, and with the parking 2. Firmly apply both the parking sure there is enough room brake set, try to turn the ignition brake and the regular brake. around the vehicle. It should to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever See Parking Brake on be parked on a level surface. position. page 9‑29. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. . The ignition should turn to Do not use the accelerator See Parking Brake on LOCK/OFF only when the shift pedal, and be ready to turn off page 9‑29. lever is in P (Park). the engine immediately if it . The ignition key should come starts. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle out only in LOCK/OFF. 3. Try to start the engine in each begins to move. Contact your dealer/retailer if gear. The vehicle should start service is required. only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer/ retailer for service. Vehicle Care 10-27

Park Brake and P (Park) . To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the { WARNING parking brake followed by the regular brake. When you are doing this check, Contact your dealer/retailer if the vehicle could begin to move. service is required. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Wiper Blade Replacement Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. roll. Be ready to apply the regular 2. Press the button in the middle of See Scheduled Maintenance on brake at once should the vehicle the wiper arm connector and pull page 11 2 for more information. begin to move. ‑ the wiper blade away from the Replacement blades come in arm connector. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the different types and are removed in 3. Install the new wiper blade and vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different ways. To replace the wiper make sure the wiper blade locks your foot on the regular brake, set blade assembly: the parking brake. into place. 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm For the proper size and type see . To check the parking brake's away from the windshield. holding ability: With the engine Maintenance Replacement Parts on running and the transmission in page 11‑10. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. 10-28 Vehicle Care

Backglass Wiper Blade Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement To replace the backglass wiper Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement blade: the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly further adjustment. page 10‑29. away from the backglass. However, if your vehicle is damaged For any bulb changing procedure The backglass wiper blade will in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact not lock in a vertical position be affected. Aim adjustment to the your dealer/retailer. so care should be used when low-beam headlamps may be pulling it away from the vehicle. necessary if oncoming drivers flash Halogen Bulbs 2. Rotate the wiper blade their high-beam headlamps at you assembly, hold the wiper arm (for vertical aim). { WARNING in position, and push the blade If the headlamps need to be away from the wiper arm. re-aimed, it is recommended that Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you 3. Replace the wiper blade. you take the vehicle to your dealer/ retailer for service. drop or scratch the bulb. You or 4. Return the wiper arm and blade others could be injured. Be sure assembly to the rest position on to read and follow the instructions the glass. on the bulb package. Vehicle Care 10-29

License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket Electrical System counterclockwise and pull the To replace one of these bulbs: bulb straight out of the socket. High Voltage Devices and 1. Remove the two screws holding 4. Install the new bulb. each of the license plate lamps Wiring to the liftgate trim. 5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp. { WARNING

Replacement Bulbs Exposure to high voltage can Bulb cause shock, burns, and even Exterior Lamp Number death. The high voltage systems in your vehicle can only be License Plate Lamp 194 serviced by technicians with special training. For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer/retailer. High voltage devices are identified by labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify these devices. High 2. Turn and pull the license plate voltage cable or wiring has lamp forward through the lift gate orange covering. Do not probe, trim opening. tamper with, cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring. 10-30 Vehicle Care

Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Overload An electrical overload may cause Breakers the lamps to go on and off, or in The vehicle has fuses and circuit The wiring circuits in your vehicle some cases to remain off. Have the breakers to protect against an are protected from short circuits by headlamp wiring checked right away electrical system overload. a combination of fuses, circuit if the lamps go on and off or breakers and fusible thermal links. When the current electrical load is remain off. too heavy, the circuit breaker opens This greatly reduces the chance of and closes, protecting the circuit Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems. until the current load returns to If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band normal or the problem is fixed. heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken This greatly reduces the chance of wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure circuit overload and fire caused by and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new electrical problems. one of the identical size and rating. Although the circuit is protected Fuses and circuit breakers protect from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can the following in the vehicle: due to heavy snow or ice, may be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes . Headlamp Wiring cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as . Windshield Wiper Motor from the windshield before using the you can. . Power Windows and other windshield wipers. Power Accessories If the overload is caused by an Engine Compartment electrical problem and not snow or Fuse Block ice, be sure to get it fixed. The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Vehicle Care 10-31

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical Fuses Usage Fuses Usage component. Air Conditioning AIRBAG Airbag System A/C CLUTCH To remove fuses, hold the end of Clutch the fuse between your thumb and AUX POWER Auxiliary Power Antilock Braking index finger and pull straight out. AUX VAC Auxiliary ABS MTR System (ABS) PUMP Vacuum Pump Motor All-Wheel-Drive Adaptive Forward AWD AFS System Lighting System 10-32 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage BATT 1 Battery 1 Heated Outside PWR HTD MIR Power Outlet Rearview Mirror OUTLET BATT 2 Battery 2 Heating, REAR BATT 3 Battery 3 Rear Camera Ventilation and CAMERA HVAC BLWR Engine Control Air Conditioning ECM Rear Accessory Module Blower RR APO Power Outlet Engine Control Left High-Beam ECM 1 LT HI BEAM RR DEFOG Rear Defogger Module 1 Headlamp Rear Climate EMISSION 1 Emission 1 Left Low Beam RR HVAC LT LO BEAM ‐ Control System EMISSION 2 Emission 2 Headlamp Right High Beam LT PRK Left Parking Lamp RT HI BEAM ‐ EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils Headlamp Trailer Left FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 LT TRLR Right Low Beam Stoplamp and RT LO BEAM ‐ STOP/TRN Headlamp FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Turn Signal Right FOG LAMP Fog Lamps ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils RT PRK Parking Lamp Fuel System Powertrain Control FSCM PCM IGN Trailer Right Control Module Module Ignition RT TRLR Stoplamp and STOP/TRN HORN Horn PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate Turn Signal Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage Regulated Voltage TRLR Trailer Parking FOG LAMP Fog Lamps RVC SNSR Control Sensor PRK LAMP Lamps High Beam HI BEAM ‐ S/ROOF/ TRLR PWR Trailer Power Headlamps Sunroof SUNSHADE Windshield Wiper/ High Intensity WPR/WSW SERVICE Service Repair Washer HID/ Discharge (HID) LO BEAM Low Beam SPARE Spare ‐ Relays Usage Headlamps Stop Lamps Stop Lamps A/C HORN Horn (China Only) (China Only) Air Conditioning CMPRSR Compressor Clutch IGN Ignition Main STRTR Starter CLTCH Trailer Left Transmission LT TRLR TCM AUX VAC Auxiliary Stoplamp and Turn Control Module STOP/TRN PUMP Vacuum Pump Signal Lamp TRANS Transmission CRNK Switched Power PRK LAMP Park Lamp TRLR Trailer Back up ‐ FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 PWR/TRN Powertrain BCK/UP Lamps FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Rear Window TRLR BRK Trailer Brake RR DEFOG FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 Defogger 10-34 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Fuses Usage Trailer Right AIRBAG Airbag RT TRLR Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN AMP Amplifier Signal Lamp BCK/UP/ Back up Lamp/ Stop Lamps Stop Lamps ‐ STOP Stoplamp (China Only) (China Only) Body Control TRLR Trailer Back-up BCM Module BCK/UP Lamps CNSTR/ WPR Windshield Wiper Canister Vent VENT Windshield Wiper WPR HI CTSY Courtesy High Speed DR/LCK Door Locks Instrument Panel Fuse Daytime Running DRL Block Lamps The instrument panel fuse block GMC HID Only/ is located under the instrument DRL 2 Rear Fog panel on the passenger side of the Lamps-China Only vehicle. Pull down on the cover to DSPLY Display access the fuse block. Front Windshield FRT/WSW Washer Fuse Side HTD/COOL Heated/Cooling SEAT Seats Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuses Usage Relays Usage Heating, LT/PWR/ Driver Side Power HVAC Ventilation and SEAT Seat Relay Air Conditioning RT/PWR/ Passenger Side INADV/ Inadvertent SEAT Power Seat Relay PWR/LED Power LED Power Windows PWR/WNDW INFOTMNT Infotainment Relay Driver Side Turn PWR/ Power Steering LT/TRN/SIG Signal COLUMN Column Relay Memory Seat L/GATE Liftgate Relay MSM Module LCK Power Lock Relay Power Mirrors, PDM Rear Window Liftgate Release REAR/WSW Washer Relay PWR MODE Power Mode Power Unlock UNLCK PWR/MIR Power Mirrors Relay RDO Radio REAR WPR Rear Wiper Passenger Side RT/TRN/SIG Turn Signal Relay Side SPARE Spare STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel ILLUM Illumination 10-36 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) Daytime Running DRL2 . Lamps 2 Relay Tires Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded Driver Side Unlock Your new vehicle comes with LT/UNLCK tires. The resulting accident Relay high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. Daytime Running leading tire manufacturer. If you Check all tires frequently to DRL Lamps Relay ever have questions about your maintain the recommended tire warranty and where to pressure. Tire pressure SPARE Spare obtain service, see your vehicle should be checked when Front Windshield Warranty booklet for details. your tires are cold. See Tire FRT/WSW Washer Relay For additional information refer Pressure on page 10‑43. to the tire manufacturer. . Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured { WARNING or broken by a sudden impact — such as when you Poorly maintained and improperly hit a pothole. Keep tires at used tires are dangerous. the recommended pressure. . Overloading your tires can . Worn, old tires can cause cause overheating as a result accidents. If your tread is of too much flexing. You badly worn, or if your tires could have an air-out and a have been damaged, serious accident. See Vehicle replace them. Load Limits on page 9‑12. (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-37

Tire Sidewall Labeling aspect ratio, construction type, (D) Tire Identification Number and service description. See the (TIN): The letters and numbers Useful information about a “Tire Size” illustration later in this following the DOT (Department tire is molded into its sidewall. section for more detail. of Transportation) code is the The examples below show a Tire Identification Number typical passenger vehicle tire (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria (TIN). The TIN shows the and a compact spare tire manufacturer and plant code, sidewall. Specification): Original equipment tires designed to tire size, and date the tire was GM's specific tire performance manufactured. The TIN is criteria have a TPC specification molded onto both sides of the code molded onto the sidewall. tire, although only one side may GM's TPC specifications meet have the date of manufacture. or exceed all federal safety (E) Tire Ply Material: The type guidelines. of cord and number of plies in (C) DOT (Department of the sidewall and under the tread. Transportation): The (F) Uniform Tire Quality Department of Transportation Grading (UTQG): Tire (DOT) code indicates that manufacturers are required Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example the tire is in compliance to grade tires based on with the U.S. Department of three performance factors: (A) Tire Size: The tire size Transportation Motor Vehicle treadwear, traction, and is a combination of letters and Safety Standards. temperature resistance. numbers used to define a For more information see particular tire's width, height, Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 10‑54 . 10-38 Vehicle Care

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation (B) Temporary Use Only: tire size, and date the tire was Load Limit: Maximum load The compact spare tire or manufactured. The TIN is that can be carried and the temporary use tire has a tread molded onto both sides of the maximum pressure needed life of approximately 5 000 km tire, although only one side may to support that load. (3,000 miles) and should not be have the date of manufacture. driven at speeds over 105 km/h (D) Maximum Cold Inflation (65 mph). The compact spare Load Limit: Maximum load tire is for emergency use when that can be carried and the a regular road tire has lost air maximum pressure needed and gone flat. If your vehicle to support that load. has a compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on (E) Tire Inflation: The page 10‑77 and If a Tire Goes temporary use tire or compact Flat on page 10‑57. spare tire should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more (C) Tire Identification Number information on tire pressure and (TIN): The letters and numbers inflation see Tire Pressure on following the DOT (Department Compact Spare Tire Example page 10‑43. of Transportation) code is the (A) Tire Ply Material: The type Tire Identification Number of cord and number of plies in (TIN). The TIN shows the the sidewall and under the tread. manufacturer and plant code, Vehicle Care 10-39

(F) Tire Size : A combination Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit of letters and numbers define a number that indicates the tire tire's width, height, aspect ratio, Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. construction type, and service The following illustration For example, if the tire size description. The letter T as the shows an example of a typical aspect ratio is 60, as shown in first character in the tire size passenger vehicle tire size. item C of the illustration, it would means the tire is for temporary mean that the tire's sidewall is use only. 60 percent as high as it is wide. (G) TPC Spec (Tire (D) Construction Code: Performance Criteria A letter code is used to indicate Specification): Original the type of ply construction in equipment tires designed to the tire. The letter R means GM's specific tire performance (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the criteria have a TPC specification The United States version letter D means diagonal or code molded onto the sidewall. of a metric tire sizing system. bias ply construction; and the GM's TPC specifications meet The letter P as the first letter B means belted‐bias ply or exceed all federal safety character in the tire size construction. guidelines. means a passenger vehicle (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of tire engineered to standards the wheel in inches. set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. 10-40 Vehicle Care

(F) Service Description: These power brakes, power windows, before a tire has built up heat characters represent the load power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure index and speed rating of the conditioning. on page 10‑43. tire. The load index represents Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a the load carry capacity a tire is of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and certified to carry. The speed Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the rating is the maximum speed a maximum capacity of fuel, oil, tire is certified to carry a load. cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords and coolant, but without Tire Terminology and may be made from steel or other passengers and cargo. Definitions reinforcing materials. DOT Markings: A code molded Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire Air Pressure: The amount steel wires wrapped by steel signifying that the tire is in of air inside the tire pressing compliance with the U.S. outward on each square inch cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Department of Transportation of the tire. Air pressure is (DOT) motor vehicle safety expressed in psi (pounds per Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire standards. The DOT code square inch) or kPa (kilopascal). in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification alternate angles less than Accessory Weight: This Number (TIN), an alphanumeric means the combined weight 90 degrees to the centerline designator which can also of optional accessories. of the tread. identify the tire manufacturer, Some examples of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The production plant, brand, and accessories are, automatic amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production. transmission, power steering, measured in psi (pounds per GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight square inch) or kPa (kilopascal) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12. Vehicle Care 10-41

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The Weight Rating for the front axle. The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that See Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces page 9‑12. The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a GAWR RR: Gross Axle molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire Weight Rating for the rear axle. Maximum Load Rating: The that contains a whitewall, See Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or page 9‑12. maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. model name molding that is Intended Outboard Sidewall: higher or deeper than the same The side of an asymmetrical tire, Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb of the tire. when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight, Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Kilopascal (kPa): The metric vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight. A tire used on passenger cars unit for air pressure. and some light duty trucks and Normal Occupant Weight: The Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: multipurpose vehicles. number of occupants a vehicle A tire used on light duty trucks Recommended Inflation and some multipurpose is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle Pressure: Vehicle passenger vehicles. manufacturer's recommended Load Limits on page 9‑12. Load Index: An assigned tire inflation pressure as shown number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution: on the tire placard. See Tire that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 10‑43 and carrying capacity of a tire. Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12. 10-42 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Vehicle Capacity Weight: tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear The number of designated extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread seating positions multiplied by 90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated the tread. (1/16 inch) of tread remains. cargo load. See Vehicle Load Rim: A metal support for a tire See When It Is Time for New Limits on page 9‑12. and upon which the tire beads Tires on page 10‑51. Vehicle Maximum Load on the are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Tire: Load on an individual tire Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): A tire due to curb weight, accessory between the tread and the bead. information system that weight, occupant weight, and provides consumers with cargo weight. Speed Rating: An ratings for a tire's traction, Vehicle Placard: A label alphanumeric code assigned to temperature, and treadwear. a tire indicating the maximum permanently attached to a Ratings are determined by vehicle showing the vehicle's speed at which a tire can tire manufacturers using operate. capacity weight and the government testing procedures. original equipment tire size Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into and recommended inflation the sidewall of the tire. See the tire and the road surface. pressure. See “Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality Grading on The amount of grip provided. Information Label” under Vehicle page 10‑54. Tread: The portion of a tire Load Limits on page 9‑12. that comes into contact with the road. Vehicle Care 10-43

Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air For additional information (over‐inflation), you can get regarding how much weight Tires need the correct amount the following: your vehicle can carry, and an of air pressure to operate example of the Tire and Loading . Unusual wear effectively. Information label, see Vehicle Notice: Do not let anyone tell . Poor handling Load Limits on page 9‑12. How you that under‐inflation or . Rough ride you load your vehicle affects over inflation is all right. It is vehicle handling and ride ‐ . not. If your tires do not have Needless damage from comfort. Never load your vehicle road hazards enough air (under‐inflation), with more weight than it was you can get the following: A vehicle specific Tire and designed to carry. Loading Information label . Too much flexing is attached to your vehicle. When to Check . Too much heat This label shows your vehicle's Check your tires once a month . Tire overloading original equipment tires and the or more. Do not forget to check correct inflation pressures for the compact spare tire, if the . Premature or your tires when they are cold. vehicle has one. The compact irregular wear The recommended cold tire spare should be at 60 psi . Poor handling inflation pressure, shown on the (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the . Reduced fuel economy label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support compact spare tire, see your vehicle's maximum load Compact Spare Tire on carrying capacity. page 10‑77. 10-44 Vehicle Care

How to Check If you overfill the tire, release Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked Use a good quality pocket-type air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. monthly when cold and inflated to gauge to check tire pressure. the inflation pressure recommended You cannot tell if your tires are Re‐check the tire pressure with the tire gauge. by the vehicle manufacturer on the properly inflated simply by vehicle placard or tire inflation looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps pressure label. (If your vehicle has look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. tires of a different size than the size they are under‐inflated. Check They help prevent leaks by indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire's inflation pressure when keeping out dirt and moisture. tire inflation pressure label, you the tires are cold. Cold means should determine the proper tire your vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure Monitor inflation pressure for those tires.) at least three hours or driven no System As an added safety feature, your more than 1.6 km (1 mile). vehicle has been equipped with a The Tire Pressure Monitor System tire pressure monitoring system Remove the valve cap from the (TPMS) uses radio and sensor (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire tire valve stem. Press the tire technology to check tire pressure pressure telltale when one or gauge firmly onto the valve to levels. The TPMS sensors monitor more of your tires is significantly get a pressure measurement. the air pressure in your vehicle's under‐inflated. If the cold tire inflation pressure tires and transmit tire pressure matches the recommended readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. Vehicle Care 10-45

Accordingly, when the low tire Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction pressure telltale illuminates, you equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more should stop and check your tires as indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to soon as possible, and inflate them system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or to the proper pressure. Driving on The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow a significantly under‐inflated tire combined with the low tire pressure the TPMS to continue to function causes the tire to overheat and can telltale. When the system detects a properly. lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor also reduces fuel efficiency and approximately one minute and then Operation on page 10‑46 for tire tread life, and may affect the remain continuously illuminated. additional information. vehicle's handling and stopping This sequence will continue upon ability. subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications Please note that the TPMS is long as the malfunction exists. Commission (FCC) and not a substitute for proper tire When the malfunction indicator is Industry Canada maintenance, and it is the driver's illuminated, the system may not be See Radio Frequency Statement on responsibility to maintain correct able to detect or signal low tire page 13‑17 for information tire pressure, even if under‐inflation pressure as intended. TPMS regarding Part 15 of the Federal has not reached the level to trigger malfunctions may occur for a variety Communications Commission (FCC) illumination of the TPMS low tire of reasons, including the installation Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industry pressure telltale. of replacement or alternate tires or Canada. wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. 10-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure Monitor on, stop as soon as possible and The low tire pressure warning inflate the tires to the recommended light may come on in cool weather Operation pressure shown on the tire loading when the vehicle is first started, and This vehicle may have a Tire information label. See Vehicle Load then turn off as you start to drive. Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Limits on page 9‑12. This could be an early indicator that The TPMS is designed to warn the At the same time a message to the air pressure in the tire(s) are driver when a low tire pressure check the pressure in a specific tire getting low and need to be inflated condition exists. TPMS sensors are appears on the Driver Information to the proper pressure. mounted onto each tire and wheel Center (DIC) display. The low tire A Tire and Loading Information assembly, excluding the spare tire pressure warning light and the DIC label, attached to your vehicle, and wheel assembly, if the vehicle warning message come on at each shows the size of your vehicle's has one. The TPMS sensors ignition cycle until the tires are original equipment tires and the monitor the air pressure in the inflated to the correct inflation correct inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires and transmits the tire pressure. Using the DIC, tire vehicle's tires when they are cold. pressure readings to a receiver pressure levels can be viewed by See Vehicle Load Limits on located in the vehicle. the driver. For additional information page 9‑12, for an example of the and details about the DIC operation Tire and Loading Information label and displays see Driver Information and its location on your vehicle. Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on Also see Tire Pressure on page 5‑24 or Driver Information page 10‑43. Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you on page 5‑29 and Tire Messages about a low tire pressure condition on page 5‑42. When a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire is detected, the TPMS illuminates maintenance. See Tire Inspection the low tire pressure warning light on page 10‑49, Tire Rotation on located on the instrument panel page 10‑49 and Tires on cluster. If the warning light comes page 10‑36. Vehicle Care 10-47

. Notice: Using non‐approved tire TPMS Malfunction Light and The TPMS sensor matching sealants could damage the Tire Message process was started but not Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) completed or not completed sensors. TPMS sensor damage The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the caused by using an incorrect tire if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle's tires. The DIC message sealant is not covered by the are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light vehicle warranty. Always use system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS the GM approved tire sealant low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process available through your dealer/ about one minute and then stays is performed successfully. retailer. on for the remainder of the ignition See “TPMS Sensor Matching cycle. A DIC warning message is Process” later in this section. Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits also displayed. The low tire warning . use a GM approved liquid tire light and DIC warning message One or more TPMS sensors sealant. Using non-approved tire come on at each ignition cycle until are missing or damaged. sealants could damage the TPMS the problem is corrected. Some of The DIC message and the sensors. See Tire Sealant and the conditions that can cause the TPMS malfunction light should Compressor Kit on page 10‑59 for malfunction light and DIC message go off when the TPMS sensors information regarding the inflator kit to come on are: are installed and the sensor materials and instructions. matching process is performed . One of the road tires has been successfully. See your replaced with the spare tire, dealer/retailer for service. if your vehicle has one. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re‐install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. 10-48 Vehicle Care

. Replacement tires or wheels do TPMS Sensor Matching You have two minutes to match not match your vehicle's original Process the first tire/wheel position, and equipment tires or wheels. Tires five minutes overall to match all and wheels other than those Each TPMS sensor has a unique four tire/wheel positions. If it takes recommended for your vehicle identification code. Any time you longer than two minutes, to match could prevent the TPMS from rotate your vehicle's tires or replace the first tire and wheel, or more than functioning properly. See Buying one or more of the TPMS sensors, five minutes to match all four tire New Tires on page 10‑51. the identification codes will need to and wheel positions the matching be matched to the new tire/wheel . Operating electronic devices or process stops and you need to position. The sensors are matched start over. being near facilities using radio to the tire/wheel positions in the wave frequencies similar to the following order: driver side front tire, The TPMS sensor matching process TPMS could cause the TPMS passenger side front tire, passenger is outlined below: sensors to malfunction. side rear tire, and driver side rear 1. Set the parking brake. If the TPMS is not functioning it tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. cannot detect or signal a low tire See your dealer/retailer for service. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. condition. See your dealer/retailer The TPMS sensors can also be for service if the TPMS malfunction matched to each tire/wheel position 3. Press the Remote Keyless light and DIC message comes on by increasing or decreasing the Entry (RKE) transmitter's LOCK and stays on. tire's air pressure. If increasing the and UNLOCK buttons at the tire's air pressure, do not exceed same time for approximately the maximum inflation pressure five seconds. The horn sounds indicated on the tire's sidewall. twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE To decrease air-pressure out of a LEARNING ACTIVE message tire you can use the pointed end of displays on the DIC screen. the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gauge, or a key. 4. Start with the driver side front tire. Vehicle Care 10-49

5. Remove the valve cap from the 8. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection valve cap stem. Activate the tire, and repeat the procedure TPMS sensor by increasing in Step 5. The horn sounds We recommend that you or decreasing the tire's air two times to indicate the sensor regularly inspect your vehicle's pressure for five seconds, identification code has been tires, including the spare tire, or until a horn chirp sounds. The matched to the driver side rear if the vehicle has one, for signs horn chirp, which may take up to tire, and the TPMS sensor of wear or damage. See When It 30 seconds to sound, confirms matching process is no longer Is Time for New Tires on that the sensor identification active. The TIRE LEARNING page 10‑51 for more information. code has been matched to this ACTIVE message on the DIC tire and wheel position. display screen goes off. Tire Rotation 6. Proceed to the passenger side 9. Turn the ignition switch to front tire, and repeat the LOCK/OFF. Tires should be rotated procedure in Step 5. every 5,000 to 8,000 miles 10. Set all four tires to the (8 000 to 13 000 km). See 7. Proceed to the passenger side recommended air pressure rear tire, and repeat the level as indicated on the Tire Scheduled Maintenance on procedure in Step 5. and Loading Information label. page 11‑2. 11. Put the valve caps back on the The purpose of a regular tire valve stems. rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will ensure that the vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new. 10-50 Vehicle Care

Any time you notice unusual If the vehicle has a compact wear, rotate the tires as soon spare tire, do not include it in { WARNING as possible and check wheel the tire rotation. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the alignment. Also check for After the tires have been parts to which it is fastened, can damaged tires or wheels. rotated, adjust the front and rear make wheel nuts become loose See When It Is Time for New inflation pressures as shown on after time. The wheel could come Tires on page 10‑51 and Wheel the Tire and Loading Information off and cause an accident. When Replacement on page 10‑56. label. See Tire Pressure on changing a wheel, remove any page 10‑43 and Vehicle Load rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Limits on page 9‑12. In an emergency, use a cloth or a Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor paper towel to do this; but be sure System. See Tire Pressure to use a scraper or wire brush Monitor Operation on page 10‑46. later, if needed, to get all the rust Make certain that all wheel or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat nuts are properly tightened. on page 10‑57. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Make sure the spare tire, if Capacities and Specifications on the vehicle has one, is stored page 12‑2. securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it When rotating the vehicle's tires, moves, tighten the cable. See always use the correct rotation Tire Changing on page 10‑67. pattern shown here. Vehicle Care 10-51

When It Is Time for New The vehicle needs new tires if any With proper care and maintenance of the following statements are true: tires typically wear out before they Tires degrade due to age. If you are . You can see the indicators at Various factors, such as three or more places around unsure about the need to replace maintenance, temperatures, driving the tire. the tires as they get older, consult speeds, vehicle loading, and road the tire manufacturer for more conditions influence when you need . You can see cord or fabric information. new tires. showing through the tire's rubber. Buying New Tires . The tread or sidewall is cracked, GM has developed and matched cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires . The tire has a bump, bulge, installed on your vehicle, or split. when it was new, were designed . The tire has a puncture, cut, to meet General Motors or other damage that cannot be Tire Performance Criteria repaired well because of the size Specification (TPC Spec) or location of the damage. system rating. If you need The rubber in tires degrades over replacement tires, GM strongly time. This is also true for the spare recommends that you get tires One way to tell when it is time for tire, if the vehicle has one, even with the same TPC Spec rating. new tires is to check the treadwear if it is not being used. Multiple indicators, which appear when the conditions affect how fast this tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or aging takes place, including less of tread remaining. temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. 10-52 Vehicle Care

This way, your vehicle will GM recommends replacing tires continue to have tires that are in sets of four. This is because WARNING (Continued) designed to give the same uniform tread depth on all tires also cause damage to your performance and vehicle safety, will help keep your vehicle vehicle. Be sure to use the during normal use, as the performing most like it did when correct size, brand, and type original tires. the tires were new. Replacing of tires on all wheels. It is GM's exclusive TPC Spec less than a full set of tires can all right to drive with your system considers over a dozen affect the braking and handling compact spare temporarily, as critical specifications that impact performance of your vehicle. it was developed for use on the overall performance of See Tire Inspection on page 10‑49 your vehicle. See Compact your vehicle, including brake and Tire Rotation on page 10‑49 Spare Tire on page 10‑77. system performance, ride for information on proper tire and handling, traction control, rotation. and tire pressure monitoring { WARNING performance. GM's TPC Spec { WARNING If you use bias-ply tires on the number is molded onto the tire's Mixing tires could cause you sidewall near the tire size. If the vehicle, the wheel rim flanges to lose control while driving. could develop cracks after tires have an all‐season tread If you mix tires of different design, the TPC Spec number many miles of driving. A tire sizes, brands, or types (radial and/or wheel could fail will be followed by an MS for and bias-belted tires), the mud and snow. See Tire suddenly, causing a crash. vehicle may not handle Use only radial-ply tires with Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑37 properly, and you could have the wheels on the vehicle. for additional information. a crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or types may (Continued) Vehicle Care 10-53

If you must replace your Your vehicle's original vehicle's tires with those that do equipment tires are listed on the { WARNING not have a TPC Spec number, Tire and Loading Information If you add different sized make sure they are the same Label. See Vehicle Load Limits wheels, your vehicle may not size, load range, speed rating, on page 9‑12, for more provide an acceptable level of and construction type (radial information about the Tire and performance and safety if tires not and bias‐belted tires) as your Loading Information Label and recommended for those wheels vehicle's original tires. its location on your vehicle. are selected. You may increase Vehicles that have a tire the chance that you will crash and pressure monitoring system Different Size Tires and suffer serious injury. Only use GM could give an inaccurate Wheels specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle, and low pressure warning if non TPC ‐ ‐ If you add wheels or tires that are a have them properly installed by a Spec rated tires are installed different size than your original GM certified technician. on your vehicle. Non‐TPC equipment wheels and tires, this Spec rated tires may give a could affect the way your vehicle See Buying New Tires on low‐pressure warning that is performs, including its braking, page 10‑51 and Accessories and higher or lower than the proper ride and handling characteristics, Modifications on page 10‑3 for warning level you would get with stability, and resistance to rollover. additional information. Additionally, if your vehicle has TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire electronic systems such as anti‐lock Pressure Monitor System on brakes, rollover airbags, traction page 10‑44. control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can be affected. 10-54 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire Quality The Uniform Tire Quality Treadwear Grading Grading (UTQG) system The treadwear grade is a does not apply to deep Quality grades can be found comparative rating based on the tread, winter-type snow tires, wear rate of the tire when tested where applicable on the tire space-saver, or temporary use sidewall between tread shoulder under controlled conditions on spare tires, tires with nominal a specified government test and maximum section width. rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches For example: course. For example, a tire (25 to 30 cm), or to some graded 150 would wear Treadwear 200 Traction AA limited-production tires. one and a half (1½) times Temperature A While the tires available on as well on the government The following information relates General Motors passenger cars course as a tire graded 100. to the system developed by the and light trucks may vary with The relative performance of United States National Highway respect to these grades, they tires depends upon the actual Traffic Safety Administration must also conform to federal conditions of their use, however, (NHTSA), which grades tires safety requirements and and may depart significantly by treadwear, traction, and additional General Motors Tire from the norm due to variations temperature performance. Performance Criteria (TPC) in driving habits, service This applies only to vehicles standards. practices and differences in road sold in the United States. All Passenger Car Tires Must characteristics and climate. The grades are molded on Conform to Federal Safety the sidewalls of most passenger Requirements In Addition To car tires. These Grades. Vehicle Care 10-55

Traction – AA, A, B, C Temperature – A, B, C established for a tire that is The traction grades, from The temperature grades are properly inflated and not highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, A (the highest), B, and C, overloaded. Excessive speed, and C. Those grades represent representing the tire's resistance underinflation, or excessive the tire's ability to stop on wet to the generation of heat and loading, either separately or in pavement as measured under its ability to dissipate heat combination, can cause heat controlled conditions on when tested under controlled buildup and possible tire failure. specified government test conditions on a specified indoor surfaces of asphalt and laboratory test wheel. Sustained Wheel Alignment and Tire concrete. A tire marked C may high temperature can cause Balance have poor traction performance. the material of the tire to The tires and wheels on the vehicle Warning: The traction grade degenerate and reduce tire life, were aligned and balanced carefully assigned to this tire is based on and excessive temperature at the factory to give the longest tire straight-ahead braking traction can lead to sudden tire failure. life and best overall performance. tests, and does not include The grade C corresponds to a Adjustments to wheel alignment and acceleration, cornering, level of performance which all tire balancing will not be necessary hydroplaning, or peak traction passenger car tires must meet on a regular basis. However, if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle characteristics. under the Federal Motor Safety pulls to one side or the other, the Standard No. 109. Grades B alignment should be checked. If the and A represent higher levels of vehicle vibrates when driving on a performance on the laboratory smooth road, the tires and wheels test wheel than the minimum might need to be rebalanced. See required by law. Warning: The your dealer/retailer for proper temperature grade for this tire is diagnosis. 10-56 Vehicle Care

Wheel Replacement If you need to replace any of the Notice: The wrong wheel can wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, also cause problems with Replace any wheel that is bent, or Tire Pressure Monitor System bearing life, brake cooling, cracked, or badly rusted or (TPMS) sensors, replace them only speedometer or odometer corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming with new GM original equipment calibration, headlamp aim, loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and parts. This way, you will be sure to bumper height, vehicle ground wheel nuts should be replaced. have the right wheel, wheel bolts, clearance, and tire or tire chain If the wheel leaks air, replace it wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for clearance to the body and (except some aluminum wheels, the vehicle. chassis. which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer if any of { See If a Tire Goes Flat on these conditions exist. WARNING page 10‑57 for more information. Your dealer/retailer will know the Using the wrong replacement Used Replacement Wheels kind of wheel you need. wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Each new wheel should have the nuts on your vehicle can be { WARNING same load-carrying capacity, dangerous. It could affect the diameter, width, offset, and be braking and handling of your Putting a used wheel on the mounted the same way as the vehicle, make your tires lose vehicle is dangerous. You cannot one it replaces. air and make you lose control. know how it has been used or You could have a collision in how far it has been driven. which you or others could be It could fail suddenly and cause injured. Always use the correct a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel wheel, use a new GM original nuts for replacement. equipment wheel. Vehicle Care 10-57

Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat WARNING (Continued) It is unusual for a tire to blowout { WARNING Use another type of traction while you are driving, especially if device only if its manufacturer you maintain your vehicle's tires Do not use tire chains. There is properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is not enough clearance. Tire chains recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination much more likely to leak out slowly. used on a vehicle without the But if you should ever have a proper amount of clearance can and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. blowout, here are a few tips about cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do: suspension or other vehicle parts. To help avoid damage to the If a front tire fails, the flat tire The area damaged by the tire vehicle, drive slowly, readjust creates a drag that pulls the vehicle chains could cause you to lose or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do not toward that side. Take your foot off control of the vehicle and you or the accelerator pedal and grip the others may be injured in a crash. spin the vehicle's wheels. If you do find traction devices that will steering wheel firmly. Steer to (Continued) fit, install them on the front tires. maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. 10-58 Vehicle Care

Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the { WARNING WARNING (Continued) vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Changing a tire can be To be certain the vehicle will not Gently brake to a stop, well off the dangerous. The vehicle can move, put blocks at the front road if possible. slip off the jack and roll over and rear of the tire farthest away or fall on you or other people. from the one being changed. { WARNING You and they could be badly That would be the tire on the injured or even killed. Find a level other side, at the opposite end Lifting a vehicle and getting place to change your tire. To help of the vehicle. under it to do maintenance or prevent the vehicle from moving: repairs is dangerous without the 1. Set the parking brake firmly. This vehicle may come with a jack appropriate safety equipment and and spare tire or a tire sealant and 2. Put an automatic training. If a jack is provided with compressor kit. To use the jacking transmission shift lever in the vehicle, it is designed only for equipment to change a spare P (Park), or shift a manual changing a flat tire. If it is used for tire safely, follow the instructions transmission to 1 (First) or below. Then see Tire Changing on anything else, you or others could R (Reverse). be badly injured or killed if the page 10‑67. To use the tire sealant vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 3. Turn off the engine and do and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on is provided with the vehicle, only not restart while the vehicle page 10 59. use it for changing a flat tire. is raised. ‑ 4. Do not allow passengers to If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire remain in the vehicle. and wheel damage by driving slowly (Continued) to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6‑3. Vehicle Care 10-59

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Sealant and use the following example as a WARNING (Continued) guide to assist you in the placement Compressor Kit of wheel blocks (A). and compressor kit instructions { WARNING and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended area with poor ventilation is pressure. dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) { WARNING which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness Storing the tire sealant and and even death. Never run the compressor kit or other engine in an enclosed area that equipment in the passenger has no fresh air ventilation. compartment of the vehicle could For more information, see Engine cause injury. In a sudden stop or A. Wheel Block Exhaust on page 9‑23. collision, loose equipment could B. Flat Tire strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its The following information explains original location. how to repair or change a tire. { WARNING Over-inflating a tire could cause If this vehicle has a tire sealant and the tire to rupture and you or compressor kit, there may not be a others could be injured. Be sure spare tire, tire changing equipment, to read and follow the tire sealant and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire. (Continued) 10-60 Vehicle Care

The tire sealant and compressor This vehicle may have one of can be used to temporarily seal the following tire sealant and punctures up to ¼ inch (6 mm) in compressor kits. The kit includes: the tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an under inflated tire. If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Assistance A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Program on page 13‑6. Air Only) Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit B. On/Off Button instructions. C. Pressure Gauge D. Pressure Deflation Button (If equipped) E. Tire Sealant Canister F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) G. Air Only Hose (Black) H. Power Plug Vehicle Care 10-61

Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister” When using the tire sealant and following. compressor kit during cold There is only enough sealant to temperatures, warm the kit in a seal one tire. After usage, the heated environment for 5 minutes. sealant canister and sealant/air This will help to inflate the tire hose assembly must be replaced. faster. See “Removal and Installation of the Always do a safety check first. See Sealant Canister following. ” If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑57. Using the Tire Sealant and Do not remove any objects that Compressor Kit to Temporarily have penetrated the tire. Seal and Inflate a 1. Remove the tire sealant and Punctured Tire compressor kit from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Follow the directions closely for Sealant and Compressor Kit on correct sealant usage. page 10‑66. 10-62 Vehicle Care

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle inflation pressure can be found and the power plug (H). must be running while using the on the Tire and Loading 3. Place the kit on the ground. air compressor. Information label. See Tire Pressure on page 10‑43. Make sure the tire valve stem is 8. Turn the selector switch (A) positioned close to the ground counterclockwise to the The pressure gauge (C) may so the hose will reach it. Sealant + Air position. read higher than the actual tire 9. Press the on/off (B) button to pressure while the compressor 4. Remove the valve stem cap is on. Turn the compressor off from the flat tire by turning it turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on. to get an accurate pressure counterclockwise. reading. The compressor may 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) The compressor will inject be turned on/off until the onto the tire valve stem. Turn it sealant and air into the tire. correct pressure is reached. clockwise until it is tight. The pressure gauge (C) will Notice: If the recommended 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the initially show a high pressure pressure cannot be reached after accessory power outlet in the while the compressor pushes the approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle. Unplug all items from sealant into the tire. Once the vehicle should not be driven other accessory power outlets. sealant is completely dispersed farther. The tire is too severely See Power Outlets on into the tire, the pressure will damaged and the tire sealant and quickly drop and start to rise page 5‑8. compressor kit cannot inflate the again as the tire inflates with tire. Remove the power plug from If the vehicle has an accessory air only. the accessory power outlet and power outlet, do not use the unscrew the inflating hose from cigarette lighter. 10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation the tire valve. See Roadside If the vehicle only has a cigarette pressure using the pressure Assistance Program on lighter, use the cigarette lighter. gauge (C). The recommended page 13‑6. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. Vehicle Care 10-63

11. Press the on/off button (B) to 19. Stop at a safe location and turn the tire sealant and check the tire pressure. Refer compressor kit off. to Steps 1 through 11 under The tire is not sealed and will “Using the Tire Sealant and continue to leak air until the Compressor Kit without vehicle is driven and the Sealant to Inflate a Tire sealant is distributed in the 16. If the flat tire was able to (Not Punctured).” tire, therefore, Steps 12 inflate to the recommended If the tire pressure has fallen through 18 must be done inflation pressure, remove the more than 10 psi (68 kPa) immediately after Step 11. maximum speed label from the below the recommended sealant canister (E) and place inflation pressure, stop driving Be careful while handling the it in a highly visible location. tire sealant and compressor the vehicle. The tire is too The label is a reminder not to severely damaged and the tire kit as it could be warm after exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until usage. sealant cannot seal the tire. the damaged tire is repaired or See Roadside Assistance replaced. 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from Program on page 13‑6. the accessory power outlet in 17. Return the equipment to its the vehicle. If the tire pressure has original storage location in the not dropped more than 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) vehicle. 10 psi (68 kPa) from the counterclockwise to remove it 18. Immediately drive the vehicle recommended inflation from the tire valve stem. 5 miles (8 km) to distribute the pressure, inflate the tire to 14. Replace the tire valve sealant in the tire. the recommended inflation stem cap. pressure. 15. Replace the sealant/air 20. Wipe off any sealant from the hose (F), and the power wheel, tire, and vehicle. plug (H) back in their original location. 10-64 Vehicle Care

21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (E) and sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in accordance with local state codes and practices. 22. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer/retailer. 23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit, take the Always do a safety check first. See vehicle to an authorized If a Tire Goes Flat on page 10 57. dealer/retailer within a ‑ 100 miles (161 km) of driving 1. Remove the tire sealant and to have the tire repaired or compressor kit from its storage replaced. location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on Using the Tire Sealant and page 10‑66. Compressor Kit without 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) Sealant to Inflate a Tire and the power plug (H). (Not Punctured) 3. Place the kit on the ground. To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant: Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. Vehicle Care 10-65

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap 8. Turn the selector switch (A) If you inflate the tire higher from the flat tire by turning it clockwise to the Air Only than the recommended counterclockwise. position. pressure you can adjust 5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto 9. Press the on/off (B) button to the excess pressure by the tire valve stem by turning it turn the compressor on. pressing the pressure deflation clockwise until it is tight. button (D), if equipped, until The compressor will inflate the the proper pressure reading is 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the tire with air only. reached. This option is only accessory power outlet in the 10. Inflate the tire to the functional when using the air vehicle. Unplug all items from recommended inflation only hose (G). other accessory power outlets. pressure using the pressure See Power Outlets on 11. Press the on/off button (B) to gauge (C). The recommended turn the tire sealant and page 5‑8. inflation pressure can be compressor kit off. If the vehicle has an accessory found on the Tire and Loading power outlet, do not use the Information label. See Tire Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor cigarette lighter. Pressure on page 10‑43. kit as it could be warm after If the vehicle only has a cigarette The pressure gauge (C) may usage. lighter, use the cigarette lighter. read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from Do not pinch the power plug the accessory power outlet in cord in the door or window. is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading. the vehicle. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle The compressor may be turned 13. Disconnect the air only must be running while using the on/off until the correct pressure hose (G) from the tire air compressor. is reached. valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace the tire valve stem cap. 10-66 Vehicle Care

14. Replace the air only hose (G) Removal and Installation of the Storing the Tire Sealant and the power plug (H) and Sealant Canister cord back in its original and Compressor Kit location. To remove the sealant canister: The tire sealant and compressor 15. Place the equipment in the 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. kit is located in the storage original storage location in the 2. Press the canister release compartment on the driver side, vehicle. button. at the rear of the vehicle. 3. Pull up and remove the canister. 4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer/retailer. 5. Push the new canister into place.

1. Press down on the latch tab and The tire sealant and compressor kit pull the cover off to access the has an accessory adapter located in storage compartment. a compartment on the bottom of its housing that may be used to inflate 2. Press the two tabs on the quick air mattresses, balls, etc. release buckle to release the tire sealant and compressor kit strap. Vehicle Care 10-67

3. Remove the sealant 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the and compressor kit from bottom facing toward you. its tray. 5. Pull the jack straight out, To store the tire sealant and bottom first. compressor kit, reverse the steps. Tire Changing Removing Tools The tools needed to remove the spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side, at A. Tool Bag the rear of the vehicle. B. Wing Bolt 1. Open the jack storage compartment by pulling on the C. Jack latch tab, located toward the rear 2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by of the vehicle, and pulling the turning it counterclockwise cover off. The tools you will be using include 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the the jack (A) and lug wrench (B). holding bracket. 10-68 Vehicle Care

Removing the Spare Tire E. Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is located F. Retainer under the vehicle, in front of the rear G. Hoist Shaft Assembly bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on page 10‑77 for more information 1. Open the storage compartment about the compact spare. door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment. 2. Open the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment. 3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft. 4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench A. Rear Convenience Center until the spare tire can be pulled B. Lug Wrench out from under the vehicle. C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole D. Hoist Shaft 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening to remove the spare tire from the cable. Vehicle Care 10-69

6. Turn the wrench clockwise to Do the following to check the cable: 5. If you still cannot lower the raise the cable back up after 1. Check under the vehicle to see if spare tire to the ground, see removing the spare tire. the cable is visible. Secondary Latch System on page 10‑76. Do not store a full‐size or a flat 2. If it is not visible, see Secondary road tire under the vehicle. See Latch System on page 10‑76. Removing the Flat Tire and “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Tools” later in this section. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the lug 1. Do a safety check before To continue changing the flat tire, wrench clockwise until you hear proceeding. See If a Tire Goes see Removing the Flat Tire and “ two clicks or feel it skip twice. Flat on page 10‑57 for more Installing the Spare Tire later in this ” You cannot over‐tighten the information. section. cable. 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, 3. Loosen the cable by turning loosen the plastic nut caps with the wrench counterclockwise the wheel wrench. They will not three or four turns. come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry 4. If the spare tire has not lowered, along the edge of the cover until tighten the cable all the way and it comes off. Be careful; the then loosen it at least two times. edges may be sharp. Do not try If the spare tire did lower to the to remove the cover with your ground, continue with Step 5 bare hands. under Removing the Spare “ Store the wheel cover securely Tire (Vehicles with the Rear in the rear of the vehicle until Convenience Center) listed ” you have the flat tire repaired or previously. If the spare tire will not lower, the replaced. secondary latch could be engaged. 10-70 Vehicle Care

If the vehicle has aluminum could be damaged. Do not use an wheels, remove the wheel nut impact wrench to remove the { WARNING caps using the wheel wrench. wheel nuts if this vehicle has wheel locks. Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

4. To identify the appropriate { WARNING jacking location, find the Raising your vehicle with the triangle (A) about 12 inches (30.5 cm) from the front tire jack improperly positioned can or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm) damage the vehicle and even 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do from the rear tire. make the vehicle fall. To help not remove them — using the avoid personal injury and vehicle The triangle is located near each damage, be sure to fit the jack lift lug wrench. For wheels with a wheel on the vehicle's exterior. wheel lock key, use the wheel head into the proper location lock key between the lock nut Notice: If a jack is used to raise before raising the vehicle. and lug wrench. The key is the vehicle without positioning it supplied in the front passenger correctly, the vehicle could be 6. Attach the lug wrench to the door pocket. damaged. When raising the jack, and turn the wrench vehicle on a jack, avoid contact clockwise to raise the jack head Notice: If this vehicle has wheel with the rear axle control arms. 3 inches (7.6 cm). locks and an impact wrench is used to remove the wheel nuts, 5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the lock nut or wheel lock key the compact spare tire near you. Vehicle Care 10-71

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a 7. Place the jack under the vehicle 9. Remove the plastic spare tire paper towel to do this; but be sure as identified in Step 4. Raise the heat shield by pulling the rubber to use a scraper or wire brush vehicle by turning the lug wrench latch. Store the plastic spare tire later, if needed, to get all the rust clockwise in the jack. Raise heat shield. See “Storing a Flat or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat the vehicle far enough off the or Spare Tire and Tools” later in on page 10‑57. ground so that there is enough this section for more information. room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire. 10-72 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING { WARNING

Never use oil or grease on bolts Wheel nuts that are improperly or or nuts because the nuts might incorrectly tightened can cause come loose. The vehicle's wheel the wheels to become loose or could fall off, causing a crash. come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench 10. Remove any rust or dirt from to the proper torque specification the wheel bolts, mounting after replacing. Follow the torque surfaces, and spare wheel. specification supplied by the 11. Place the spare tire on the aftermarket manufacturer when wheel mounting surface. using accessory locking wheel 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in 12. Put the nuts on by hand by nuts. See Capacities and a crisscross sequence, as turning them clockwise until Specifications on page 12‑2 for shown. original equipment wheel nut the wheel is held against the Notice: Wheel covers will not fit torque specifications. mounting surface. Make sure on your vehicle's compact spare. the rounded end is toward the If you try to put a wheel cover on wheel. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake the compact spare, the cover or 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching pulsation and rotor damage. the spare could be damaged. the lug wrench to the jack To avoid expensive brake repairs, and turning the wrench evenly tighten the wheel nuts in counterclockwise. Lower the the proper sequence and to the jack completely. proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 12‑2 for the wheel nut torque specification. Vehicle Care 10-73

Storing the Spare Tire 4. When the compact spare tire is { WARNING almost in the stored position, { WARNING turn the tire so the valve is Storing a jack, a tire, or other toward the rear of the vehicle. equipment in the passenger The underbody-mounted spare compartment of the vehicle could This position helps when tire needs to be stored with the cause injury. In a sudden stop or checking the air pressure in valve stem pointing down. If the collision, loose equipment could the compact spare tire. spare tire is stored with the valve strike someone. Store all these in 5. Raise the tire fully against stem pointing upwards, the the proper place. the underside of the vehicle. secondary latch will not work Continue turning the lug wrench properly and the spare tire could To store the spare tire: until you feel more than two loosen and suddenly fall from the 1. Lay the compact spare tire near clicks. This indicates that the vehicle. If this happened when compact spare tire is secure and the vehicle was being driven, the the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem down. the cable is tight. The spare tire tire might contact a person or hoist cannot be overtightened. another vehicle, causing injury 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire and damage to itself. Be sure the heat shield on the compact underbody-mounted spare tire is spare tire. stored with the valve stem 3. Slide the cable retainer through pointing down. the center of the wheel and start to raise the compact spare tire. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 10-74 Vehicle Care

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

6. Make sure the tire is stored 5. Hook the cable onto the outside securely. Push, pull (A), and then portion of the liftgate hinges (B). try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the lug wrench to 6. Hook the other end of the cable tighten the cable. onto the outside portion of the 4. Pull the cable (A) through the liftgate hinge on the other side of Storing the Flat Tire door striker (E), the center of the the vehicle. 1. Remove the cable package from wheel (D), and the plastic spare 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it the jack storage area. tire heat shield (C), as shown. is secure. 2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels. Vehicle Care 10-75

Storing the Tools Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 1. Ensure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you. 2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place down on the holding bracket. 3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning clockwise. 8. Make sure the metal tube is 4. To replace the cover, line up the centered at the striker. Push the tab at the front of the cover with A. Tool Bag tube toward the front of the the notch in the cover opening. vehicle. B. Wing Bolt Push the cover in place and 9. Close the liftgate and make sure C. Jack make sure that the rear clips are it is latched properly. in the slots and push the cover closed. Store the center cap or the plastic bolt‐on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When you replace the compact spare with a full‐size tire, reinstall the bolt‐on wheel covers or the center cap. Hand‐tighten them over the wheel nuts, using the lug wrench. 10-76 Vehicle Care

Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: This vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that { has a secondary latch system. It is WARNING designed to stop the compact spare Someone standing too close tire from suddenly falling off the during the procedure could be vehicle if the cable holding the injured by the jack. If the spare spare tire is damaged. For the tire does not slide off the jack secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem completely, make sure no one is pointing down. See Tire Changing behind you or on either side of on page 10‑67 for instructions on you as you pull the jack out from storing the spare tire correctly. under the spare. All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicle shown 2. Turn the lug wrench 1. If the cable is not visible, start { WARNING counterclockwise until this procedure at Step 3. approximately 6 inches (15 cm) Before beginning this procedure of cable is exposed. read all the instructions. Failure to 3. Attach the lug wrench to the read and follow the instructions jack and raise the jack at least could damage the hoist assembly 10 turns. and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. instructions listed next. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. Vehicle Care 10-77

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to Have the hoist shaft assembly raise the jack until it lifts the inspected as soon as you can. secondary latch spring. You will not be able to store a spare 6. Keep raising the jack until the tire using the hoist assembly until it spare tire stops moving upward has been repaired or replaced. and is held firmly in place. This lets you know that the secondary Compact Spare Tire latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. { WARNING

Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from could result in loss of braking the jack and carefully remove and handling. This could lead to the jack. Use one hand to push a crash and you or others could against the spare tire while firmly be injured. Use only one compact pulling the jack out from under spare tire at a time. the spare tire with the other hand. The compact spare tire, if the 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it vehicle has one, was fully inflated through the wheel opening when the vehicle was new, however, when the spare tire has been it can lose air after a time. Check 7. Lower the jack by turning the lug completely lowered. the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). wrench counterclockwise. Keep 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise lowering the jack until the spare to raise the cable back up if the tire slides off the jack. cable is hanging. 10-78 Vehicle Care

After installing the compact Notice: When the compact spare The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system spare on the vehicle, stop as soon is installed, do not take the will be automatically disabled as possible and make sure the vehicle through an automatic when you use the compact spare. spare tire is correctly inflated. car wash with guide rails. The To restore the AWD and prevent The compact spare is made to compact spare can get caught on excessive wear on the clutch in your perform well at speeds up to the rails which can damage the AWD, replace the compact spare 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up tire, wheel and other parts of the tire with a full-size tire as soon as to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you vehicle. possible. can finish your trip and have the Do not use the compact spare on Notice: Tire chains will not fit the full-size tire repaired or replaced other vehicles. compact spare. Using them can at your convenience. Of course, And do not mix the compact spare damage the vehicle and can it is best to replace the spare with damage the chains too. Do not a full-size tire as soon as possible. tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the use tire chains on the compact The spare tire will last longer and spare. be in good shape in case it is spare tire and its wheel together. needed again. Vehicle Care 10-79

Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps 2. Get the vehicles close enough could result in costly damage to so the jumper cables can reach, If the vehicle's battery has run the vehicle that would not be but be sure the vehicles are not down, you may want to use another covered by the warranty. touching each other. If they vehicle and some jumper cables to Trying to start the vehicle by are, it could cause a ground start your vehicle. Be sure to use pushing or pulling it will not connection you do not want. the following steps to do it safely. work, and it could damage the You would not be able to start vehicle. your vehicle, and the bad { WARNING grounding could damage the 1. Check the other vehicle. It must electrical systems. Batteries can hurt you. They can have a 12‐volt battery with a negative ground system. To avoid the possibility of the be dangerous because: vehicles rolling, set the parking . They contain acid that can Notice: If the other vehicle's brake firmly on both vehicles burn you. system is not a 12-volt system involved in the jump start with a negative ground, both procedure. Put an automatic . They contain gas that can vehicles can be damaged. Only transmission in P (Park) or a explode or ignite. use vehicles with 12-volt systems manual transmission in Neutral . They contain enough with negative grounds to jump before setting the parking brake. electricity to burn you. start your vehicle. If one of the vehicles is a If you do not follow these steps four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer case is not in exactly, some or all of these Neutral. things can hurt you. 10-80 Vehicle Care

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the { WARNING { WARNING jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs Using a match near a battery can Fans or other moving engine would not be covered by the cause battery gas to explode. parts can injure you badly. Keep warranty. Always turn off the People have been hurt doing this, your hands away from moving radio and other accessories and some have been blinded. parts once the engine is running. when jump starting the vehicle. Use a flashlight if you need more light. 5. Check that the jumper cables 3. Turn off the ignition on both do not have loose or missing vehicles. Unplug unnecessary Be sure the batteries have insulation. If they do, you could accessories plugged into the enough water. You do not need ® get a shock. The vehicles could cigarette lighter or the accessory to add water to the ACDelco be damaged too. power outlets. Turn off the radio battery (or batteries) installed in and all lamps that are not your new vehicle. But if a battery Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you needed. This will avoid sparks has filler caps, be sure the right should know. Positive (+) will go and help save both batteries. amount of fluid is there. If it is low, And it could save the radio! to positive (+) or to a remote add water to take care of that positive (+) terminal if the vehicle 4. Open the hoods and locate the first. If you do not, explosive gas has one. Negative (−) will go to a positive (+) and negative (−) could be present. heavy, unpainted metal engine terminal locations on the other Battery fluid contains acid that part or to a remote negative (−) vehicle. Your vehicle has a can burn you. Do not get it on terminal if the vehicle has one. remote positive (+) and a you. If you accidentally get it in remote negative (−) jump starting terminal. See Engine your eyes or on your skin, flush Compartment Overview on the place with water and get medical help immediately. page 10‑6 for more information on the terminal locations. Vehicle Care 10-81

Do not connect positive (+) to 7. Do not let the other end touch negative (−) or you will get a metal. Connect it to the short that would damage the positive (+) terminal of the battery and maybe other parts good battery. Use a remote too. And do not connect the positive (+) terminal if the vehicle negative (−) cable to the has one. negative (−) terminal on the 8. Now connect the black dead battery because this can negative (−) cable to the cause sparks. negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. 9. Connect the other end of the Do not let the other end touch negative (−) cable at least anything until the next step. 18 inches (45 cm) away from The other end of the negative (−) the dead battery, but not near cable does not go to the dead engine parts that move. battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, The electrical connection is just or to a remote negative (−) as good there, and the chance terminal on the vehicle with the of sparks getting back to the dead battery. battery is much less. 6. Connect the red positive (+) Your vehicle has a remote cable to the positive (+) terminal negative (−) terminal for this of the dead battery. purpose. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 10-82 Vehicle Care

10. Now start the vehicle with the To disconnect the jumper cables good battery and run the from both vehicles, do the following: engine for a while. 1. Disconnect the black 11. Try to start the vehicle that negative (−) cable from the had the dead battery. If it will vehicle that had the dead not start after a few tries, it battery. probably needs service. 2. Disconnect the black Notice: If the jumper cables are negative (−) cable from the connected or removed in the vehicle with the good battery. wrong order, electrical shorting 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) may occur and damage the cable from the vehicle with the vehicle. The repairs would not be Jumper Cable Removal good battery. covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) cable from the other vehicle. order, making sure that the Terminal cables do not touch each other B. Good Battery or Remote or other metal. Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal Vehicle Care 10-83

Towing Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to Towing consider before recreational vehicle Towing the Vehicle towing: Recreational vehicle towing . What is the towing capacity To avoid damage, the disabled means towing the vehicle behind of the towing vehicle? vehicle should be towed with all four another vehicle – such as behind a Be sure to read the tow wheels off the ground. Consult your motorhome. The two most common vehicle manufacturer's dealer/retailer or a professional types of recreational vehicle towing recommendations. towing service if the disabled are known as dinghy towing and vehicle must be towed. dolly towing. Dinghy towing is . What is the distance that will be towing the vehicle with all travelled? Some vehicles have To tow the vehicle behind four wheels on the ground. restrictions on how far and how another vehicle for recreational Dolly towing is towing the vehicle long they can tow. purposes — such as behind a with two wheels on the ground and . motorhome, see Recreational Is the proper towing equipment two wheels up on a device known Vehicle Towing following. going to be used? See your as a dolly. dealer/retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. . Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed. 10-84 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing If the vehicle is all‐wheel‐drive, it 5. Shift the transmission to can be dinghy towed from the front. N (Neutral). These vehicles can also be towed 6. To prevent the battery from by placing them on a platform draining while the vehicle is trailer with all four wheels off of the being towed, remove the ground. These vehicles cannot be 50 amp BATT1 fuse from the towed using a dolly. underhood fuse block and store For vehicles being dinghy towed, in a safe location. See Engine the vehicle should be run at the Compartment Fuse Block on beginning of each day and at each page 10‑30. RV fuel stop for about five minutes. 7. Release the parking brake. This will ensure proper lubrication of transmission components. Re-install Notice: If the vehicle is towed the fuse to start the vehicle. without performing each of the If the vehicle is front-wheel‐drive, it steps listed under “Dinghy To tow the vehicle from the front Towing, the automatic can be dinghy towed from the front. with all four wheels on the ground: ” These vehicles may also be towed transmission could be damaged. by putting the front wheels on a 1. Position the vehicle to be Be sure to follow all steps of the dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in towed, shift the transmission to dinghy towing procedure prior to this section. P (Park), and turn the ignition to and after towing the vehicle. LOCK/OFF. Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) 2. Secure the vehicle to the towing is exceeded while towing the vehicle. vehicle, it could be damaged. 3. Set the parking brake. Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing the vehicle. 4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY. Vehicle Care 10-85

Once the destination is reached: Dolly Towing Dolly Towing 1. Set the parking brake. (All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles) (Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles Only) 2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the underhood fuse block. 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park), turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from the ignition. 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the towing vehicle. Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire. Towing All-wheel‐drive vehicles must not with two different tire sizes on be towed with two wheels on the To tow a front-wheel drive vehicle the front of the vehicle can ‐ ground. To properly tow these from the front with two wheels on cause severe damage to the vehicles, they should be placed on the ground: transmission. a platform trailer with all four wheels 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 3. Set the parking brake. 10-86 Vehicle Care

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a Appearance Care straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing. Exterior Care 5. Remove the key from the Cleaning Exterior ignition. Lamps/Lenses 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a 7. Release the parking brake. soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Towing the Vehicle From Follow instructions under “Washing the Rear the Vehicle” later in this section. Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, Finish Care repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. If the vehicle has a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: Machine compounding Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Notice: Certain cleaners contain or aggressive polishing on a Parts chemicals that can damage the basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be emblems or nameplates on the may damage it. Use only cleaned regularly to keep their vehicle. Check the cleaning non-abrasive waxes and polishes luster. Wash with water or use product label. If it states that it that are made for a basecoat/ chrome polish on chrome or should not be used on plastic clearcoat paint finish on the stainless steel trim, if necessary. parts, do not use it on the vehicle vehicle. or damage may occur and it Use special care with aluminum Foreign materials such as calcium would not be covered by the trim. To avoid damaging protective warranty. chloride and other salts, ice melting trim, never use auto or chrome agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, polish, steam or caustic soap to Do not use cleaning agents that are bird droppings, chemicals from clean aluminum. A coating of petroleum based or that contain industrial chimneys, etc., can wax, rubbed to high polish, is acid or abrasives, as they can damage the vehicle's finish if they recommended for all bright metal damage the paint, metal or plastic remain on painted surfaces. Wash parts. on the vehicle. Approved cleaning the vehicle as soon as possible. products can be obtained from If necessary, use non-abrasive Washing the Vehicle your dealer/retailer. Follow all cleaners that are marked safe for manufacturer directions regarding To preserve the vehicle's finish, painted surfaces to remove foreign correct product usage, necessary keep it clean by washing it often. matter. safety precautions and appropriate Do not wash the vehicle in Exterior painted surfaces are disposal of any vehicle care direct sunlight and use a car subject to aging, weather and product. washing soap. chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. 10-88 Vehicle Care

Rinse the vehicle well, before Weatherstrips These chlorides are used on washing and after to remove all roads for conditions such as Silicone grease on weatherstrips will cleaning agents completely. If they ice and dust. Always wash the make them last longer, seal better, are allowed to dry on the surface, vehicle's chrome with soap and and not stick or squeak. Apply they could stain. water after exposure. silicone grease with a clean cloth. Dry the finish with a soft, clean During very cold, damp weather Notice: Using strong soaps, chamois or an all-cotton towel to frequent application may be chemicals, abrasive polishes, avoid surface scratches and water required. See Recommended Fluids cleaners, brushes, or cleaners spotting. and Lubricants on page 11‑8. that contain acid on aluminum High pressure car washes could or chrome-plated wheels, could Wheels and Trim — Aluminum damage the surface of the cause water to enter the vehicle. or Chrome Avoid using high pressure washes wheel(s). The repairs would closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to the The vehicle may have either not be covered by the vehicle surface of the vehicle. Use of power aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. warranty. Use only approved washers exceeding 8,274 kPa cleaners on aluminum or Keep the wheels clean using a soft chrome-plated wheels. (1,200 psi) can result in damage or clean cloth with mild soap and removal of paint and decals. water. Rinse with clean water. After The surface of these wheels is Notice: Conveyor systems on rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft similar to the painted surface of the some automatic car washes could clean towel. A wax may then be vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, damage the vehicle. There may applied. chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with not be enough clearance for the Notice: Chrome wheels and other undercarriage. Check with the car acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes chrome trim may be damaged if on them because the surface could wash manager before using the the vehicle is not washed after automatic car wash. be damaged. Do not use chrome driving on roads that have polish on aluminum wheels. been sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. Vehicle Care 10-89

Notice: Using chrome polish on Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires aluminum wheels could damage Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to the wheels. The repairs would with glass cleaner. clean the tires. not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish on Clean the rubber blades using a lint Notice: Using petroleum-based chrome wheels only. free cloth or paper towel soaked tire dressing products on the with windshield washer fluid or a vehicle may damage the paint Use chrome polish only on mild detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying chrome-plated wheels, but avoid thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off any painted surface of the wheel, blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, any overspray from all painted and buff off immediately after and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle. application. treatments may cause wiper Notice: Driving the vehicle streaking. Replace the wiper blades Sheet Metal Damage through an automatic car wash if they are worn or damaged. If the vehicle is damaged and that has silicone carbide tire Wipers can be damaged by: requires sheet metal repair or cleaning brushes, could damage replacement, make sure the body the aluminum or chrome-plated . Extreme dusty conditions repair shop applies anti-corrosion wheels. The repairs would not be . Sand and salt material to parts repaired or covered by the vehicle warranty. replaced to restore corrosion . Never drive a vehicle that has Heat and sun protection. aluminum or chrome-plated . Snow and ice, without proper Original manufacturer replacement wheels through an automatic car removal wash that uses silicone carbide parts will provide the corrosion tire cleaning brushes. protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty. 10-90 Vehicle Care

Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these Interior Care materials from the underbody with Any stone chips, fractures or deep plain water. Clean any areas where The vehicle's interior will continue scratches in the finish should be mud and debris can collect. Dirt to look its best if it is cleaned often. repaired right away. Bare metal will packed in close areas of the frame Dust and dirt can accumulate on the corrode quickly and may develop should be loosened before being upholstery and cause damage to into major repair expense. flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an the carpet, fabric, leather, and Minor chips and scratches can be underbody car washing system can plastic surfaces. Stains should be repaired with touch-up materials do this. removed quickly as extreme heat available from your dealer/retailer. could cause them to set rapidly. Chemical Paint Spotting Larger areas of finish damage can Lighter colored interiors may be corrected in your dealer's/ Some weather and atmospheric require more frequent cleaning. retailer's body and paint shop. conditions can create a chemical Newspapers and garments that can Underbody Maintenance fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall transfer color to home furnishings upon and attack painted surfaces on can also transfer color to the Chemicals used for ice and snow the vehicle. This damage can take vehicle's interior. removal and dust control can collect two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped Remove dust from small buttons on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular and knobs with a small brush with removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint soft bristles. develop on the underbody parts surface. such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, Your dealer/retailer has products for and exhaust system even though cleaning the vehicle's interior. When they have corrosion protection. cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces that are being cleaned. Permanent damage can Vehicle Care 10-91 result from using cleaners on Do not clean the interior using the . Do not heavily saturate the surfaces for which they were not following cleaners or techniques: upholstery while cleaning. intended. Apply the cleaner directly . . Never use a knife or any other Damage to the vehicle's interior to the cleaning cloth to prevent sharp object to remove a soil may result from the use of many over-spray. Remove any accidental from any interior surface. organic solvents such as naptha, over-spray from other surfaces alcohol, etc. immediately. . Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's Fabric/Carpet Notice: Using abrasive cleaners interior surfaces. when cleaning glass surfaces on Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft the vehicle, could scratch the . Never apply heavy pressure or brush attachment to remove dust glass and/or cause damage to rub aggressively with a cleaning and loose dirt. A canister vacuum the rear window defogger. When cloth. Use of heavy pressure can with a beater bar in the nozzle may cleaning the glass on the vehicle, damage the interior and does only be used on floor carpet and use only a soft cloth and glass not improve the effectiveness of carpeted floor mats. For soils, cleaner. soil removal. always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda. Before . Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Cleaners can contain solvents that cleaning, gently remove as much of can become concentrated in the Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with the soil as possible using one of the vehicle's interior. Before using following techniques: cleaners, read and adhere to all degreasers. Using too much safety instructions on the label. soap will leave a residue that . For liquids: gently blot the While cleaning the vehicle's interior, leaves streaks and attracts dirt. remaining soil with a paper maintain adequate ventilation by For liquid cleaners, about towel. Allow the soil to absorb opening the vehicle's doors and 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of into the paper towel until no windows. water is a good guide. more can be removed. . For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum. 10-92 Vehicle Care

To clean: A paper towel can be used to blot Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white excess moisture from the fabric or Other Plastic Surfaces carpet after the cleaning process. cloth with water or club soda. To remove dust, a soft cloth 2. Remove excess moisture. Leather dampened with water can be used. If a more thorough cleaning is To remove dust, a soft cloth 3. Start on the outside edge of the necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with water can be used. soil and gently rub toward the dampened with a mild soap solution If a more thorough cleaning is center. Continue cleaning, using can be used to gently remove dust necessary, a soft cloth dampened a clean area of the cloth each and dirt. Never use spot lifters or with a mild soap solution can be time it becomes soiled. removers on plastic surfaces. Many used. Allow the leather to dry commercial cleaners and coatings 4. Continue to gently rub the naturally. Do not use heat, steam, that are sold to preserve and soiled area. or spot lifters or spot removers, protect soft plastic surfaces 5. If the soil is not completely or shoe polish on leather. Many may permanently change the removed, use a mild soap commercial leather cleaners appearance and feel of the interior solution and repeat the cleaning and coatings that are sold to and are not recommended. Do not process with plain water. preserve and protect leather use silicone or wax-based products, may permanently change the If any of the soil remains, a or those containing organic solvents appearance and feel of the leather commercial fabric cleaner or spot to clean the vehicle's interior and are not recommended. Do not lifter may be necessary. Test a small because they can alter the use silicone or wax-based products, hidden area for colorfastness before appearance by increasing the or those containing organic using a commercial upholstery gloss in a non-uniform manner. solvents to clean the vehicle's cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally interior because they can alter the cleaned area gives any impression appearance by increasing the gloss that a ring formation may result, in a non-uniform manner. clean the entire surface. Vehicle Care 10-93

Some commercial products may Floor Mats increase gloss on the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may If the floor mat has a snap retainer, cause annoying reflections in the a grommet in the driver side floor windshield and even make it difficult mat attaches to a hook on the floor to see through the windshield under of the vehicle to secure the floor certain conditions. mat. To remove the floor mat, pull the mat towards the rear of the Care of Safety Belts vehicle until the grommet can be Keep belts clean and dry. removed from the hook. If the floor mat has a knob retainer, { WARNING a grommet in the floor mat attaches to a knob on the floor of the vehicle Do not bleach or dye safety belts. to secure the floor mat. To remove It may severely weaken them. In the floor mat, turn the knob till it is a crash, they might not be able to aligned with the slot in the floor mat provide adequate protection. grommet and pull the floor mat up. Clean safety belts only with mild To reinstall, center the slot in the soap and lukewarm water. floor mat grommet with the knob on the floor and set the mat in place. Then turn the knob until it is perpendicular to the slot in the grommet to lock the mat in place. 10-94 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES Service and Maintenance 11-1

General Information Please read the information under Service and Scheduled Maintenance. To keep Maintenance Notice: Maintenance the vehicle in good condition, see intervals, checks, inspections, your dealer/retailer. recommended fluids, and The maintenance schedule is for lubricants are necessary to General Information vehicles that: General Information ...... 11-1 keep this vehicle in good working condition. Damage . Carry passengers and cargo Scheduled Maintenance caused by failure to follow within recommended limits on Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 scheduled maintenance might the Tire and Loading Information not be covered by the vehicle label. See Vehicle Load Limits Recommended Fluids, warranty. on page 9‑12. Lubricants, and Parts . Recommended Fluids and Proper vehicle maintenance helps Are driven on reasonable road Lubricants ...... 11-8 to keep the vehicle in good working surfaces within legal driving Maintenance Replacement condition, improves fuel economy, limits. Parts ...... 11-10 and reduces vehicle emissions for . Use the recommended fuel. better air quality. See Recommended Fuel on Maintenance Records Because of all the different ways page 9‑43. Maintenance Records ...... 11-11 people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. 11-2 Service and Maintenance

The proper replacement parts, Scheduled { WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance Performing maintenance work can Lubricants on page 11‑8 and be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑10. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer/ Change engine oil and filter. have the required know-how and retailer. See Engine Oil on page 10‑8. the proper tools and equipment. An Emission Control Service. If in doubt, see your dealer/ Rotation of New Tires retailer to have a qualified To maintain ride, handling, and When the “Change Engine Oil technician do the work. performance of the vehicle, it is Soon” message displays, service is See Doing Your Own Service important that the first rotation required for the vehicle as soon as possible, within the next 1 000 km/ Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to 13 000 km 600 miles. If driving under the best At your General Motors dealer/ (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire conditions, the engine oil life system retailer, you can be certain that Rotation on page 10‑49. might not indicate the need for you will receive the highest level vehicle service for more than a year. of service available. Your dealer/ The engine oil and filter must be retailer has specially trained service changed at least once a year and technicians, uses genuine GM the oil life system must be reset. replacement parts, as well as, up to Your dealer/retailer has trained date tools and equipment to ensure service technicians who will perform fast and accurate diagnostics. this work and reset the system. Service and Maintenance 11-3

If the engine oil life system is reset Maintenance I . Fluids visual leak check accidentally, service the vehicle (or every 12 months, whichever . Change engine oil and filter. within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since occurs first). A leak in any See Engine Oil on page 10 8. the last service. Reset the oil life ‑ system must be repaired and An Emission Control Service. system whenever the oil is changed. the fluid level checked. See Engine Oil Life System on . Engine coolant level check. . Engine air cleaner filter page 10‑9. See Engine Coolant on inspection (vehicles driven page 10‑14. When the “Change Engine Oil in dusty conditions only). See Soon” message displays, certain . Windshield washer fluid level Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on services, checks, and inspections check. See Washer Fluid on page 10‑12. are required. The services page 10‑21. . Brake system inspection described for Maintenance I should . Tire inflation check. See Tire (or every 12 months, whichever be performed at every engine oil Pressure on page 10‑43. occurs first). change. The services described for Maintenance II should be . Tire wear inspection. See Tire performed when: Inspection on page 10‑49. . Maintenance I was performed . Rotate tires. See Tire Rotation the last time the engine oil on page 10‑49. was changed. . It has been 10 months or more since the “Change Engine Oil Soon” message has displayed or since the last service. 11-4 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance II . Body hinges and latches, key . Restraint system component lock cylinders, hood latch check. See Safety System . Perform all services described in assemblies, secondary latches, Check on page 3‑31. Maintenance I. pivots, spring anchor and . Engine air cleaner filter . Steering and suspension release pawl, hood and door inspection. See Engine Air hinges, rear folding seats, inspection. Visual inspection Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑12. for damaged, loose, or missing and liftgate hinges lubrication. parts or signs of wear. See Recommended Fluids and Additional Required Services Lubricants on page 11 8. . ‑ Engine cooling system More frequent lubrication At Each Fuel Stop inspection. Visual inspection may be required when vehicle . Engine oil level check. of hoses, pipes, fittings, and is exposed to a corrosive See Engine Oil on page 10‑8. clamps and replacement, environment. Applying silicone . Engine coolant level check. if needed. grease on weatherstrips with a See Engine Coolant on . Windshield wiper blade clean cloth makes them last page 10 14. inspection for wear, cracking, longer, seal better, and not stick ‑ or contamination and windshield or squeak. . Windshield washer fluid level and wiper blade cleaning, check. See Washer Fluid on if contaminated. See Exterior page 10‑21. Care on page 10‑86. Worn or damaged wiper blade replacement. See Wiper Blade Replacement on page 10‑27. Service and Maintenance 11-5

Once a Month . Engine cooling system and First Engine Oil Change After pressure cap pressure check. Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles . Tire inflation check. See Tire Radiator and air conditioning Pressure on page 10‑43. condenser outside cleaning. . Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks. . Tire wear inspection. See Tire See Cooling System on Inspection on page 10‑49. page 10‑14. First Engine Oil Change After . Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles Once a Year Exhaust system and nearby heat shields inspection for loose or . Engine air cleaner filter . See Starter Switch Check on damaged components. replacement. See Engine Air page 10‑26. . Accelerator pedal check for Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑12. . See Automatic Transmission damage, high effort, or binding. . Shift Lock Control System Automatic transmission fluid Replace if needed. change (severe service) for Check on page 10‑26. . If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant vehicles mainly driven in . See Ignition Transmission Lock and Compressor Kit, check the heavy city traffic in hot weather, Check on page 10‑26. sealant expiration date printed in hilly or mountainous terrain, . See Park Brake and P (Park) on the instruction label of the when frequently towing a Mechanism Check on kit. See Tire Sealant and trailer, or used for taxi, page 10‑27. Compressor Kit on page 10‑59. police, or delivery service. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11. 11-6 Service and Maintenance

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfer First Engine Oil Change After First Engine Oil Change After case fluid change (severe Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles service) for vehicles mainly driven when frequently towing a . Automatic transmission fluid . Engine cooling system drain, trailer, or used for taxi, police, change (normal service). flush, and refill, cooling system or delivery service. During any See Automatic Transmission and cap pressure check, and maintenance, if a power washer Fluid on page 10‑11. cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning condenser is used to clean mud and dirt . Spark plug replacement and from the underbody, care should spark plug wires inspection. (or every 5 years, whichever be taken to not directly spray An Emission Control Service. occurs first). See Cooling the transfer case output seals. System on page 10‑14. An . All wheel drive only: Transfer High pressure water can ‐ Emission Control Service. case fluid change (normal overcome the seals and . service). During any Engine accessory drive belt contaminate the transfer case maintenance, if a power washer inspection for fraying, excessive fluid. Contaminated fluid will is used to clean mud and dirt cracks, or obvious damage decrease the life of the transfer from the underbody, care should and replacement, if needed. case and should be replaced. be taken to not directly spray An Emission Control Service. the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced. Service and Maintenance 11-7

Maintenance Service Maintenance I II Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • Tire inflation pressures check. • • Tire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Steering and suspension inspection. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). • 11-8 Service and Maintenance

Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for the vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 10‑8. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant. Engine Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 10‑14. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, Hydraulic Power Steering System in Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Service and Maintenance 11-9

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Carrier Assembly Differential — SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, (Rear Drive Module) and Transfer ‐ in Canada 89021678). Case (Power Transfer Unit) Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges and Rear Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Folding Seat in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). 11-10 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107 Wiper Blades Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 — Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 — Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 15276259 — Service and Maintenance 11-11

Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 11-12 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Service and Maintenance 11-13

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading 11-14 Service and Maintenance

Maintenance Record (cont'd) Odometer Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN Vehicle Identification is the engine code. This code Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine, Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications” Service Parts under Capacities and Specifications Identification Label ...... 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's engine code. Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications ...... 12-2 Service Parts Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label This legal identifier is in the front This label, on the inside of the glove corner of the instrument panel, on box, has the following information: the left side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from . Vehicle Identification outside. The VIN also appears on Number (VIN) the Vehicle Certification and Service . Model designation Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. . Paint information . Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 11‑8 for more information. Capacities Application Metric English For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt Engine Oil with Filter 5.2 L 5.5 qt Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing 3.6L V6 Engine 12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES Customer Information 13-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Information Customer Reporting Safety Defects to Information the United States Government ...... 13-14 Customer Satisfaction Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are Customer Satisfaction Government ...... 13-15 important to your dealer and to Procedure ...... 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to GMC. Normally, any concerns General Motors ...... 13-15 Customer Assistance with the sales transaction or the Offices ...... 13-4 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4 Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes, Online Owner Center ...... 13-5 however, despite the best intentions GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy ...... 13-16 Event Data Recorders ...... 13-16 of all concerned, misunderstandings Program ...... 13-6 can occur. If your concern has not Roadside Assistance Navigation System ...... 13-17 Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction, Program ...... 13-6 the following steps should be taken: Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) ...... 13-17 Appointments ...... 13-8 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Courtesy Transportation Statement ...... 13-17 with a member of dealership Program ...... 13-9 management. Normally, concerns Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10 can be quickly resolved at that level. Service Publications If the matter has already been Ordering Information ...... 13-13 reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a Have the following information STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: member of dealership management, available to give the Customer Both General Motors and your it appears your concern cannot be Assistance Representative: dealer are committed to making resolved by the dealership without sure you are completely satisfied . Vehicle Identification Number further help, in the U.S., call the (VIN). This is available from the with your new vehicle. However, GMC Consumer Relations vehicle registration or title, or if you continue to remain unsatisfied Manager at 1-800-GMC-8782 the plate at the top left of the after following the procedure (1-800-462-8782, Customer instrument panel and visible outlined in Steps One and Two, Assistance prompt). In Canada, through the windshield. you can file with the Better Business call General Motors of Canada Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to Customer Communication at . Dealership name and location. enforce your rights. 1-800-263-3777 (English) or . Vehicle delivery date and The BBB Auto Line Program is an 1-800-263-7854 (French). present mileage. out of court program administered We encourage you to call the When contacting GMC, remember by the Council of Better Business toll-free number in order to give that your concern will likely be Bureaus to settle automotive your inquiry prompt attention. resolved at a dealer's facility. disputes regarding vehicle repairs or That is why we suggest following the interpretation of the New Vehicle Step One first. Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filling out a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you. Customer Information 13-3

You may contact the BBB Auto STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Line Program using the toll-free Owners: In the event that you eligibility in the Canadian Motor telephone number or write them do not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), at the following address: been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or BBB Auto Line Program procedure outlined in Steps One call the General Motors Customer Council of Better Business and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre, Bureaus, Inc. Limited wants you to be aware 1-800-263-3777 (English), 4200 Wilson Boulevard of its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), Suite 800 Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to: Arlington, VA 22203-1838 General Motors of Canada Limited Mediation/Arbitration Program has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 of owner disputes involving dr.bbb.org/goauto Centre factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited This program is available in all claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 50 states and the District of the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Columbia. Eligibility is limited by an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 vehicle age, mileage, and other may include an informal hearing factors. General Motors reserves before the arbiter. The program is Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 the right to change eligibility designed so that the entire dispute Your inquiry should be accompanied limitations and/or discontinue its settlement process, from the time by the Vehicle Identification participation in this program. you file your complaint to the final Number (VIN). decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge. 13-4 Customer Information

Customer Assistance Canada Mexico, Central America and Offices General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries Customer Communication Centre, (Except Puerto Rico and GMC encourages customers to call CA1-163-005 U.S. Virgin Islands) the toll-free number for assistance. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive However, if a customer wishes to General Motors de Mexico, Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 write or e-mail GMC, the letter S. de R.L. de C.V. www.gmcanada.com should be addressed to: Customer Assistance Center 1-800-263-3777 (English) Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 United States 1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Lomas de Bezares GMC Customer Assistance Center 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. P.O. Box 33172 Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-508-0000 Detroit, MI 48232-5172 Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 1-800-268-6800 www.GMC.com Customer Assistance for 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782) All Overseas Locations 1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) Please contact the local General Text Telephone (TTY) (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Motors Business Unit. Users Roadside Assistance: To assist customers who are deaf, 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782) hard of hearing, or speech-impaired From Puerto Rico and who use the Text Telephones 1-800-496-9992 (English) (TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can U.S. Virgin Islands: communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-496-9994 1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Information 13-5

Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable GMC − www.gmc.com tools and services you will have Online Owner Center (U.S.) — access to: GMC Merchandise www.gmownercenter.com/gmc — . www.gmccollection.com My Showroom: Find and save Information and services information on vehicles and customized for your specific Help Center — current offers in your area. www.gmc.com/helpcenter vehicle — all in one convenient . My Dealers/Retailers: Save place. . FAQ details such as address and . Digital owner manual, warranty . Contact Us phone number for each of your information, and more preferred GM dealers/retailers. My GM Canada . . My Driveway: Access quick Online service and maintenance (Canada) www.gm.ca records — links to parts and service My GM Canada is a estimates, check trade-in . Find GMC dealers for service password-protected section of values, or schedule a service nationwide www.gm.ca where you can save appointment by adding the . Exclusive privileges and offers information on GM vehicles, get vehicles you own to your . Recall notices for your specific personalized offers, and use handy driveway profile. vehicle tools and forms with greater ease. . My Preferences: Manage your . OnStar® and GM Cardmember profile and use tools and forms Services Earnings summaries with greater ease. To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within www.gm.ca. 13-6 Customer Information

GM Mobility gmmobility.com or call the GM Calling for Assistance Mobility Assistance Center at When calling Roadside Assistance, Reimbursement Program 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone have the following information (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. ready: General Motors of Canada also . Your name, home address, and has a Mobility Program. Call home telephone number 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call . Telephone number of your 1-800-263-3830. location . Location of the vehicle This program, available to qualified Roadside Assistance applicants, can reimburse you up . Model, year, color, and license to $1,000 of the cost of eligible Program plate number of the vehicle aftermarket adaptive equipment For U.S. purchased vehicles, call required for your vehicle, such as . Odometer reading, Vehicle 1‐800‐GMC-8782 (1‐800‐462‐8782); Identification Number (VIN), and hand controls or a wheelchair/ (Text telephone (TTY): scooter lift. delivery date of the vehicle 1‐888‐889‐2438). . Description of the problem The offer is available for a very For Canadian purchased vehicles, limited period of time from the call 1-800-268-6800. date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine Service is available 24 hours a day, your vehicle's eligibility, visit 365 days a year. Customer Information 13-7

Coverage Services Provided It is the owner's responsibility for the repair or replacement of Services are provided up to . Emergency Fuel Delivery: the tire if it is not covered by 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), Delivery of enough fuel for the the warranty. whichever comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest . Battery Jump Start: Service is In the U.S., anyone driving the service station. provided to jump start a dead vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Lock Out Service: Service is ‐ battery. person driving the vehicle without provided to unlock the vehicle if permission from the owner is not you are locked out. A remote . Trip Routing Service: Detailed covered. unlock may be available if you maps of North America are ® provided when requested either Roadside Assistance is not a part of have OnStar . For security with the most direct route or the the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. reasons, the driver must present most scenic route. Additional GMC and General Motors of identification before this service travel information is also Canada Limited reserve the right to is given. available. Allow three weeks make any changes or discontinue . Emergency Tow From a Public for delivery. the Roadside Assistance program Road or Highway: Tow to the at any time without notification. nearest GMC dealer for warranty . Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is GMC and General Motors of service, or if the vehicle was in interrupted due to a warranty Canada Limited reserve the right a crash and cannot be driven. failure, incidental expenses to limit services or payment to an Assistance is also given when may be reimbursed during owner or driver if they decide the the vehicle is stuck in the sand, the 5 years/100,000 miles claims are made too often, or mud, or snow. (160 000 km) Powertrain the same type of claim is made . Flat Tire Change: Service is warranty period. Items many times. provided to change a flat tire considered are hotel, meals, with the spare tire. The spare and rental car. tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. 13-8 Customer Information

Services Not Included in . Trip Interruption Benefits and Scheduling Service Roadside Assistance Assistance: Must be over 250 kilometres from where Appointments . Impound towing caused by your trip was started to When your vehicle requires violation of any laws. qualify. General Motors of warranty service, contact your . Legal fines. Canada Limited requires dealer/retailer and request an pre-authorization, original appointment. By scheduling a . Mounting, dismounting or detailed receipts, and a copy service appointment and advising changing of snow tires, chains, of the repair orders. Once or other traction devices. your service consultant of your authorization has been received, transportation needs, your dealer/ . Towing or services for vehicles the Roadside Assistance advisor retailer can help minimize your driven on a non-public road or will help you make arrangements inconvenience. highway. and explain how to receive payment. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled Services Specific to Canadian into the service department . Purchased Vehicles Alternative Service: immediately, keep driving it until If assistance cannot be it can be scheduled for service, . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement provided right away, the unless, of course, the problem is is approximately $5 Canadian. Roadside Assistance advisor safety-related. If it is, please call Diesel fuel delivery may be may give you permission to get your dealership/retailer, let them restricted. Propane and other local emergency road service. know this, and ask for instructions. fuels are not provided through You will receive payment, up to this service. $100, after sending the original If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are . receipt to Roadside Assistance. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle urged to do so as early in the work registration is required. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for day as possible to allow for the . Trip Routing Service: Limit of parts and labor for repairs not same day repair. six requests per year. covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility. Customer Information 13-9

Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement Program Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, If your vehicle requires overnight To enhance your ownership if you are unable to wait, GM helps warranty repairs, and public experience, we and our participating to minimize your inconvenience by transportation is used instead dealers are proud to offer Courtesy providing several transportation of the dealer's shuttle service, Transportation, a customer support options. Depending on the the expense must be supported program for vehicles with the circumstances, your dealer can by original receipts and can only Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty offer you one of the following: be up to the maximum amount Coverage period in Canada) and allowed by GM for shuttle service. extended powertrain, and hybrid Shuttle Service In addition, for U.S. customers, specific warranty in both the Shuttle service is the preferred should you arrange transportation U.S. and Canada. means of offering Courtesy through a friend or relative, limited Several courtesy transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide reimbursement for reasonable fuel options are available to assist in you with shuttle service to get you expenses may be available. Claim reducing your inconvenience when to your destination with minimal amounts should reflect actual costs warranty repairs are required. interruption of your daily schedule. and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for Courtesy Transportation is not a This includes one‐way or round trip information regarding the allowance part of the New Vehicle Limited shuttle service within reasonable amounts for reimbursement of fuel Warranty. A separate booklet time and distance parameters of the dealer's area. or other transportation costs. entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. 13-10 Customer Information

Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Collision Damage Repair Information Your dealer may arrange to If your vehicle is involved in provide you with a courtesy All program options, such as shuttle a collision and it is damaged, rental vehicle or reimburse you service, may not be available at have the damage repaired by for a rental vehicle that you obtain every dealer. Please contact your a qualified technician using the if your vehicle is kept for an dealer for specific information proper equipment and quality overnight warranty repair. Rental about availability. All Courtesy replacement parts. Poorly performed reimbursement will be limited and Transportation arrangements will collision repairs diminish your must be supported by original be administered by appropriate vehicle's resale value, and safety receipts. This requires that you dealer personnel. performance can be compromised sign and complete a rental in subsequent collisions. agreement and meet state/ General Motors reserves the right provincial, local, and rental to unilaterally modify, change or Collision Parts vehicle provider requirements. discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all Genuine GM Collision parts are new Requirements vary and may parts made with the same materials include minimum age requirements, questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and and construction methods as the insurance coverage, credit card, parts with which your vehicle was etc. You are responsible for fuel conditions described herein at its sole discretion. originally built. Genuine GM usage charges and may also be Collision parts are your best choice responsible for taxes, levies, usage to ensure that your vehicle's fees, excessive mileage, or rental designed appearance, durability, usage beyond the completion of the and safety are preserved. The use repair. of Genuine GM parts can help It may not be possible to provide a maintain your GM New Vehicle like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. Limited Warranty. Customer Information 13-11

Recycled original equipment parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature Insuring Your Vehicle may also be used for repair. These durability/corrosion problems, Protect your investment in your parts are typically removed from and may not perform properly in GM vehicle with comprehensive vehicles that were total losses in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket and collision insurance coverage. prior crashes. In most cases, the parts are not covered by your GM There are significant differences in parts being recycled are from New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and the quality of coverage afforded by undamaged sections of the vehicle. any vehicle failure related to such various insurance policy terms. A recycled original equipment GM parts are not covered by that Many insurance policies provide part, may be an acceptable choice warranty. reduced protection to your GM to maintain your vehicle's originally vehicle by limiting compensation designed appearance and safety Repair Facility for damage repairs by using performance, however, the history of We recommend that you choose a aftermarket collision parts. Some these parts is not known. Such parts collision repair facility that meets insurance companies will not are not covered by your GM New your needs before you ever need specify aftermarket collision parts. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer When purchasing insurance, we related failures are not covered by may have a collision repair center recommend that you assure your that warranty. with GM-trained technicians and Aftermarket collision parts are state of the art equipment, or be also available. These are made able to recommend a collision by companies other than GM and repair center that has GM-trained may not have been tested for your technicians and comparable vehicle. As a result, these parts equipment. 13-12 Customer Information vehicle will be repaired with GM If a Crash Occurs . Vehicle license plate original equipment collision parts. . If there has been an injury, call Vehicle make, model and If such insurance coverage is not emergency services for help. Do not model year available from your current leave the scene of a crash until all . insurance carrier, consider switching Vehicle Identification matters have been taken care of. to another insurance carrier. Number (VIN) Move the vehicle only if its position . Insurance company and If your vehicle is leased, the leasing puts you in danger, or you are policy number company may require you to have instructed to move it by a insurance that assures repairs with police officer. . General description of the Genuine GM Original Equipment damage to the other vehicle Give only the necessary information Manufacturer (OEM) parts or to police and other parties involved Choose a reputable repair facility Genuine Manufacturer replacement in the crash. that uses quality replacement parts. parts. Read your lease carefully, as See Collision Parts earlier in you may be charged at the end of For emergency towing see “ ” this section. your lease for poor quality repairs. Roadside Assistance Program on page 13‑6. If the airbag has inflated, see What Will You See After an Airbag Gather the following information: Inflates? on page 3‑38. . Driver's name, address, phone number . Driver's license number . Owner's name, address, phone number Customer Information 13-13

Managing the Vehicle Damage initially value the repair using Service Publications Repair Process aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair professional, and insist Ordering Information In the event that your vehicle on Genuine GM parts. Remember Service Manuals requires damage repairs, GM if your vehicle is leased you may recommends that you take an active be obligated to have the vehicle Service Manuals have the diagnosis role in its repair. If you have a repaired with Genuine GM parts, and repair information on engines, pre-determined repair facility of even if your insurance coverage transmission, axle suspension, choice, take your vehicle there, does not pay the full cost. brakes, electrical, steering, or have it towed there. Specify body, etc. to the facility that any required If another party's insurance replacement collision parts be company is paying for the repairs, Service Bulletins original equipment parts, either you are not obligated to accept Service Bulletins give additional new Genuine GM parts or recycled a repair valuation based on that technical service information original GM parts. Remember, insurance company's collision needed to knowledgeably service recycled parts will not be covered policy repair limits, as you have no General Motors cars and trucks. by your GM vehicle warranty. contractual limits with that company. Each bulletin contains instructions In such cases, you can have control Insurance pays the bill for the repair, to assist in the diagnosis and of the repair and parts choices service of your vehicle. but you must live with the repair. as long as cost stays within Depending on your policy limits, reasonable limits. your insurance company may 13-14 Customer Information

Owner Information ORDER TOLL FREE: Reporting Safety 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday Owner publications are written 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Defects specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational For Credit Card Orders Only information about the vehicle. (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Reporting Safety Defects The owner manual includes Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web to the United States the Maintenance Schedule for at: helminc.com Government all models. Or you can write to: If you believe that your vehicle In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Helm, Incorporated has a defect which could cause Owner Manual, and Warranty P.O. Box 07130 Booklet. a crash or could cause injury or Detroit, MI 48207 death, you should immediately RETAIL SELL PRICE: Prices are subject to change inform the National Highway $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee without notice and without incurring Traffic Safety Administration Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Manual only. for delivery. General Motors. RETAIL SELL PRICE: Note to Canadian Customers: All If NHTSA receives similar $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to complaints, it may open an Current and Past Model make checks payable in U.S. funds. investigation, and if it finds that Order Forms a safety defect exists in a group Technical Service Bulletins and of vehicles, it may order a recall Manuals are available for current and remedy campaign. and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. Customer Information 13-15

However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects become involved in individual to the Canadian to General Motors problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like To contact NHTSA, you may If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a this, please notify General Motors. call the Vehicle Safety Hotline safety defect, notify Transport Call 1-800-GMC-8782 toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 Canada immediately, in addition (1-800-462-8782), or write: (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to to notifying General Motors of GMC Customer Assistance Center http://www.safercar.gov; or Canada Limited. Call them at P.O. Box 33172 write to: 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Detroit, MI 48232-5172 Administrator, NHTSA Transport Canada In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 Road Safety Branch 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. (English) or 1-800-263-7854 2780 Sheffield Road Washington, D.C. 20590 (French), or write: Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 You can also obtain other General Motors of Canada Limited information about motor Customer Communication Centre, vehicle safety from CA1-163-005 http://www.safercar.gov. 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 13-16 Customer Information

Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded crash or near crash-like situations, by your vehicle only if a non-trivial Your GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that recorded by the EDR under normal information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal performance and how it is driven. will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. data (e.g., name, gender, age, For example, your vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded. computer modules to monitor and The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as control engine and transmission law enforcement, could combine performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely and deploy airbags in a crash and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: acquired during a crash if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation. braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in your vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR, data to help your dealer/retailer special equipment is required, and . technician service your vehicle. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is Some modules may also store data passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle about how you operate the vehicle, buckled/fastened manufacturer, other parties, such such as rate of fuel consumption or . How far, if at all, the driver was as law enforcement, that have the average speed. These modules may pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the also retain the owner’s personal brake pedal information if they have access to preferences, such as radio pre-sets, the vehicle or the EDR. . How fast the vehicle was seat positions, and temperature traveling settings. Customer Information 13-17

GM will not access this data or Radio Frequency Radio Frequency share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, Identification (RFID) Statement if the vehicle is leased, with the RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that consent of the lessee; in response vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that to an official request of police or pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal similar government office; as part of system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC) GM's defense of litigation through connection with conveniences Rules and with RSS-210/211 of the discovery process; or, as such as key fobs for remote door Industry Canada. required by law. Data that GM locking/unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following collects or receives may also be in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions: used for GM research needs or may door openers. RFID technology in be made available to others for GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause research purposes, where a need is personal information or link with interference. shown and the data is not tied to a any other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any specific vehicle or vehicle owner. personal information. interference received, including interference that may cause Navigation System undesired operation of If your vehicle has a navigation the device. system, use of the system may Changes or modifications to any of result in the storage of destinations, these systems by other than an addresses, telephone numbers, and authorized service facility could void other trip information. Refer to the authorization to use this equipment. navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. 13-18 Customer Information

2 NOTES INDEX i-1

A Airbags Armrest Stoarge ...... 4-1 Adding Equipment to the Assistance Program, Accessories and Vehicle ...... 3-44 Roadside ...... 13-6 Modifications ...... 10-3 Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-15 Audio Controller, Accessory Power ...... 9-19 Readiness Light ...... 5-15 Rear (RAC) ...... 7-46 Add-On Electrical Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio Players ...... 7-12 Equipment ...... 9-59 Vehicles ...... 3-44 CD ...... 7-12 Adding Equipment to the System Check ...... 3-32 MP3 ...... 7-22, 7-28 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44 Alarm System Audio System Adjustments Anti-Theft ...... 2-13 Radio Reception ...... 7-11 Lumbar, Front Seats ...... 3-6 All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-25, 9-28 Rear Seat (RSA) ...... 7-44 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12 AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 7-2 Air Vents ...... 8-12 Antenna Automatic Airbag System Multi-Band ...... 7-12 Door Locks ...... 2-8 Check ...... 3-45 Anti-Theft Automatic Transmission ...... 9-24 How Does an Airbag Alarm System ...... 2-13 Fluid ...... 10-11 Restrain? ...... 3-37 Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-41 Manual Mode ...... 9-26 Passenger Sensing Antilock Brake Shiftlock Control System System ...... 3-39 System (ABS) ...... 9-28 Check ...... 10-26 What Makes an Airbag Warning Light ...... 5-20 Auxiliary Devices ...... 7-34 Inflate? ...... 3-37 Appearance Care What Will You See After Exterior ...... 10-86 an Airbag Inflates? ...... 3-38 Interior ...... 10-90 When Should an Airbag Inflate? ...... 3-35 Where Are the Airbags? ...... 3-34 i-2 INDEX

B C Center Console Storage ...... 4-1 Chains, Tire ...... 10-57 Battery ...... 10-25 Calibration ...... 5-6 Charging System Light ...... 5-16 Jump Starting ...... 10-79 California Check Load Management ...... 6-7 Fuel Requirements ...... 9-43 Engine Lamp ...... 5-17 Power Protection ...... 6-8 Perchlorate Materials Ignition Voltage and Charging Requirements ...... 10-3 Transmission Lock ...... 10-26 Messages ...... 5-36 Warning ...... 10-3 Child Restraints Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-27 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 9-36 Infants and Young Bluetooth ...... 7-46 Canadian Vehicle Owners ...... iii Children ...... 3-49 Brakes ...... 10-22 Capacities and Lower Anchors and Antilock ...... 9-28 Specifications ...... 12-2 Tethers for Children ...... 3-55 Assist ...... 9-30 Carbon Monoxide Older Children ...... 3-46 Fluid ...... 10-23 Engine Exhaust ...... 9-23 Securing ...... 3-62, 3-64 Parking ...... 9-29 Liftgate ...... 2-9 Systems ...... 3-51 System Messages ...... 5-36 Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-53 Braking ...... 9-3 Cargo Circuit Breakers ...... 10-30 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 9-17 Cover ...... 4-3 Cleaning Bulb Replacement ...... 10-29 Management System ...... 4-3 Exterior Care ...... 10-86 Fog Lamps ...... 6-4 Tie Downs ...... 4-3 Interior Care ...... 10-90 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 Cautions, Danger, and Climate Control Systems ...... 8-1 Headlamp Aiming ...... 10-28 Warnings ...... iv Dual Automatic ...... 8-4 Headlamps ...... 10-28 CD Rear ...... 8-10, 8-11 License Plate Lamps ...... 10-29 DVD Player ...... 7-14 Clock ...... 5-8 Buying New Tires ...... 10-51 CD Player ...... 7-12 INDEX i-3

Cluster, IP ...... 5-11 Cupholders ...... 4-1 Displays Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10 Customer Assistance ...... 13-4 Head-Up ...... 5-32 Compact Spare Tire ...... 10-77 Offices ...... 13-4 Dome Lamps ...... 6-5 Compass ...... 5-6 Text Telephone (TTY) Door Compressor Kit, Tire Users ...... 13-4 Ajar Messages ...... 5-37 Sealant ...... 10-59 Customer Information Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Control of a Vehicle ...... 9-3 Service Publications Locks ...... 2-7 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Ordering Information ...... 13-13 Power Locks ...... 2-8 Convex Mirrors ...... 2-16 Customer Satisfaction Drive Systems Coolant Procedure ...... 13-1 All-Wheel Drive ...... 10-25, 9-28 Engine ...... 10-14 Driver Information Engine Temperature D Center (DIC) ...... 5-24, 5-29 Gauge ...... 5-13 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10 Driving Engine Temperature Danger, Warnings, and Characteristics and Warning Light ...... 5-21 Cautions ...... iv Towing Tips ...... 9-48 Cooling System ...... 10-14 Data Recorders, Event ...... 13-16 Defensive ...... 9-2 Engine Messages ...... 5-38 Daytime Running Lamps/ Drunk ...... 9-2 Courtesy Lamps ...... 6-5 Automatic Headlamp Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-8 Courtesy Transportation System ...... 6-3 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 Program ...... 13-9 Defensive Driving ...... 9-2 If the Vehicle is Stuck ...... 9-11 Covers Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Loss of Control ...... 9-6 Cargo ...... 4-3 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 6-6 Off-Road Recovery ...... 9-5 Engine ...... 10-7 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Vehicle Load Limits ...... 9-12 Cruise Control ...... 9-32 Devices, Auxiliary ...... 7-34 Winter ...... 9-9 Light ...... 5-23 Messages ...... 5-37 i-4 INDEX

Driving for Better Fuel Engine (cont.) F Economy ...... 1-21 Coolant Temperature Filter Dual Automatic Climate Gauge ...... 5-13 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 10-12 Control System ...... 8-4 Coolant Temperature Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 DVD Warning Light ...... 5-21 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 6-3 Rear Seat Entertainment Cooling System ...... 10-14 Flat Tire ...... 10-57 System ...... 7-36 Cooling System Messages . . .5-38 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 10-67 DVD/CD Player ...... 7-14 Cover ...... 10-7 Floor Console Storage ...... 4-2 Drive Belt Routing ...... 12-3 Floor Mats ...... 10-93 Exhaust ...... 9-23 E Fluid Overheated Protection Electrical Equipment, Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11 Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Add-On ...... 9-59 Brakes ...... 10-23 Overheating ...... 10-18 Electrical System Power Steering ...... 10-20 Power Messages ...... 5-39 Engine Compartment Washer ...... 10-21 Pressure Light ...... 5-22 Fuse Block ...... 10-30 Fog Lamps Running While Parked ...... 9-24 Fuses and Circuit Bulb Replacement ...... 6-4 Starting ...... 9-19 Breakers ...... 10-30 Light ...... 5-23 Engine Oil Instrument Panel Fuse Folding Mirrors ...... 2-17 Life System ...... 10-9 Block ...... 10-34 Front Seats Messages ...... 5-39 Overload ...... 10-30 Adjustment ...... 3-3 Entry Lighting ...... 6-6 Engine Heated ...... 3-9 Equipment, Towing ...... 9-57 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 10-12 Heated and Ventilated ...... 3-10 Check and Service Engine Event Data Recorders ...... 13-16 Soon Lamp ...... 5-17 Extender, Safety Belt ...... 3-30 Compartment Overview ...... 10-6 Exterior Lamp Controls ...... 6-1 Coolant ...... 10-14 INDEX i-5

Fuel ...... 9-42 G H Additives ...... 9-44 Garage Door Opener ...... 5-52 Halogen Bulbs ...... 10-28 Filling a Portable Fuel Programming ...... 5-52 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 6-3 Container ...... 9-47 Gasoline Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Filling the Tank ...... 9-45 Specifications ...... 9-43 Head-Up Display (HUD) ...... 5-32 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-44 Gauges Headlamps Gasoline Specifications ...... 9-43 Engine Coolant Aiming ...... 10-28 Gauge ...... 5-12 Temperature ...... 5-13 Bulb Replacement ...... 10-28 Recommended ...... 9-43 Fuel ...... 5-12 Daytime Running Lamps/ Requirements, California . . . . .9-43 Odometer ...... 5-12 Automatic Headlamp System Messages ...... 5-39 Speedometer ...... 5-12 System ...... 6-3 Fuel Economy Tachometer ...... 5-12 Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Driving for Better ...... 1-21 Voltmeter ...... 5-13 High-Beam On Light ...... 5-23 Fuses Warning Lights and High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Engine Compartment Indicators ...... 5-10 Heated and Ventilated Front Fuse Block ...... 10-30 General Information Seats ...... 3-10 Fuses and Circuit Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Heated Front Seats ...... 3-9 Breakers ...... 10-30 Towing ...... 9-47 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-18 Instrument Panel Fuse Vehicle Care ...... 10-2 High Voltage Devices and Block ...... 10-34 Glove Box ...... 4-1 Wiring ...... 10-29 GM Mobility Reimbursement High-Beam On Light ...... 5-23 Program ...... 13-6 Highway Hypnosis ...... 9-8 i-6 INDEX

Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 9-8 K Latch, Lower Anchors and Hood ...... 10-5 Tethers for Children ...... 3-55 Key and Lock Messages ...... 5-40 Horn ...... 5-4 Liftgate Keyless Entry How to Wear Safety Belts Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-9 Remote (RKE) System ...... 2-3 Properly ...... 3-19 Lighting Keyless Entry System ...... 2-2 Delayed Entry ...... 6-6 Keys ...... 2-2 I Delayed Exit ...... 6-6 Ignition Positions ...... 9-18 L Entry ...... 6-6 Ignition Transmission Lock Illumination Control ...... 6-5 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 10-37 Check ...... 10-26 Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Lamp Messages ...... 5-40 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Lights Lamps Infants and Young Children, Airbag Readiness ...... 5-15 Courtesy ...... 6-5 Restraints ...... 3-49 Antilock Brake System Dome ...... 6-5 Instrument Cluster ...... 5-11 (ABS) Warning ...... 5-20 Exterior Controls ...... 6-1 Instrument Panel Charging System ...... 5-16 License Plate ...... 10-29 Storage Area ...... 4-1 Cruise Control ...... 5-23 Malfunction Indicator ...... 5-17 Introduction ...... iii, 7-1 Engine Coolant Reading ...... 6-5 Temperature Warning ...... 5-21 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-25 Engine Oil Pressure ...... 5-22 J LATCH System Flash-to-Pass ...... 6-3 Jump Starting ...... 10-79 Replacing Parts After a Fog Lamps ...... 5-23 Crash ...... 3-61 High-Beam On ...... 5-23 INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.) M Messages (cont.) High/Low Beam Changer ...... 6-2 Object Detection System . . . . .5-40 Maintenance Safety Belt Reminders ...... 5-14 Ride Control System ...... 5-41 Records ...... 11-11 Security ...... 5-23 Service Vehicle ...... 5-42 Maintenance Schedule StabiliTrak® Indicator ...... 5-21 Tire ...... 5-42 Recommended Fluids and Tire Pressure ...... 5-21 Transmission ...... 5-43 Lubricants ...... 11-8 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 5-20 Vehicle ...... 5-36 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Locks Vehicle Reminder ...... 5-44 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Automatic Door ...... 2-8 Vehicle Speed ...... 5-44 Manual Mode ...... 9-26 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Washer Fluid ...... 5-44 Messages Door ...... 2-7 Mirrors Airbag System ...... 5-41 Lockout Protection ...... 2-8 Automatic Dimming Anti-Theft Alarm System ...... 5-41 Power Door ...... 2-8 Rearview ...... 2-19 Battery Voltage and Safety ...... 2-8 Convex ...... 2-16 Charging ...... 5-36 Loss of Control ...... 9-6 Folding ...... 2-17 Brake System ...... 5-36 Lower Anchors and Heated ...... 2-18 Door Ajar ...... 5-37 Tethers for Children Manual Rearview ...... 2-19 Engine Cooling System ...... 5-38 (LATCH SYSTEM) ...... 3-55 Park Tilt ...... 2-18 Engine Oil ...... 5-39 Lumbar Adjustment ...... 3-6 Power ...... 2-17 Engine Power ...... 5-39 Front Seats ...... 3-6 Monitor System, Fuel System ...... 5-39 Tire Pressure ...... 10-44 Key and Lock ...... 5-40 MP3 ...... 7-22, 7-28 Lamp ...... 5-40 Multi-Band Antenna ...... 7-12 i-8 INDEX

N Outlets Perchlorate Materials Power ...... 5-8 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Navigation System Overheated Engine Phone Vehicle Data Recording Protection Bluetooth ...... 7-46 and Privacy ...... 13-17 Operating Mode ...... 10-20 Power Net, Convenience ...... 4-3 Overheating, Engine ...... 10-18 Door Locks ...... 2-8 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 9-17 Mirrors ...... 2-17 O P Outlets ...... 5-8 Parade Dimming ...... 6-7 Protection, Battery ...... 6-8 Object Detection System Park Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19 Messages ...... 5-40 Shifting Into ...... 9-21 Seat Adjustment ...... 3-4 Odometer ...... 5-12 Shifting Out of ...... 9-22 Steering Fluid ...... 10-20 Off-Road Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-18 Windows ...... 2-20 Recovery ...... 9-5 Parking Pregnancy, Using Safety Oil Assist, Ultrasonic ...... 9-35 Belts ...... 3-30 Engine ...... 10-8 Brake ...... 9-29 Privacy Engine Oil Life System ...... 10-9 Brake and P (Park) Radio Frequency Messages ...... 5-39 Mechanism Check ...... 10-27 Identification (RFID) ...... 13-17 Pressure Light ...... 5-22 Over Things That Burn ...... 9-23 Program Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-46 Passenger Airbag Status Courtesy Transportation ...... 13-9 Online Owner Center ...... 13-5 Proposition 65 Warning, ® Indicator ...... 5-15 OnStar System ...... 1-22 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-39 California ...... 10-3 Operation, Infotainment System ...... 7-2 INDEX i-9

R Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-36 Replacing Airbag System ...... 3-46 Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5 Replacing LATCH System Radio Frequency Rearview Mirrors ...... 2-19 Parts After a Crash ...... 3-61 Identification (RFID) ...... 13-17 Automatic Dimming ...... 2-19 Replacing Safety Belt Statement ...... 13-17 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-7 System Parts After a Radios Recommended Fluids and Crash ...... 3-31 AM-FM Radio ...... 7-6 Lubricants ...... 11-8 Reporting Safety Defects CD/DVD Player ...... 7-14 Recommended Fuel ...... 9-43 Canadian Government ...... 13-15 Reception ...... 7-11 Records General Motors ...... 13-15 Satellite ...... 7-8 Maintenance ...... 11-11 U.S. Government ...... 13-14 Reading Lamps ...... 6-5 Recreational Vehicle Retained Accessory Rear Audio Towing ...... 10-83 Power (RAP) ...... 9-19 Controller (RAC) ...... 7-46 Reimbursement Program, Ride Control Systems Rear Climate Control GM Mobility ...... 13-6 Messages ...... 5-41 System ...... 8-10, 8-11 Remote Keyless Entry Roadside Assistance Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (RKE) System ...... 2-2, 2-3 Program ...... 13-6 System ...... 7-44 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Roof Rear Seat Entertainment Replacement Bulbs ...... 10-29 Sunroof ...... 2-22 System ...... 7-36 Replacement Parts Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 7-44 Airbags ...... 3-46 Rotation, Tires ...... 10-49 Rear Seats ...... 3-10 Maintenance ...... 11-10 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Running the Vehicle While Parked ...... 9-24 i-10 INDEX

S Seats (cont.) Shifting Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6 Into Park ...... 9-21 Safety Belts ...... 3-16 Power Adjustment, Front ...... 3-4 Out of Park ...... 9-22 Care ...... 3-31 Rear ...... 3-10 Signals, Turn and Extender ...... 3-30 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 3-7 Lane-Change ...... 6-4 How to Wear Safety Belts Third Row Seat ...... 3-13 Spare Tire Properly ...... 3-19 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-76 Compact ...... 10-77 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 3-25 Securing Child Specifications and Reminders ...... 5-14 Restraints ...... 3-62, 3-64 Capacities ...... 12-2 Replacing After a Crash ...... 3-31 Security Speedometer ...... 5-12 Use During Pregnancy ...... 3-30 Light ...... 5-23 StabiliTrak System ...... 9-30 Safety Defects Reporting Vehicle ...... 2-13 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-21 Canadian Government ...... 13-15 Service Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-5 General Motors ...... 13-15 Accessories and Starter Switch Check ...... 10-26 U.S. Government ...... 13-14 Modifications ...... 10-3 Starting the Engine ...... 9-19 Safety Locks ...... 2-8 Doing Your Own Work ...... 10-4 Steering ...... 9-4 Safety System Check ...... 3-31 Engine Soon Lamp ...... 5-17 Fluid, Power ...... 10-20 Satellite Radio ...... 7-8 Maintenance Records ...... 11-11 Wheel Adjustment ...... 5-2 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 11-2 Maintenance, General Wheel Controls ...... 5-2 Scheduling Appointments ...... 13-8 Information ...... 11-1 Sealant Kit, Tire ...... 10-59 Storage Areas Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Armrest ...... 4-1 Seats Publications Ordering Cargo Cover ...... 4-3 Adjustment, Front ...... 3-3 Information ...... 13-13 Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Head Restraints ...... 3-2 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Center Console ...... 4-1 Heated and Ventilated Vehicle Messages ...... 5-42 Convenience Net ...... 4-3 Front ...... 3-10 Servicing the Floor Console ...... 4-2 Heated Front ...... 3-9 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44 INDEX i-11

Storage Areas (cont.) Tires Tires (cont.) Glove Box ...... 4-1 Buying New Tires ...... 10-51 Wheel Alignment and Tire Instrument Panel ...... 4-1 Chains ...... 10-57 Balance ...... 10-55 Roof Rack System ...... 4-4 Changing ...... 10-67 Wheel Replacement ...... 10-56 Storing the Tire Sealant Compact Spare ...... 10-77 When It Is Time for New and Compressor Kit ...... 10-66 Designations ...... 10-39 Tires ...... 10-51 Stuck Vehicle ...... 9-11 Different Size ...... 10-53 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 9-27 Sun Visors ...... 2-22 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 10-57 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 5-20 Sunroof ...... 2-22 Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-46 Towing Symbols ...... iv Inspection ...... 10-49 Driving Characteristics ...... 9-48 System Messages ...... 5-42 Equipment ...... 9-57 Roof Rack ...... 4-4 Pressure Light ...... 5-21 General Information ...... 9-47 System Check Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-44 Recreational Vehicle ...... 10-83 Automatic Transmission Rotation ...... 10-49 Trailer ...... 9-53 Shiftlock Control ...... 10-26 Sealant and Vehicle ...... 10-83 Compressor Kit ...... 10-59 Trailer Towing ...... 9-53 T Sealant and Compressor Transmission Tachometer ...... 5-12 Kit, Storing ...... 10-66 Automatic ...... 9-24 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Secondary Latch System . . . 10-76 Fluid, Automatic ...... 10-11 Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-14 Sidewall Labeling ...... 10-37 Messages ...... 5-43 Immobilizer ...... 2-14 Terminology and Transportation Program, Third-Row Seats ...... 3-13 Definitions ...... 10-40 Courtesy ...... 13-9 Time ...... 5-8 Uniform Tire Quality Turn and Lane-Change Grading ...... 10-54 Signals ...... 6-4 i-12 INDEX

U Vehicle Care Washer Fluid ...... 10-21 Storing the Tire Sealant Washer Fluid Messages ...... 5-44 Ultrasonic Parking Assist ...... 9-35 and Compressor Kit ...... 10-66 Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Tire Pressure ...... 10-43 Alignment and Tire Grading ...... 10-54 Vehicle Identification Balance ...... 10-55 Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-52 Number (VIN) ...... 12-1 Different Size ...... 10-53 Operation ...... 5-56 Service Parts Identification Replacement ...... 10-56 Programming ...... 5-52 Label ...... 12-1 When It Is Time for New Using this Manual ...... iv Vehicle Reminder Tires ...... 10-51 Messages ...... 5-44 Where to Put the Child V Ventilation, Air ...... 8-12 Restraint ...... 3-53 Vehicle Visors ...... 2-22 Windows ...... 2-20 Canadian Owners ...... iii Voltage Devices, and Power ...... 2-20 Control ...... 9-3 Wiring ...... 10-29 Windshield Load Limits ...... 9-12 Voltmeter Gauge ...... 5-13 Wiper/Washer ...... 5-4 Messages ...... 5-36 Winter Driving ...... 9-9 Personalization ...... 5-45 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-27 Remote Start ...... 2-5 W Warning Lights, Gauges, Wipers Security ...... 2-13 and Indicators ...... 5-10 Rear Washer ...... 5-5 Speed Messages ...... 5-44 Warnings ...... iv Wiring, High Voltage Towing ...... 10-83 Cautions and Danger ...... iv Devices ...... 10-29 Hazard Flashers ...... 6-3